Home

ETA Systems UPS 600VA

1. 1 1 i f I E I I E I 18 p 1 I I 1 B a i L I I I k I E I i I I E 1 B a I BL I 1 1 I a B 1 I a 1 I a I BERE f LI f Jl I 1 11 _ FEM gt ol C1 GW Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Functions This equipment is a high performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner unit a transmitter receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit This equipment complies with the performance standard of IMO 1 1 1 Function of This System The JMA 9172 SA is a color radar system designed to comply with the international standards of the IMO The mai
2. un Y 1 TWO HA EA Starboard side 6 Pull the radar process unit to the open position 7 Loosen the M4 screw 8 Hook the stopper in the insertion hole Japan Radio Ltd 8 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 4 Replacement of Motor 9 Remove the bolts two M10 bolts on the portside of the motor 10 Remove the bolts two M10 bolts on th
3. 9 9 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING _9 1 FAULT FINDING In case of semiconductor circuits it is deemed that there are few cases in which the used semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes In general the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high value resistor due to moisture a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch or relay Some troubles are caused by defective parts imperfect adjustment such as tuning adjustment or insufficient service such as poor cable contact It will also be effective to check and readjust these points 9 1 1 List of Alarms and other Indications If any of the following alarm occurs the system displays the alarm message in red in order to attract the attention of operator Other messages are displayed with the suitable color which is yellow or blue depending on the level of message importance Alarm Red Collision related Alarm Navigation Alarm e System Alarm Warning Yellow System Warning Infomation Blue Operation Information Alarm message is displayed in the lower right of the display For more details refer to page2 31 Alarm ETE This section gives the lis
4. 3 69 3 7 3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude Waypoint Input 3 76 3 7 4 Use Route Monitoring Function Waypoint Route Alarm 3 80 3 7 5 Method of Using Route 2 2 3 82 3 7 6 Detailed Route Settings 2 1 3 83 3 7 7 Clear Waypoint Route Data Clear WPT Route Data 3 88 3 7 8 Operate Route Data File 2 3 89 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 2 a aa 3 93 3 8 1 Set Radar Signal Processing Process Setting 3 93 3 8 2 Set Radar Trails RADAR Trails Setting 3 97 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting 3 99 3 8 4 Set Cursor Cursor Setting 3 100 3 8 5 Set Radar Display Display Setting 3 101 3 8 6 Adjust Sound Volume Buzzer Volume 3 104 3 8 7 Set User Option Keys OPTION 1 2 3 104 3 8 8 Set Navigation Data Display Multi Window Setting 3 106 3 8 9 AUTO Backup 3 111 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 22 22 3 113 3 9 1 Operation Procedures 3 113 3
5. 3 104 3 8 8 Set Navigation Data Display Multi Window Setting 3 106 2 09 AUTO Backup a 3 111 3 9 USE FUNC TION KEY USERT s Eee oho beet 3 113 3 9 1 Operation Procedures 3 113 3 9 2 Function Setting Menu ltems ees 3 114 3 9 3 Overview of Function Operations User Function Setting 3 115 3 9 4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data 3 119 340 JUSEUSERSETTIINQG 1 nui toute died iuo uie boue eee 3 120 3 10 1 Save Operating State Save User Setting 3 120 3 10 2 Load Operating State Load User Setting 3 121 Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 10 3 Delete Operating State Delete User Setting 3 121 3 11 CARD uomo cese oe eru cu ues 3 122 3 11 1 Operate File on the Card File Manager 3 122 212 RECEIVE PORT SETTING iiie eoa quei eo 3 129 3 12 1 Receive Port Setting RX Port 3 129 SECTION 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 2 222 1 4 1 4 1 1 Using CUESOFT 4 2 4 1 2 Using Range Rings Range Rings
6. ima rumes cm Fue amp at Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in maneuvering the ship For this purpose the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has For better interpretation of radar display it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port to measure own ship s position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart and to monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display Various types of radar display will be explained below 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam propagates In the normal propagation the distan
7. section 3 6 3 6 page 3 59 Delete by by Color section 3 6 3 7 on page 3 60 hift section 3 6 4 1 on page 3 61 Clear section 3 6 4 2 on page 3 62 ark Display Setting section 3 6 2 on page 3 51 F2 Display Mark Type section 3 6 2 1 on page 3 51 1 All OD4PoO 2 3 4 5 6 7 Wreck mark 8 AA 9 Next 1 VV 2 AV 3 VA 4 5 X 6 Y 7 Hand drum mark 8 Light house mark 9 Next 1 Trapezoid mark 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 filled Trapezoid mark Hat mark Filled Triangle mark anchor mark Next Slash anchor mark circle dotted line mark non dangerous wreck mark mariner s event mark mark Wavy line mark Solid line mark Next ie Qro Seis gp denm pepe ae es eG dX uae 1 Dashed dotted line mark play Mark Color section 3 6 2 2 on page 3 52 1 All 2 White 3 E p 3 4 I E15 Cyan HE2 Di T T Tow Japan Radio Ltd 40 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index
8. 4 New Target 5 Lost ALR Output section 7 2 8 4 on page 7 21 1 System Alarm L 2 TT AIS Alarm 4 Sound Output Mode section 7 2 8 6 7 23 5 External ACK Setting section 7 2 8 5 on 7 22 i24 Critical Alarm 1 Audio 21 L 3 Acknowledge State 1 12 Normal Alarm 1 Audio 2 Indication L 3 Acknowledge State 1 17 Inter Switch C 15 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 9 Serviceman Menu ISW Install px d 1 12 Mask Setting 1 1 Connection No 1 Master 2 No 2 Connection No 2 Master 3 No 3 Connection No 3 Master 4 4 Connection No 4 Master 5 No 5 Connection No 5 Master 6 No 6 Connection No 6 Master H 7 7 Connection No 7 Master L 8 No 8 Connection No 8 Master L 38 S ISW TXRX Power Supply F 8 Language section 7 2 5 on page 7 17 1 19 Next 1 InputBP Count section 7 2 4 2 on page 7 17 Device Installation 5 section 7 1 6 on page 7 6 H 1 Gyro 2 Compass 4 LOG 5 2AXW
9. section 3 7 6 6 on page 3 87 3 WaypointSkp section 3 7 5 2 on page 3 83 4 WaypointBack Skip section 3 7 5 2 on page 3 83 F 5 Set Cancel Waypoint 6 Clear WPT Route Data HE4 File Op rations section 3 7 8 on page 3 89 11 Select Card Slot s section 3 7 8 1 on page 3 89 2 ete de dee er A e i oe section 3 7 8 3 on page 3 90 LL Bt Save section 3 7 8 2 on page 3 89 4 Erase e de cpu ues section 3 7 8 4 on page 3 91 C 11 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 8 U Map C 8 U Map 1 Own Ship Position section 3 6 3 1 on page 3 53 2 Edit User Map section 3 6 3 on page 3 53 E1 Make with Cursor section 3 6 1 1 on page 3 48 1 Type L 2 Color 2 Make with L L section 3 6 1 3 on page 3 50 Type Color L L Comment Enter New Line Input 9 New Mark Input 3 Move section 3 6 3 2 on page 3 54 4 Delete section 3 6 3 3 on page 3 56 5 Insert Move Vertex section 3 6 3 4 on 3 57 6 7 OnNRWNh Delete Vertex
10. E 2 2 I E c 04 2 101 2m H 7ZCRD1337 NCE 5163 R JRC SUPPLY TERMINAL BOARD CQD 2176 PC430 TO OPU 30P 14311 TO SUB 30P J4312 gt SCANNER MOTOR POWER 9170 390 WAKE JMA 9172 SA Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD 9170 self standing Interconnection Diagram of NCD 9170 Fig B 1 JRC Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit NCD 9170T B 1 2 MONITOR UNIT NWZ 178 RT amp option OPERATION UNIT USER SUPPLY NCE 5322 RT PS 2 MOUSE TRKBALL LCD PANEL ir OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 H ZWSRD0002 x means revision of the specification document 15P J6102 PS 2 EXTENSION CABLE USER SUPPLY wN O a si e D x O 3 m 14 15 36408 26406 16405 16404 26403 26402 9P 5m H 7ZCRD1330A NWZ 178 RT OPERATION CIRCUIT D Me CCK 1007 f N RADAR PROCESS UNIT S AIS PROCESS 5 1478 il CIRCUIT B E CDC 1363 5m H 7ZCRD1338 NCE 5322 RT ad 460 C JRC SUPPLY PROCESS E il CIRCUIT TO OPU CDC 1364 OPTION B101 34309 aah ma 450 IZ TO SUB OPU 30P 343
11. 3 37 3 4 15 Set Own Ship Speed 3 37 3 4 16 Compass Correction MAG Compass Setting 3 38 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 40 3 5 1 Display Own Ship s Track Display Own Track 3 40 3 5 2 Set Display Color of Own Ship s Track Display Own Track Color 3 41 3 5 3 Save Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory 3 42 3 5 4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory 3 42 3 5 5 Clear Own Ship s Track Clear Own Track 3 43 3 5 6 Use Expanded Own Ship s Track Own Track Type 3 43 3 9 7 Use Water Depth Track Water Depth Track 3 45 3 5 8 Use Water Temperature Track Water TEMP Track 3 46 Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 5 9 Use Tidal Current Track Current Vector Track 3 47 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 48 3 6 1 Create User Map Mark Line 3 48 3 6 2 Set User Map Display Mark Display Setting 3 51 3 6 3 Edit User Map Edit User Map 3 53 3 6 4 Correct Position on User Map Shift User 3 61 3655 Save User Map
12. 3 40 3 5 1 Display Own Ship s Track Display Own Track 3 40 3 5 2 Set Display Color of Own Ship s Track Display Own Track Color 3 41 3 5 3 Save Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory 3 42 3 5 4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory 3 42 3 5 5 Clear Own Ship s Track Clear Own Track 3 43 3 5 6 Use Expanded Own Ship s Track Own Track Type 3 43 3 5 7 Use Water Depth Track Water Depth Track 3 45 3 5 8 Use Water Temperature Track Water TEMP Track 3 46 3 5 9 Use Tidal Current Track Current Vector Track 3 47 DISPLAY USER 3 48 3 6 1 Create User Map Mark Line 3 48 3 6 2 Set User Map Display Mark Display Setting 3 51 3 6 3 Edit User Map Edit User Map 3 53 3 6 4 Correct Position on User Map Shift User 3 61 3 6 5 User Map 3 62 3 6 6 Set and Display Geodetic System Geodetic 3 66 USE ROUTE FUNCTION reiten 3 68 3 7 1 Display Route Destination Mark Select Route 3 68 3 7 2 Edit Route Set Route Sequence
13. 4 2 4 1 3 Using Electronic Bearing Line EBL1 EBL2 4 3 4 1 4 Using Parallel Index Lines Menu 4 8 4 1 5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function EBL Maneuver Setting 4 14 4 1 6 Operating EBL VRM and PI with Cursor 4 16 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 19 4 2 1 Measurement with Cursor Position Cursor 4 20 4 2 2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker EBL VRM eee 4 20 4 2 3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points 4 21 SECTION 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS 5 1 PREPARATION eec 5 1 5 1 1 Collision AVOIDANCE nic eee ieee 5 2 5 1 2 DeTINITIONS Of SYMDOIS 5 5 5 1 3 Radar 015 5 9 5 1 4 Cursor Modes Cursor 4 2 4 2 2 22 5 11 5 1 5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria 5 13 5 1 6 Setting Vectors Vector Time eese 5 14 5 1 7 Setting the GPS antenna location 5 14 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 15 5 2 1 Acquiring Target ACQ
14. page 5 51 Erase 5 52 6 T TRK Display 5 53 1 13 Trial Maneuver section 5 7 on page 5 54 1 Trial Function 2 Course EBL Speed VRM 4 Vector Time 5 6 hie Time to Maneuver Own Ship s Dynamic Trait 1 Reach 3 Turn Radius 4 Acceleration 5 Deceleration arget Number Display section 5 2 4 on page 5 19 Test Menu section 5 2 7 on page 5 22 n D 4 Ta 39 T 1 Test VideO s oe ee ee Rom dm RR Ru EE d due section 5 2 7 1 on page 5 23 E 2 TT Simulator tee RR RR eum ee section 5 2 7 2 on page 5 24 p L 3 Status section 5 2 7 3 on page 5 25 4 Gate Display section 5 2 7 4 on page 5 26 c r Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 4 AIS as Li 1 Asso lation Setting section 5 4 2 on page 5 38 Association Proprity Bearing Range Course Speed Applicable AIS Target Track Setting section 5 6 2 on page 5 45 Target Track Function section 5 6 2 2 on page 5 45 Target Track C
15. section 5 2 1 1 on page 5 15 78 Make AZ 1 te Sea eee eee E qure Da Ded e pe ad det e section 5 2 1 2 on page 5 16 F 4MakeAZ2 section 5 2 1 2 on page 5 16 5 ENT C C 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 6 Track 6 Track DISP Own Track Color 44 eu 2 2 Rom section 3 5 2 on page 3 41 All White Cyan Blue Green Yellow Pink Red Clear Own Track Color section 3 5 5 on page 3 43 Track section 3 5 6 on page 3 43 Num Vector Display section 3 5 6 on page 3 43 File Operations Select Card Slot Load Mode Load Save Erase Card Own Track Display Depth Setting section 3 5 7 on page 3 45 Depth setting MIN Depth setting Depth setting Depth setting Depth setting Depth setting MAX ter TEMP Setting section 3 5 8 on page 3 46 1 Temperature setting MIN 2 Temperature setting 3 Temperature setting 4 Temperature setting 5 6 oR wh Por eo ie Pal des ae ae ae a 2 5 TT T T Fr 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 4 5 6 17 W 0 Temperature setting Temperature setting MAX rrent Setting section
16. 7 16 7 2 5 Language Setting Language esse 7 17 7 2 6 Date Time Setting ii occa 7 18 7 2 7 Input Installation Information 7 19 7 2 8 Setting the Alarm System 7 19 7 2 9 Network Setting Network 7 24 1 2 10 CAN Port Setting eo 7 27 7 3 ADJUSTMENT iconos 7 30 7 3 1 Noise Level Adjustment Noise Level 7 30 7 3 2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function TT 7 31 7 3 3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment MBS 7 33 7 3 4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor SSR MON 7 35 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU lt lt 7 38 7 4 1 Antenna Safety Switch Safety Switch 7 38 Japan Radio Co Ltd 7 4 2 Initialization of Memory Area Area Initial 7 39 7 4 3 Save of Internal Memory Data Card1 2 7 40 7 4 4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time TXRX Time 1 41 7 4 5 Update of Character String Data String Data Update
17. B 0 Japan Radio Ltd C 4 section 8 3 1 2 on page 8 8 section 8 3 1 3 on page 8 8 section 8 3 1 4 on page 8 9 5 System Alarm Log section 8 3 1 5 on page 8 10 L 6 System Information section 8 3 1 6 on page 8 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 2 PI C 2 PI 1 Display for All Lines section 4 1 4 on page 4 8 2 Operation Mode page 4 10 Al Individual Track L Equiangular SI COMO Raat apti Sus elf ipsc eres eidcm e page 4 11 All All Individual Sequential Individual Index Line 1 Individual Index Line 2 Individual Index Line 3 Individual Index Line 4 Individual Index Line 5 Individual Index Line 6 Individual Index Line 7 Individual Index Line 8 Track Group 1 Track Group 2 Track Group 3 Track Group 4 Equiangular Group 1 Equiangular Group 2 Equiangular Group 3 Equiangular Group 4 4 Floating page 4 11 Heading Link page 4 11 Next Press EBL Dial to Control Press VRM Dial to Move End Point Range Scale Link page 4 12 Reference Bearing 4 12 All HL Individual True Individual HL Individual Index Line 1 Individual Index Line
18. Precipitation of16 mm hr Pulse width0 05us Predpitation of4 mm hr Pulse width0 05us 9 Predpitation of16 mm hr Pulse widthO 8us H Predpitation of4 mm hr Pulse width0 8us Detection distance while it is raining NM Detection distance while it is not rainning NM Fig 6 5 Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to precipitation 6 7 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW C Coping with sea clutter and rain and snow clutter When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough the use of the S band radar is effective because the radar 1s not influenced by sea clutter so much and attenuation due to rain drops is small When an X band radar is used reducing the pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves and also the spurious wave rejection function effectively works therefore the use of short pulse 15 effective when the weather is bad By using image processing functions PROCI 1 to 3 it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed Since optimal settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode it is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode when the weather 1s bad For details of the function mode see Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER However these functions
19. Cursor longitude 3009990 55 17 967 N EBL1 numeric value indication 7 42 11 44 068 EBL1 true relative 1863 starting point mode d VRMI 3 10 NM 2 EBL1 bearing a 5128 1997 d Wo VRM2 252 NM starting point mode EN is Parallel index line YPM range b 5 starting point mode EBL2 numeric value indication Consistent Common true relative EBL2 bearing VRM range Reference Point CCRP Lower right of the display Own ship s track interval Mark color Mark Own ship s track interval unit Own ship s track color 5 Track 30 sec Shift display Data CPA Map position correction On Off OFF Off Ring indication Graphic display CPA ring display On Off On Off Ship s heading line On Off Own ship s information Operation status Ship s heading bearin Heading device Own Ship Information amp 9 9 3150 MM Spr 2 15 6 wn ships spee Speed sensor 3 05 9 z 506 15 8 eil course over ground pee meee UTC 2008 07 01 1234 Own ship s GPS 5514 350 N speed over ground Positioning system example GPS DGPS 584 11 55 234 E Geodetic positioning system Date and time CCRP latitude CCRP longitude Japan Radio Ltd 2 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Target tracking TT AIS information
20. section 7 2 3 on page 7 16 L 7 SSR Mon Setting section 7 3 4 on page 7 35 2 Tx2 Mon Adjustment 4 Rx2 Mon Adjustment 5 Monitor Secter 6 monitor Range 7 Rx Mon Gain Se ie quu 1 12 Installation Menu E11 Installation Information section 7 2 7 on page 7 19 1 Date 2 Name 3 Company Master Slave section 7 2 4 1 on page 7 17 Sector Blank section 7 2 2 on page 7 15 1 Sector section 7 2 2 1 on page 7 15 Sector2 section 7 2 2 1 on page 7 15 Sector section 7 2 2 1 on page 7 15 MakeSector1 section 7 2 2 2 on page 7 15 Make Sector2 section 7 2 2 2 on page 7 15 Make Sector3 section 7 2 2 2 on page 7 15 T ENT section 7 2 2 2 on page 7 15 RP Setting section 7 1 9 on page 7 8 M Port Setting section 7 2 1 on page 7 11 1 Baud Rate section 7 2 1 1 on page 7 11 1 COMPASS 2 MAINTENANCE LOG 3 NAV1 4 NAV2 5 ALARM 6 JARPA T AIS 9 Next 1 ARPA 2 COM Port section 7 2 1 2 on page 7 12 1 GPS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 4 15
21. 1 Pulse Length 0 75nm page 3 117 H 2 Pulse Length 1 5nm H 3 Pulse Length 3 4nm 4 Pulse Length 6 8nm H 5 Pulse Length 12nm 6 Pulse Length 16nm 9 Next 1 Video Latiude page 3 117 H 2 Video Noise Rejection H 3 AUTO Dynamic Range 4 Process Switch 5 2nd Process Mode H 6 Process Switch Range 7 Fast Target Detection 1 19 Next E Trails Interval lt 6 gt de uer Se eee ee ee page 3 117 H 2 Trails Mode 3 Trails Reference Level H 4 Trails Reduction 6 Trails Process 7 Max Interval 9 Next TuGalh Offseb Sh ose tee ee S E EE WE page 3 117 2 PRF H 3 Small Buoy Detection 4 Fishnet Detection H 5 Antenna Height H 8 Set Mode Default 9 Initialize 2 Function2 Setting HE3 Function3 Setting 1 4 Function4 Setting H 2 RADAR Trails Setting H 1 Trails Mode section 3 8 2 1 on page 3 97 2 Trails Reference Level section 3 8 2 2 on page 3 97 3 Trails Reduction section 3 8 2 3 on page 3 98 5 Tralls Process See Ree section 3 8 2 4 on page 3 98 Ll 56 Max Interval
22. 1 I 1 d I I I 1 EL L i I i f al E Peau E ITI 1 I IN AL 1 1 I Ty I Drag 1 1 uu i a J 1 I L 1 4 I I 1 4 1 i TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON cernere 6 1 6 2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET 6 3 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER 6 5 6 4 FALSE ECHOES adis ie ee ere errs 6 9 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART 2 2 2 2 2 1 6 12 6 5 1 M 6 12 6 5 2 Numeric Display 6 13 ee se ee EL DOB R 2 2 8 388 585 x MUNERE E a M Re m mmn m am mem _ i BaBo0YApAMLApBE QN LL ATi RR RUA Cueou lvii4 ae oe ee m
23. Navigation data can be saved when navigation equipment is connected or the own ship position on the user map is entered in the manual mode 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 3 63 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2 3 4 5 6 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map gt 7 File Operation Left click the item button of and select the card slot 51041 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched Left click the 5 Save button The Input File Name screen will appear Enter the file name to be saved Up to 10 characters can be entered For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character After the data has been entered Confirmation Window will appear Left click the 1 Yes button Navigation data currently being displayed is saved 3 6 5 4 Clearing the saved navigation data Erase User Map Procedures 1 2 3 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map x 7 File Operation Left click the item button of and select the card slot Slotl and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched Japan Radio
24. OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 6 Setting Vectors Vector Time Vector time can be set in minutes in the range 1 to 60 min A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected 5 1 6 1 Setting vector time on the display Vector 1 Left click the target vector time setting button in the Target Information located at the lower right of the display The Vector Time value input screen will appear 2 Enter the value to be set as vector time For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 5 1 6 2 Setting vector mode T R VECT 1 Press the T R VECT key The current vector mode T true vector relative vector will be displayed in the target vector display true relative switching in Target Information located at the upper right of the display 5 1 7 Setting the GPS antenna location Set the GPS antenna location Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and latitudinal direction from the own ship s reference position For the setting procedure refer to Section 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP setting Attention If offset ranges are not set correctly AIS symbols and radar echoes may be displayed shifted When offset ranges set latitude and longitude data received from the GPS is offset and the offset data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of own ship
25. 7 43 SECTION 8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT 8 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 04 01202121 1 8 1 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8 2 8 2 1 Scanner Unit NKE 1532 8 2 8 2 2 Display Unit NCD 9170 52 iiis 8 4 8 3 PERFORMANCE 8 5 8 3 1 Check Performance on Test Menu 8 5 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8 11 8 4 1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement 8 12 8 4 2 Replacement of Motor es Pes eoi uUo d V Ond orto 8 12 8 4 3 Replacement of 23inch LCD cuv Eds 8 17 8 4 4 Replacement of Backup Battery 8 20 SECTION 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE 9 1 FAULT FINDING dedu me 9 1 9 1 1 List of Alarms and other Indications 9 1 912 Op ration CHECKING 9 6 9 1 3 Fuse Checking scntas Ra 9 6 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 7 9 2 1 Circuit Block to be Repaired eese 9 7 9 3 0 aa Ru EN Feo dux AUR 9 9 9
26. E z z L CC CO HE2 Depth Temperature Wind Current ROT Next RSA Time Zone Sentence section 7 2 1 3 on page 7 13 1 GPS LL COG SOG 2 GPS WPT TIME 3 Depth 4 Wind 5 Current 1 Data Set Number 2 Layer A 3 Layer B 4 Layer C 6 Autopilot gt lt GN E AE ee Japan Radio Ltd C 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 9 Serviceman Menu BA gt U ct section 7 2 1 4 on page 7 14 TTM TT TLL TT TTD TT TLB TT OSD RSD ALR ACK Next TTM AIS TLL AIS TTD AIS TLB AIS Remote Maintenance JRC ARPA NMEA0183 Output Format NMEA0183 Talker Next NMEAO0183 TX Interval APB BOD GGA GLL RMC RMB VTG Next XTE BWC HDT THS onitor COMPASS MAINTENANCE LOG NAV1 NAV2 ALARM JARPA AIS Next ARPA COM TXRX ISW KEYBOARD1 KEYBOARD2 HE6 Alam System section 7 2 8 on page 7 19 1 11 Watch Alarm 1 Reset Interval mmm section 7 2 8 1 on page 7 19 2 Trackball Threshold section 7 2 8 2 on page 7 20 2 Relay Output section 7 2 8 3 on page 7 20 1 Relay Output Mode 2 CPA TCPA 3 AIS CPA TCPA HE7 Li BOM DSONOgROMABZPAROM OODDIXO0O0PAROMAOOXOO0PRUOMAOOuXOO0PROMZ2 Se A
27. ZCRD 1562 1226 1412VD J302 145D J209 J3601 B4P SHF Gp J2212 5paNp 300 3768 3002 P3601 TMA2302 10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR 2 0 m IL G 7P 43001 DF3DZ 6P 2H PM_OUT Xo CIRCUIT o SE ERRI U TPCRDI 892 SMA type connector N HM 2 PC3001 mm 6 DGND TRX MODULE ZCRD1579X ZCRDI58 13K 1 4GND Z 1 92217 750 10 MNT 1 ES 7FAN_ERR2 5 DET O 2 6 GND BRAKE CIRCUIT 33006 DF3DZ 11P 2H x JO vr CFA 1261 ccceccccccccccer s mnt RX 4206 iRFGATE M f 1202 H amp MNT RXE ILG 2DGND 2 GND 4 DND 3 PM_GATE 3 PM_GATE 3 RI BRAKE CRCUIT B 4DGND 4 GND H CFA 1262 5 PLL DET 5LO CH 3309 610 MODE 6 GND x1 O sPr 101 i i 30W H 7DGND 7 GND 2 MSTBAZ5 11 6 Tm ki 8REF MODE 8PLL DET ZC RDI 544K H sez E W309 Ol sz PC2201 9 RF STC 9 GND O30 INTERFACE CIRCUIT 10 AGND 10REF MODE N VVV ci 5 Of 5 7RIG a gt DISPLAY UNITE O srr CMH 2246 1an ET i 12 AGND P1921 piii Of Ol emtr 13 0 MONI 1432V P1941 41941 41921 J1911 T 2 9 lo INTRE 14AGND 2 GND Ol sv ere eg 1 350209 0 llo 10 VD 43003 DF22 7 905 2NC 8 2 a 3 15VE 11v w06 O TY BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT Ifo 5 SPEND crs TT 1 MCT wep E 1vERR
28. 99e roc owe section 3 8 2 5 on page 3 98 6 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 1 Main _ 3 TXRX Setting H 1 PRF Fine Tuning section 3 8 3 1 on page 3 99 Ee 4 PRE RR i ee er section 3 8 3 2 on page 3 99 L 5 Class Standby Mode section 3 8 3 3 on page 3 99 4 Multi Window Setting 1 DIR DIST EXP Display section 3 8 8 1 on page 3 107 H 2 Numeric NAV INFO section 3 8 8 2 on page 3 107 E3 Depth Graph Setting section 3 8 8 3 on page 3 107 1 Depth Graph Display 2 Depth Range 3 Time Range 4 Depth Unit 14 Wind Graph Setting section 3 8 8 4 on page 3 109 1 Wind Graph Display L 2 Wind Speed Unit 15 TEMP Graph Setting section 3 8 8 5 on page 3 109 1 TEMP Graph Display 2 TEMP Graph Color I I 2 3 TEMP Range 1 Temperature setting MIN Temperature setting Temperature setting Temperature setting Temperature setting 6 Temperature setting MAX 4 Time Range 6 Course Bar Setting section 3 8 8 6 on page 3 110 1 Course Bar Display 2 Autopilot Course 3 ROT Scale 5 Map Setting HE3 JRC ERC Setting 1 Day Night Color of Land
29. f S 0 HOS OVA OHI HOS OVA 511 HOA UOn81 2X3 ECS WO 096 40310uJ Quu2uAS X081 1612 28 2030 993 1030W Quu2uAS X099 61 51 bI WA J0310uJ QuuouAS X081 061 028065501 veg D1I006 VO J030u 993 X081 009 018066601972 DI006 VO 20 0 Quu2uAS 92u 9j2J 10 4 Si0 OW 2232999 Jequunu ou9unw x 3I 94 1VOIAVN 185902 921 029 15083 H8 INDO 1 2119 1 2 LNHOSNY 15 671 108 0 0001 89 31935 88 2 GN 1 02 01 1 1 1561 12 2 14 1 50 H SOON 5 0 2 2 2 2 5 Sdi 00 002 2 0 1 HAV 1d 0 88 H LV 1d NIHSNYOH 3 0 NV1 0 0008 0009 01 091 0 1 5 5k L9 9 9 190 Hd 091 0 1 S3 0100 2 0 0022 001 5 91 53 0005 001 01 0 1 081 3 1055 105 1056 1 052 1052 052 2052 005 1 2 1 GOW Lf LZL 394N co 000 6600 8 1 1 6 L 6 966 H666 Hd 0008 000 amp 021 011 12 11 11 vii S3 1058 105 2 011 101 7901 501 201 001 110 J1 2 S3 5 562 02 oJ p 2 INHOSNY NMOUd gt 4 NVdvf Rma e J9njoejnuejN B 20 JRC Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA In
30. 03007 Z J308 M m a x W201 E 505 J2208 2925 ww E ZCRDI578 X 2 gt y 8830E 050 170 F 22695 2 a PC3601 S 8 2 amp a 1598 HRM 300 3868 P3004 Semi Rigid 2 j A 0 N SMA type connector OO PERFORMANCE MONITOR aeroroegoe272 CAY 71 335383 BP SHF S MA tie a 4 cea e St ZCRD 1562 1226 1 12VD J302 1209 J3601 B4P SHF Gp J2212 5paNp 300 3768 3002 P3601 TMA2302 10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR 2 0 GG 1 6 7 13001 DF3DZ 6P 2H PM OUT OX CIRCUIT o SE ERRI U TPCRDI 892 SMA type connector N 5412 0 ware PC3001 w202 TRX MODULE ZCRD1579 26801581 1 4GND 22217 7 50 1 rns FAN_ERR2 5TX DET O 2 1 6 GND BRAKE CIRCUIT 33006 DF3DZ 11P 2H M JO vr CFA 1261 1TX GATE e s mnt RX 4206 iRFGATE i 1202 H 6 RXE ILG 2DGND 2 GND H aw 4 DND 3 PM_GATE 3 PM_GATE 3 RI BRAKE CRCUIT B 4DGND 4 GND CFA 1262 5 PLL DET 5LO CH H f 3309 610 MODE 6 GND x1 O sPr 101 i i 30W H 7DGND 7 GND 2 5 11 06 edidi Ri 8REF MODE 8PLL DET ZORDI544 K H H az PC2201 9RFSTC 9 GND S INTERFACE CIRCUIT 10REFMODE d Of 5 7RIG a
31. 3 62 3 6 6 Set and Display Geodetic System Geodetic 3 66 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION echoes 3 68 3 7 1 Display Route Destination Mark Select Route 3 68 3 7 2 Edit Route Set Route Sequence 3 69 3 7 3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude Waypoint Input 3 76 3 7 4 Use Route Monitoring Function Waypoint Route Alarm 3 80 3 7 5 Method of Using 3 82 3 7 6 Detailed Route Settings 3 83 3 7 7 Clear Waypoint Route Data Clear WPT Route Data 3 88 3 7 8 Operate Route Data Fille esee eee eene 3 89 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 93 3 8 1 Set Radar Signal Processing Process Setting 3 93 3 8 2 Set Radar Trails RADAR Trails Setting 3 97 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting 3 99 3 8 4 Set Cursor Cursor Setting 3 100 3 8 5 Set Radar Display Display Setting 3 101 3 8 6 Adjust Sound Volume Buzzer Volume 3 104 3 8 7 Set User Option Keys OPTION 1 2
32. I d H 7ZCRD1328 E LC E gt zi e gt LA QO lt CN T co C5 CO LLI m N 11 23 42 O mg O O CML 790 RT NWZ 178 RT Monitor Unit Interconnection Fig B 4 Interconnection Diagram of NWZ 178 RT 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit B 1 5 NCE 5322 R OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 R OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK 1006 PC620 OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 PC610 15P J6102 W62 H 7ZCRD1332 W65 H 7ZCRD1335 W63 H 7ZCRD1333A W64 H 7ZCRD1334 7P 14P 26406 J6405 26404 OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK 1007 PC640 6P 6P 2P 30P J6409 J6407 14P J6403 15P J6402 J6408 FL1 W67 2m H 7ZCRD1337 CMD 1031 R NCE 5322 R Operation Unit Interconnection Fig B 5 Interconnection Diagram of NCE 5322 R Japan Radio Ltd B 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit 16 5322 OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 RT OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK 1006 PC620 OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 PC610 15P J6102 W62 H 7ZCRD1332 W65 H 7ZCRD1335 W63 H 7ZCRD1333A W64 H 7ZCRD1334 7P 14P J6408 16406 26405 16404 OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK 1007 PC640 6P 6P 2P 30P J6409 J6407 14P J6403 FL1 W68 2
33. 5 When finished with the correction of all items left click the 0 Exit button The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode terminating the user map move mode Example 7 NS X 4 N A EN N 3 55 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 6 3 3 Deleting a mark or line Delete With regard to the created user map a mark or line is deleted individually Procedures 1 2 3 4 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear Left click the 4 Delete button The user map delete mode is selected is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display Put the cursor on a mark or line and left click The entire selected mark or line is deleted To delete another mark or line repeat procedures 3 and 4 When finished with the correction of all items left click the 0 Exit button The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode terminating the user map delete mode Japan Radio Ltd 3 56 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 6 3 4 Inserting a vertex into a line Insert Move Vertex With regard to the created user map a vertex 15 inserted into a line 1 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the f
34. EBL I T 0450 C 500 NM ice Target VRM2 _ Pl 270 VRM1 Bearing and range from the own ship s position to target in this figure True bearing 45 0 Range 5 00 NM 180 4 2 3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points 1 Press the EBL2 key 4 21 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND The EBL2 located at the upper right of the display will be highlighted and EBL2 will be shown on the PPI display 2 Press the EBL dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the display 3 Putthe cursor on the point A of the two points between which measurement is made and left click Refer to the figure below 4 Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the EBL dial 5 Press the VRM2 key When 2 is selected e intersection marker will appear on the dotted line of EBL2 6 Move the intersection marker on the dotted line to point B by turning the VRM dial The range and bearing between the two points will be shown in the VRM2 range and EBL2 bearing located at the upper right of display EBL2 2 VRM2 Cape 270 90 Own ship s position Bearing and range between points A and B in this figure True bearing 90 0 Range 6 00 NM 180 similarly EBL1 can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between
35. JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE Table 6 1 Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS Type of target Height from Detection distance RCS sea surface NM m m X band S band X band S band oea shore line 60 20 20 50 000 50 000 oea shore line 6 8 8 5000 5000 oea shore line 3 6 6 2500 2500 SOLAS target ship gt 5000GT 10 11 11 50 000 30 000 SOLAS target ship gt 500GT 5 8 8 1800 1000 omall boat with IMO standard 4 5 0 3 7 7 9 0 5 compatible radar reflector Marine buoy with corner 3 0 4 9 3 6 10 1 reflector Standard marine buoy 3 5 4 6 3 0 5 0 5 10 meter small boat without 2 3 4 3 0 2 0 1 4 radar reflector Waterway location beacon 1 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly decrease depending on the shape of the target sea state weather and radio wave propagation conditions Japan Radio Ltd 6 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land radar video image also includes unnecessary echo such as reflection from waves on the sea surface and reflection from rain and snow Reflection from the sea surface 1s called sea clutter and reflection from rain and snow is called r
36. Left click to show the desired planned speed 3 Left click the Planned Speed button to be corrected The planned speed of waypoint is reversed 4 Enter a planned speed A Planned Speed will be corrected For the input method on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu Japan Radio Ltd 3 78 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 36 Deleting a Waypoint DEL The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system 15 deleted Procedures 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the Waypoint Scroll button Left click to show the desired waypoint 3 Left click the DEL button to be corrected Confirmation Window will appear 4 Left click the 1 Yes button The specified Waypoint is deleted and the previous and following Waypoints are then connected by a line 3 7 37 Inserting a Waypoint INS A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the Waypoint Scroll button Left click to show the desired waypoint 3 Left click the INS button to be corrected The new latitude of waypoint is reversed 4 Enter a latitude longitude and a planned speed A Waypoint will be inserted For the input method on the latitude longitude and numeric value
37. SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION ae a ee 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7 1 7 1 1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu Service Man Menu 7 1 7 1 2 GYRO I F Eun 7 2 7 1 3 Tuning Tune Adjustment 7 5 7 1 4 Bearing 4 4 2 1 7 5 7 1 5 Range 7 5 7 1 6 Navigator Setting Device ceres see 7 6 7 1 7 Setting of True Bearing Value e eeeee eene 7 7 7 1 8 Antenna Height Setting Antenna Height 7 7 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP Setting eeu 7 8 7 2 NGS 7 11 7 2 1 Communication Port Setting COM Port Setting 7 11 7 2 2 Sector Blank Setting Sector Blank 7 15 7 2 3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit Output Pulse 7 16 7 2 4 Slave Mode Setting Master Slave 7 16 7 2 9 Language Setting Language 7 17 7 2 6 Date Time Setting 2 2 1 1 7 18 Japan Radio Co Ltd 7
38. The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually Course 360 in 0 1 intervals EBL dial Speed 0 to 100kn in O 1kn step VRM dial Japan Radio Ltd 5 54 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 5 7 1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode In the True Vector mode calculations are performed according to the values set by Trial Speed Trial Course and other features and the result 1s displayed as a bold line that represents the change of own ship s vector as shown in the Fig 5 7 below an example of the course changed to the right In this Fig 5 7 the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of simulation The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values regardless of the result of simulation NORMAL HL Own ship s vector Q Dangerous target TRIAL HL Route Q Change of symbol as a result of trial maneuver Fig 5 7 True Vector Mode 5 55 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 5 7 2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode The result of Trial maneuvering the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change target vector In the Fig 5 8 below in the same c
39. center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed at the latitude and longitude The navigator needs to be connected 5 Heading Link Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing On Parallel index lines are operated following the heading bearing Off Parallel index lines are not operated following the heading bearing 4 11 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 6 Next Moves to the next page 7 Range Scale Link Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is changed On intervals are fixed with the actual range nm The appearance of parallel index line intervals changes when the range is changed Off intervals are fixed with the display range The parallel index line intervals nm change when the range is changed 8 Reference Bearing Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines The setting items are determined by the setting of Section 2 Operation Mode a All is selected True Displayed with true bearing with North as reference HL Displayed with the heading line as reference b If Individual is selected True Displayed with true bearing with North as reference HL Displayed with the heading line as reference Index Linel to _Line8 Displayed with a specified l
40. e If the gain sea clutter suppression rain snow clutter suppression are not adjusted adequately the lost target alarm may be easily generated So such adjustments should be mad carefully Japan Radio Ltd 5 42 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY When it 1s impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target or the data of AIS target cannot received for a specified time the will be generated The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below but not limited to the following The target echo is very weak The target 1s shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received The target echo 1s blurred by sea clutter returns If a target under tracking goes out of a range of 32 nm and can no longer be tracked it is canceled without a lost target alarm Lost Target Alarm otatus oymbol on Alarm Alarm Conditions display characters sound Lost Target Lost Beep sound alarm will sound once when lost 12 diem target symbol is mE displayed Red Blinking acknowledge able AIS 12 Red Blinking 5 5 4 Gyro Set Alarm The GYRO I F in this system receives signals from a gyro Even if the power 15 turned off the system will follow up the gyro However the system stops the follow up operation when the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any trouble occurs to the line When the power of
41. 3 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Range Adjustment menu 1 Adjust Menu 3 Range Adjustment For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value 4 Adjust the range adjustment value by operating the button so that the target measured in step 1 falls in the correct range 5 Left click the ENT button to determine the value 7 1 6 Navigator Setting Device Determine whether to connect navigators to the radar equipment Only the navigators set to ON here can be used 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Device Installation menu 2 Installation Menu 5 9 Next 3 Device Installation 3 Select On for navigators connected to the radar equipment and Off for navigators not connected Gyro Gyro via GYRO I F Compass Compass Compliant with 61162 GPS Compass GPS Compass JRC LOG Log via GYRO I F 2AXW 2 axis log Speed over water Compliant with IEC61162 2AXG 2 axis log Speed over ground Compliant with IEC61162 Japan Radio Ltd 7 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION GPS GPS Compliant with IEC61162 7 1 7 Setting of True Bearing Value If GYRO I F is used to input a gyro signal the true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the value indicat
42. 3 11 1 2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion Copy Card Internal 1 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button Selected items for Devicel will be displayed 2 Left click the 1 Intemal button among the selection items Internal 1s selected 3 Left click the device 2 selection button Selected items for Device2 will be displayed 4 Left click button corresponding to the device in which data to be loaded is saved The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed 5 Select the desired data Left click button one more time will cancel the selection 6 Left click the A button Confirmation Window will appear 7 Left click the 1 Ovewnte button to overwrite data or Left click the 2 Add button to add new data When Overwrite is selected internally saved data is deleted and new data is loaded When Add is selected new data is added to the saved data 8 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected file 15 loaded into the system from the card When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system data can be copied from multiple files However when the maximum number of units of data is reached additional data cannot be loaded Even in the ADD mode WPT data and Route data are overwritten 377125 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD 3 11 1 3 Copy Informa
43. 8 BZ 6 BPIN1E 9 MIRe RE 7 BZIN 10 8 BZINIE 11 MTRE 9 MTRINI 12 NO 10 13 48V 0 11 MTRINIE 14 448vG EY 12 PWRINIE 14 PWROUTI 15 PWROUTIE 16 VDOUTI 17 VDOUTIE 18 TRIGOUTI 19 TRIGOUTIE 20 BPOUTI 21 BPOUTIE 22 BZOUTI 23 BZOUTIE 24 MTROUTI 25 MTROUTI CBD 1861 ACOUT1 26 MTROUTIE BATT IN BATT IN U YEL V GRN W 52 N TB4601 ALARM TB4401 EXT RADAR ARPAALM 1 RBVD 2 ARPAALM 2 RBVDE 3 SYSALM 3 ETIY3 4 SYSALM 4 ETIY3E 5 PWRALM 5 SvDi 6 PWRALM 6 SVDIE 7 ARPAACK 7 8 ARPAACK 8 ETIVIE 9 SYSACK 9 1 10 SYSACK 10 1 11 PWRACK 11 12 PWRACK 12 13 EXEVT 13 21 14 14 21 15 AISTX A 15 SVD2 16 AISTX 16 SVD2E 17 AIS TG 17 ETIY2 18 AISRX 18 ETIY2E 19 AISRX 19 2 20 AIS 20 2 21 MNTTX 21 2 22 MNTTX 22 2 er 23 22 24 72 25 NO 26 NO 27 ACKOUT 28 ACKOUT ie 29 WMRST Shae 30 WMRST NO 4 NO 5 Pit 6 P1 P 7 NO 8 NO 9 51 10 52 FILTER ACIN Wn NO 12 NO W V 19 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE JRC SUPPLY H 2695110056 0 6 1kV DPYCY 6 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 1 2
44. All four of fans in the scanner are included within this kit CDC 1362 with mounting bracket CDC 1363 CDC 1364 CDC 1362 with mounting bracket Radar bezel kit 23 1 inch LCD PANEL JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING Table9 11 Circuit Block to be Repaired JMA 9172 SA Location Circuit Block Remarks MONITOR UNIT LCD OPERATION CIRCUIT CCK 1004 9 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 3 AFTER SALES SERVICE 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 AFTER SALES SERVICE Keeping period of maintenance parts Keeping period of maintenance parts 1s ten years from the production 1s discontinued When you Request for Repair If you suppose the product may be out of order read the description in Section 9 carefully and check the suspected point again If it is still out of order you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product or our branch office in your country or district the sales department in our main office in Tokyo Repair within the Warranty Period If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with the instruction manual the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge In case that any failure 1s caused due to misuse faulty operation negli
45. Bright of Land Color of Sea Bright of Sea Color of Name Bright of Name Bright of Track Mark Line Next LAT LON Line Color of L L Line Bright of L L Line 5 Map Display Setting L 3 LAT LON Correction 7 Map Draw AZI Mode V Equipment Setting 1 GYRO Setting section 3 4 14 page 3 37 section 7 1 2 on page 7 2 2 MAG Compass Setting section 3 4 16 on page 3 38 1 Heading Correction 2 Correct Value 3 Set Drift Setting section 3 4 16 1 on page 3 39 1 Correction Set Drift RxPort section 3 12 1 on page 3 129 Heading Speed AIS GPS DLOG Alarm Depth lemperature Next Wind Current ROT RSA p oe ise oR po eps eeepc ux sr aie ie qe RWNAOCHNATDRWONADWNYN URC Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 1 Main Time Zone 525 6 Date Time 7 Sub Menu Display Color Setting section 3 8 5 1 on page 3 101 Day Night section 3 8 5 2 on page 3 101 Outer PPI 3 Inner PPI 4 Character 5 RADAR Video 6 RADAR Trails Time 8 Target Symbol 9 Next 1 Cursor 2 Range Rings 3 EBL VRM PI 4 Own Symbol HL Vector n 1 2
46. INTERCONNECTION NDC 1493 ABE J2607 J3401 8830E 100 170S F XG4C 1431 J2604 PC2601 8830 100 1705 RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT J2606 CDC 1349 W101 PC3401 1 2 540 SA 3402 INPUT OUTPUT CIRCUIT 396 1 2 5VA 1266 42601 24NVA B 10P VH 5 amp 8820 050 1705 go oe o 5 ZC RD 1561 LIND lt lt 956289 2 US SMA type connector 58522282264 ag 2525222458 J2002 es apap RU a E E E tas eB 5H 996 E sb sb jj gid mate oon ORE for RADAR PROCESS UNIT E z o w u P2601 woot zesotssox 1 ANTENNA sal Ms ROTARY JOINT J3901 TRANS DUCER 9 P3901 N type connector W013 4 ME PL ZORD1569X wen wog 20801607 ZORD 1608 ZCRD1559XX ZCRDI560 X B 107 P2208 Pan for RADAR PROCESS UNIT O P3008 03007 Z J308 M m a x W201 E 208 g J2208 285 E ZCRDI578 X 2 2 yg 8830E 060 170 F 25 2 2 ree PC3601 S 8 2 amp a 1598 HRM 300 3868 P3004 Semi Rigid j 9 SMA type connector OO PERFORMANCE MONITOR aegk ek eS eS2n2 CAY 71 335383 BP SHF S MA tie
47. Out of the way point Go off the route i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence Table9 6 List of Operational Alarm Messages and Warnings Message Can t Transmit Card Full Copy Failed Delete Failed Format Card Format Failed Invalid Card Invalid Connection Invalid Data Invalid Range MAX Point No Card No Heading Data No Object No Position Data Not Allowed Out of Range Read Failed Sae Mode Write Failed Class INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO Description Tried to transmit within 5 second after standby or when the transmitter receiver has any trouble Card Card Card Card Card Card The operator set performance monitor to on without selecting straight Run out of free space Copy failure Deletion failure Unformatted card Format failure Invalid card Tried to enter any data beyond its range TM selection due to TM disabled range 96 nm Zooming in a ZOOM disabled range 0 125 nm Tried to enter navigation information beyond the specified Card not detected yet Target tracking operation or TM selection when bearing data is invalid No object at the cursor specified position Mark or line input when the latitude and longitude is invalid General operation error Out of target acquisition range Card Read fai
48. Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions depending upon vessel type water area weather and oceanographic conditions For the relations between those conditions and alarms refer to Section 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY 5 1 5 1 Input of CPA Limit Procedures 1 Left click the CPA limit setting button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display The CPA Limit value input screen will appear 2 Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 5 1 5 2 Input of TCPA Limit Procedures 1 Left click the TCPA limit setting button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display The TCPA Limit value input screen will appear 2 Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 5 1 5 3 Setting CPA Ring CPA Ring While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius the CPA ring is displayed with a red circle Procedures 1 Left click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the display The CPA ring will be displayed The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is NOTE selected 5 13 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5
49. alarm sounds The alarm message CPA TCPA turns red AIS12 and blinks The symbol turns red and enlarges A Lost target The alarm sounds The symbol turns red and indicates with X A AIS12 mark Sleeping AIS SART The AIS SART symbol is colored as well as 9 target AlS target symbol 69 Activated The target number displayed beside the asiz2 AIS SART target SYmbol Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed the target AIS SART target symbol is enclosed in a square Lost AIS SART When the data of an AIS SART target cannot amp target be received for 6 minutes the lost target is AIS12 displayed NOTE For details about AIS SART refer to Section 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART AIS SART function is available in the display software ver 01 01 As for method of confirming software version refer to Section 8 3 1 6 System Information Japan Radio Ltd 5 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION Up to 300 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AIS targets Up to 100 activated AIS targets can be included in the total fthere are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum they are displayed in the following priority order 1 Numeric displayed target 2 Target of which CPA TCPA is lower than the set value Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm has occurred Target in automatic
50. m 15min lt lO0min 6min 4 Short 15sec 30sec 1min 3min 6min 10min and 15min Middle 30sec 1min 3min 6min 10min 15min and 30min Long 1min 3min 6min 10min 15min 30min and 60min Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using Trails button Even after the trails display is turned off the past trails can be displayed traced back by setting a desired time The radar system is start transmission trails is start plot The system is plotting trails even while the trails display 1s off If the transmit time is short the indicated trails duration may not have achieved the specified time The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting 3 4 8 2 Erasing Trails Data 1 Hold down the Trails button for five seconds located at the upper right of the display All the saved trails data will be erased The system starts plotting trails in initial state When Trails button is clicked for 2 seconds a RADAR Trails Setting menu will be displayed Furthermore data will be erased if it continues pushing 3 31 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 8 3 Trails Motion Mode There are two types of trails relative motion trails and true motion trails Relative motion The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to trails the own ship The op
51. m m n NUR nn AIITEM E SRNR SESS UE f T 1 a i L E 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 L B NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 2 2 2 3 NAMES OF DISPLAY NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 2 11 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Japan Radio Co Ltd a mm o MEN I 1 I E In I 1 1 In E B I I I IN 9 IN I E E E i E IN Ty I E f I I f LI f I NEU I I nomm eS Se ee AT JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Example of screen display In this example the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in each area are indicated Upperleft Upper right of the display PPI of the display Tuning OK 12 pri Rin
52. 1 BP 1 48V 2 BP 2 48VG 3 BZ 3 Ul 4 BZ 4 V1 5 TRIG 5 1 6 TRIG 6 UTH 7 MTR 7 U 8 MTR 8 Vv 9 10 11 AC100 115V AC220 240V 50 60Hz 1 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA 9172 SA C D HEATER OPTION CIRCUIT BREAKER 0 6 1kV DPYCYS 1 5 SHIP YARD SUPPLY 100 1 L00W 0 6 1kV DPYCYS 1 5 NBL 175 0 6 1 1 5 SHIP S MAINS STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER AC220V 1 HEATER Ns 50 SHIP S MAINS S BAND 300W RADAR JMA 9172 SA L 4 Board Connection Diagram of JMA 9172 SA ina Term Fig B 13 JRC Japan Radio Ltd B 17 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram B 7 2 9170 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170T MONITOR UNIT NWZ 178 OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 ee ae oe ee HH OQ O0 RADAR PROCESS EE ud CIRCUIT f DSUB 9P FEMALE DVI D TERMINAL BOARD CQD 2176 Option SUB OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 OOOO00 POWER SUPPLY CBD 1861 000000 0000 P NS RADAR PROCESS UNIT NDC 1478 S JMA 9172 SA RADAR NCD 9170T 911 5 HETE Hf vs E INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD 9170T desktop Fig B 14 nter Unit Connection Diagram of NCD 9170T
53. 3 1 1 on page 3 2 4 ALARM ACK Alarm acknowledgement key Use this function to acknowledge alarms such as failure alarm approaching target alarm and collision alarm By pressing this key at the occurrence of an alarm the alarm sound can be stopped If multiple alarms occur press this key same time as the alarms 3 2 7 on page 3 13 5 TUNE Tuning dial Not function JMA 9172 SA radar is fully automatic There is no necessary for a tuning function RAIN Rain snow clutter suppression dial This function suppresses rain snow clutters To increase the effect of suppression turn the dial clockwise The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial 3 2 6 on page 3 11 SEA Sea clutter suppression dial This function suppresses sea clutter To increase the effect of suppression turn the dial clockwise The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial 3 2 5 on page 3 9 Japan Radio Ltd 245 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS GAIN Gain pulse length dial This function adjusts the reception sensitivity of the radar To increase the sensitivity turn the dial clockwise The transmission pulse width can be switched by pressing the dial gain 3 2 4 on page 3 8 pulse width 3 4 2 on page 3 25 RANGE Range switching key Th
54. 3 4 15 2 Input the own ship speed Manual Speed If the ship speed system such as LOG etc connected to this radar system malfunctions it 1 possible to manually enter own ship speed by the method described below to use the target tracking TT and true motion display functions Procedures 1 Left click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship Information area located at the upper right of the display and select the manual mode 2 Left click the value of the speed The numeric value input screen will open to enter the own ship speed 3 Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value input screen For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 3 4 16 Magnet Compass Correction MAG Compass Setting Set the correction value when the radar receive HDM sentence from magnet compass or the variation of HDG is NULL Procedures 1 Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the following menu operation Main gt 6 NAV Equipment Setting s 2 MAG Compass Setting Japan Radio Ltd 3 38 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 2 Set whether to make corrections or not 1 Heading Correction Off lt gt 3 Input the correction value Press the or 7 button to select south and north for latitude or the ea
55. 8 6 2 TESI 8 8 8 3 1 3 Operation Unit Test Keyboard Test 8 8 8 3 1 4 Check of the Performance Monitor MON Display 8 9 8 3 1 5 System Alarm Log display 8 10 8 3 1 6 System Information 22 2 2 8 10 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8 11 8 4 1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement 8 12 8 4 2 Replacement of Motor 8 12 8 4 2 1 Scanner Unit NKE 1532 2 22 8 12 8 4 3 Replacement of 23inch LCD 1 8 17 Japan Radio Co Ltd 8 4 4 Replacement of Backup Battery 8 4 4 1 About the Battery Alarm eere eene 8 4 4 2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE N WARNING Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the equipment by users Inspection or repair work by unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or electric shock Ask the nearest branch business office or a dealer for in
56. DATA Off key This function sets the graphics other than HL range ring EBL and VRM to OFF temporarily while this key is pressed 3 4 11 on page 3 35 PANEL Operator panel brilliance key This function adjusts the lighting brilliance of various switches and dial positions on the operator panel The brightness changes cyclically whenever this key is pressed 3 4 13 on page 3 36 USER key By pressing this key the signal processing setting that is preset can be called The setting changes to FUNC OFF gt FUNCI gt FUNC2 gt FUNC3 gt FUNCA whenever this key 15 pressed If this key pressed for 2 seconds or more the function setting menu 15 displayed 3 9 on page 3 113 OPTION1 key By pressing this key the pre registered menu position can be directly displayed At factory shipment the calling of Main Menu is assigned 3 8 7 on page 3 104 OPTION2 key By pressing this key the pre registered menu position can be directly displayed At factory shipment the calling of Sub Menu is assigned 3 8 7 on page 3 104 Track ball This function moves the cursor mark to any position Use this function for setting in each mode Use this function to specify a center position of floating EBL and an off center position 3 3 1 on page 3 15 Track ball left button Use this function to confirm menu selection and numeric value input Track ball right button Use this function to reset menu
57. Enables the Trails Reduction function Effect High Trails Process Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting radar trails e When Trails Process 15 radar trails are never plotted with unwanted waves but the radar trails of moving targets may not be plotted e When Trails Process 13 radar trails may be plotted with unwanted waves but the radar trails of moving targets are always plotted Off Disables the Trails Process function On Enables the Trails Process function MAX Interval Select the maximum time for displaying radar trails e Select Short when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes e Select Long when long radar trails are necessary for ocean navigation Short Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display Middle Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display Long Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display Japan Radio Ltd 3 98 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting This function enables the setting of detail information about an antenna 1 Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 3 RADAR Menu 3 TXRX Setting The TXRX Setting menu will appear Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu
58. Parallel index line starting point mode Parallelindex line Consistent Common On Off Reference Point CCRP des Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 1 Using Cursor Cursor 1 Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display the arrow cursor turns into a cross cursor 4 1 2 Using Range Rings Range Rings Range rings display Range rings interval 1 Left click the Rings button on upper left area on the display The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non display each time the Rings button is clicked The range ring interval is shown in the Rings button The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the target s position that lies between two range rings For change of the brilliance of range rings refer to Section 3 8 5 Set Radar Display Display Setting Japan Radio Ltd 4 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 3 Using Electronic Bearing Line EBL1 EBL2 Electronic bearing lines EBL are indispensable to the measurement of bearings Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBL beforehand The system is equipped with two EBL The bearing and starting point of an EBL can be operated separatel
59. Qoo lt gt Backward N T hen N N SON Os ii T a Ha 2 Qv ag LER Cru 2 4 Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the Waypoint Skip next Waypoint Skipping back the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint Waypoint Back Skip 1 Open the WPT Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 3 WPT Route Operations 2 To execute Waypoint Skip left click the _ 3 Waypoint Skip button The Waypoint which 15 after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint 3 To execute Waypoint Back Skip left click the 4 Waypoint Back Skip Skip button The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint 3 7 6 Detailed Route Settings Make detailed settings of the route Color for the route alarm line Set the display color for the route alarm line SEL NUM Comment Size 3 83 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Display character size Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on SEL NUM Comment Size the radar display Waypoint bearing vector Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own Waypoint Vector Ship Display of bearing distance to the Select the start point to be used for the bearing distance display in destination Status of Origin DEST the Waypoint data d
60. Sail 2 Sensor Data The system can receive sensor data Heading Speed etc from other system ECDIS Chart RADAR 3 AIS Data The system can receive AIS data from AIS 4 Selected GPS number Selected GPS number can be synchronized 5 Day Night mode operation panel brilliance Day Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchronized Japan Radio Ltd 7 24 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 9 1 Network Function Setting Network Function Turning on off the network function 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Network Function setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 4 Network 3 Select the item in the menu and turn on or off the Network Function On The Network Function is operated Off The Network Function is stopped 7 2 9 2 Sensor Priority Setting The system can receive data from 2 sensors If the same sentences are received from 2 sensors the system use primary system s data 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Sensor Priority setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 4 Network gt 3 Sensor Priority 3 Select the data source sensor for each priority High priority sensor Factory set No 1 ECDIS Low priority sensor Factory set No 2ECDIS Settable
61. Target vector true relative Target vector length Target tracking TT EPA AIS TCPA limit is u ierget Information TT AIS Vector R 6 min Past position display Past position true relative 22004 A p Past FOSN 05 NM AIS On Off AIS Association Association On Off Filter Range AIS filter mode Dol Trais 15min 0732 Radar trails remaining time AlS target symbol display Radar trails true relative Radar trails display time Numeric information AIS target information AIS target number Simple display item AIS ID 1 Ship s name Name lo 207 SERIES Unread message Call Sign JRCJ MA Call sign MMSI 422459111 MMSI Course COG 210 0 SOG 302 kn CPA Speed UPA 658M 69 min TCPA BRG 125 8 7 Bearing Range 7 76NM Ship s heading bearing HDE 210 0 ROT Rate of turn Range POSN 55 11 506 N 10m 12901712 Destination JAPAN RADIO CO LTD 9 NAY Status Under Way Using Ensine 0 gt Latitude longitude error Navigation status Destination 2 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS gt 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY About time display mode UTC Universal Time Coordinate UTC S UTC System Time LMT Local Mean Time LMT S LMT System Time Numeric information Tracked target information Tracked target number TT ID 2 1 BRG
62. The automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled and Sea AUTO Rain AUTO 15 changed to Sea MAN MAN in the lower left of the radar display Doppler Filter This function possible on solid radar is provided superior ditection in the case of heavy rain and snow situation Japan Radio Ltd 3 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 7 Reset Alarm Buzzer ALARM ACK When an audible alarm is issued use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm information stop the alarm buzzing and stop the alarm lamp flashing If more than one alarm has occurred press the switch for each alarm indication The alarm stops buzzing but the alarm indication does not disappear Procedures 1 Press ALARM ACK key Alternatively Left click the Alarm Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display The alarm will stop buzzing 3 13 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed which requires an understanding for RADAR signal processing features and an adjustment for the sea state All of the parameter can be set indivisually and manually but it may by difficult for even expert person The sets of signal processing parameters for the general usin
63. age A ONLLNPIOIA SNOISNJAICI JASSA 3d SF gres Ad 3N T1 noO ILNO H LMSYHJALNI IJN 1192 14044 06 TROUC 002 OGL VSOSSDONOS 9 FUNLXAL 078 35 102 1 12 23 GAN 8 FLW ld ONC 0H Bue GA LAN ONU o 1 0 e elo JMN RS E 1 0 e M e OA 51708 INOOH UR 2 DEE x 09 i Jaz 002 NA 7 7002 002 Fig 1 6 Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit Type NQE 3141 4A Option JRC Japan Radio Ltd 11 1 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS V9 LYLE MON 8X ZI i BE LINN 84 ZI XOUddV SSVIN I 9 0002 9r 0002 000 ct VF 000 007 LF Or 02 Sit 2 06 SOF LF 9 9 ALYT xs EXE FEHMA SERIE XE ls a 0 0007 0002 OF 0002 0001 ZF 000 007 E Gat 007 02 GIF 021 DE Gr E 0 GOr g E LLL TT O
64. ta Relative vector E 9 lt gt Own ship true vector CPA Fig 5 3 Relative Vector and True vector Radar and Collision Avoidance Radar 1s still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning A plotter 1s used to further enhance the radar functionality The plotter 1s capable of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their movement The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship and it is shown whether there is a risk of collision namely CPA and TCPA can be obtained This method using a plotter 1s fairly effective but the number of target ship which 1s manually plotted 1s limited and it takes several minutes to measure those Japan Radio Ltd 5 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 2 Definitions of Symbols 5 1 2 1 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols Vector Definition Remarks Symbol Ow Initial acquisition This symbol is displayed until the vector is T target displayed after target acquisition Target acquired in The alarm sounds b 7 T automatic acquisition zone alarm message New Target turns red and blinks The symbol is red colored Q un Tracked target Dangerous target The alarm sounds 12 The alarm message CPA TCPA turns red and blinks The symbol turns red and enlarges l Numeric When the numeric dat
65. 1 Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2 and left click When the cursor is moved to it VRM1 VRM2 is shown at the upper right of the cursor The VRM becomes operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the range to be set The VRM will move as the cursor moves 3 Left click The VRM will be fixed Japan Radio Ltd 4 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 6 3 Operating EBL and VRM Concurrently EBL VRM 1 Put the cursor on the intersection marker or e and left click When the cursor is moved to it EBL1 VRM1 or EBL2 VRM2 is shown at the upper right of the cursor The EBL and VRM become operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the bearing range to be set The EBL and VRM will move as the cursor moves 3 Left click The EBL and VRM will be fixed 4 1 6 4 Operating Parallel Index Lines 1 To change the direction of parallel index lines 1 Put the cursor on near the center of line and left click When the cursor is moved there it will turn into G and PI will be displayed at the upper right of the cursor The parallel index lines become operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the direction to be set The parallel index lines will change the direction as the cursor moves 3 Left click The parallel index lines will be fixed 4 17 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172
66. 2 RX Port 3 Seta port for each sensor Settable sensor signals Heading Speed AIS GPS DLOG Alarm Depth Temperature Wind Current ROT RSA Time Zone Date Time Selectable ports When the automatic AUTO recognition function is used When the ports are specified Own LAN LAN GPS LAN Ship s Clock Behavior pattern of selectable ports AUTO Data from JRC LAN is prior User Setting The system use the port selected by Section 3 12 1 Receive Port Setting RX Port The system use data from JRC LAN or sensor connected directly The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly Own LAN The system uses data from JRC LAN LAN GPS The system uses GPS data from GPS JRC LAN connected The system uses ship s clock data from ship s clock JRC LAN LAN Ship s Clock connected i In order to set Section 3 12 1 Receive Port Setting RX Port select User Setting jn advance ii LAN GPS and LAN Ship s Clock are selectable signals for Time Zone and Date Time Japan Radio Ltd 7 28 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 10 3 Reception Sentence Setting RX Sentence Set signal sentences to be received from sensors The system is factory set for using all sentences To receive only specified sentences select No Use for sentences which are not necessary Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2
67. 3 2 Observe and Adjust Video eee esee rere 3 4 Acquire and Measure Data 3 4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP 3 4 End the Operation and Stop the System 3 5 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 21 2 3 6 Adjust Monitor Brilliance BRILL 3 6 Change Observation Range RANGE 3 6 JU me 3 7 Adjust Gain GAIN 3 8 Suppress Sea Clutter SEA _ 3 9 Suppress Rain Snow Clutter RAIN 3 11 Reset Alarm Buzzer ALARM ACK 3 13 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed 3 14 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 15 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball 3 15 Japan Radio Co Ltd m a EE GANE CM MEME MM x 3 I EN 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 3 2 Operate Software Buttons 1 3 16 9 9 9 Basic Menu Operation 3 17
68. 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 1 OPERATION FLOW 3 1 2 Observe and Adjust Video Procedures 1 Press RANGE key or RANGE key to set the range to the scale required for target observation 2 GAIN SEA and RAIN to obtain the clearest targets Refer to GAIN dial Section 3 2 4 Adjust Gain GAIN SEA dial Section 3 2 5 Suppress Sea Clutter SEA RAIN dial gt Section 3 2 6 Suppress Rain Snow Clutter RAIN for how to use each dial For how to adjust video see Section 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO Acquire and Measure Data For details on how to acquire data and measure see the SECTION 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP The radar video range bearing Target Tracking and AIS data display etc are displayed with reference to CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point If scanner 1s switched these data are measured from CCRP If some kind of functions for example off center true motion mode etc set scanner position to 75 outside of the PPI range these data except Target Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position For how to setting CCRP see the Section 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP Setting Japan Radio Ltd 3 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 1 OPERATION FLOW 3 1 5 End the Operation and Stop the System 1 Press TX STBY key The radar will stop transmission and the a
69. Collision Triangle 9 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 1 4 5 1 1 5 Relative Vector and True Vector From two points of view collision prediction and avoidance it 1s necessary to obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ship aspect The relationship between the relative vector and true vector 1s shown in Fig 5 3 Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of other ship This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance On the other hand the course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector enabling other ship s aspect to be seen at a glance Thus the aspects of other ships transverse outsail parallel run reverse run etc as described in the act of prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped If there 15 a risk of collision with other ship the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to operate own ship N Target ship true vector N Vo Own ship s speed Own ship s course Vr Other ship s true speed 01 Target ship s true course 27 Ve Target ship s relative speed 0 P 04 Target ship s relative course Aspect OR
70. Japan Radio Ltd B 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual B DRAWINGS gt B 8 GYRO I F cyrolr SERIAL SIGNAL INDICATOR LED YUP IVES RARLED Te1as GYRO LOW VOLTAGE INDICATOR LED ALERT LED D44DAAMBBLED D CME BIE SLED ERROR INDICATOR LED GYRO SIGNAL PROCESS I2 4A7mLED INDICATOR LED Ye Ole 5 85 Fi F4 0 58 LOG PULSE INDICATOR LED RBZ NVAZRLED INAS d31S a LOW VOLTAGE GYRO SETTING 18195 Lo gt Fig B 15 Parts Location of CMJ 523 TableB 1 Setting Table of CMJ 523 S1 S2 2 Js 5 7 8 E GEGEXEAEE BSHLOG ALM ON OFF GYRO SIMULATOR OFF ON LOG SIMULATOR OFF N C No Connection OFF DIRECTION NOR OFF SIME 5 SEC 25 0 2 SEC OFF GYRO SRC HDT NMEA HDT THS NV AZ PULSE Heading Sensor Source GYRO E m GYRO SETTING m n4 lt Qo 19 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual B DRAWINGS gt B 8 GYRO I F ONAS 440 ONAS 15 ONAS 440 440 C 2 B NO f ro hE ROY NASB K 1 ONAS 15 TableB 2 Gyro Log Settings 15 ONAS 30 posds 8 L3 rere Ts tere ters Sumies 5 EZS LWD 94 UO pa1e20 S 95 16 5900176 355195 0 40 HOS OVA 0S HOS OVA 05 OGA 0S 2H09 0S OVA 001 HOS OVA 09
71. Loosen the four M5 f L J grae His d lt Je E Hh am mur IAN amp LIO N O A E i oo S elle Toll o 7 al 9 ju J N Motor driver unit N W PM 2 J1901 7 8 13 Back of the motor driver unit NZ Remove the relay connector Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Work of Starboard side 5 Remove the screws two M4 screws and the bolts six M5 bolts of the radar process unit Radar process unit
72. Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Rx Sentence setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next b LAN Port Setting 3 RX Sentence 3 Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set Selection value Use or No Use can be set for each sentence 1 GPS LL COG SOG GGA RMC RMA GNS GLL VTG 2 GPS WPT Time GGA RMC RMB BWC BWR ZDA 3 Depth DPT DBK DBT DBS 4 Wind MWV MWD 9 Current Data Set Number 0 9 Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data Set Number Initial value 0 Layer Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer by Layer Number Initial value 3 Layer Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B by Layer Number Initial value 4 Layer Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer by Layer Number Initial value 5 6 Autopilot APB 7 29 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 7 3 ADJUSTMENT This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation AN CAUTION Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons If wrong setting is carried out this may cause unstable operation Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation Otherwise the radar performance may be affected resulting in an accident or trouble 7 3
73. Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device the weight of the display 1s greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered comparison with the conventional radar equipment Self diagnostic Program Incorporated The Self diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system If any function deteriorates an alarm message will appear on the radar display and an alarm sounds at the same time Even when the system is operating the functionality test can be carried out except on some functions Performance Monitor The radar performance transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity can appear on the radar display Easy Interswitch Operation Option If an interswitch unit option is connected up to eight JMA 9172 SA radar can be switched over by performing simple operation Up to 2 radars NQE 3141 2A is needed in Display Unit Up to 4 radars NQE 3141 4A is needed separately Up to 8 radars NQE 3141 8A is needed separately Various Functions RADAR Trails Other ship s track display TM True Motion display Head up North up Course up display e Own ship s track display e Auto acquisition Zone function 1 3 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 3 CONFIGURATION 1 3 CONFIGURATION Table1 1 Specified of scanner and categories of ship craft for SOLAS V Type of Radar Antenna type Transm
74. Table3 1 Geodetic System List NAME 0 WGS 84 WGS 72 Japan North American 1927 U S North American 1927 Canada amp Alaska European 1950 Europe Australian geodetic 1966 Australia Ordnance Survey of Great Britain England NAD 83 No Use No Use 1 ADINDAN Ethiopia amp Sudan 12 ARC 1950 Botswana 13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 Australia 14 BERMUDA 1957 Bermuda islands 15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY Colombia 16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE Argentine 17 CHATHAM 1971 Chatham Islands 18 CHUA ASTRO Paraguay 19 CORREGO ALEGRE Brazil 20 DJAKARTA VATAVIA Sumatra 21 EUROPEAN 1979 Europe 22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 New Zealand 23 GUAM 1963 Guam 24 HAYFORD 1910 Finland DOWD gt 25 HJORSEY 1955 Iceland 26 INDIAN India amp Nepal 27 IRELAND1965 Ireland 28 KERTAU 1948 West Malaysia 29 L C 5 ASTRO Cayman Brac Island 30 LIBERIA 1964 Liberia 31 LUZON Philippines 32 MERCHICH Morocco 33 MINNA Nigeria 34 NAHRWAN Oman 35 NAPARIMA BWI Trinidad amp Tobago 36 OLD EGYPTIAN Egypt 37 OLD HAWAIIAN Hawaii 38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES Canary Islands 39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 South America 40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH C
75. Up to 20 characters Call Sign Up to 7 characters MMSI Up to 9 characters COG course over ground or CTW course through water 0 1 unit SOG speed over ground or STW speed through water 0 1 unit CPA closest point of approach 0 01NM unit TCPA time to CPA 0 1min unit BRG true bearing 0 1 unit Not Range HDG heading bearing 0 01NM unit displayed 0 1 unit ROT rate of turn 0 01 min POSN latitude longitude 0 0001 unit Destination waypoint Up to 20 characters NAV Status Status number i The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship the simple mode can display the numeric data of up to two ships ii If the numeric information of SOG or STW is 102 2kn the target ship s speed is 102 2kn or over Then the system cannot calculate CPA and TCPA Therefore missing is indicated in the CPA and TCPA information If the numeric information of ROT is blank the radar is receiving the AIS data which is cannot dis played In this case you can only trust the turning direction which is indicated by the turn indicator The turn indicator is displayed on the AIS symbol as the line perpendicular to the heading direc tion See the Section 5 1 2 2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship the simple mode can display the numeric data of up to two ships For NAV Status one of the following statuses is displayed in accord
76. VRM1 VRM2 VRM Scale 0 000 to 100 0nm Numerical Indication in 4 digits Bearing Scale 360 1 step Off Center Within 66 of Radius except 96nm range Trackball Cursor Built in Target Range Relative True bearing Presentation Electronic Bearing Lines 2 EBL1 EBL2 on Center Floating EBLBearing Indication 000 0 to 359 9 Numerical Indication in 4 digits Marking Function Electronic Mark Maximum 20 points Heading Line Indication Electronic True Motion Unit Built in 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 5 3 6 12 24 and 48nm Anti Sea Clutter SEA Manual AUTO Anti Rain Clutter SEA Manual AUTO Display mode North up Head up Course up Trails Indication Off 0 25 0 5 1 3 6 10 15 30 60min Video Process PROC Built in Scan correlation Remain Interference Rejection IR Built in Off Low Middle High Auto acquisition Zone AZ Sector 2 User Map Built in Mark and Line 20 000 points Self diagnostic function Built in Own Ship s Track Indication Built in Parallel Index Line Built in AlS Indication Built in Display 300 Activate 100 Association function Built in Interfacing Slave Display TRG VD BP BZ GPS IEC61162 1 NMEA0183 LOG GYRO AIS IEC61162 2 Inter Switch OPTION Radar Buoy External Alarm output 11 3 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 Receivable Signal sendable Signal Japan Radio Co Ltd Receive capabil
77. and select an operation mode Normal Numbers and characters are displayed in normal size Small Numbers and characters are displayed in a size smaller than usual 3 7 6 3 Waypoint bearing vector Waypoint Vector Set how to display a line between next Waypoint and own ship 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting gt 9 Next 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode Off The Waypoint bearing vector is not displayed From Origin A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint lt Waypoint bearing vector _ 5 D To Waypoint From CURR Aline is displayed from own ship to next Waypoint Waypoint bearing vector d To Waypoint 3 85 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 6 4 Displaying bearing distance to the Waypoint Status of Origin DEST Select a start point used to display bearing distance in the Waypoint data display area Procedures 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 9 Next 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode From CURR POSN The bearing distance from the own ship position to next Waypoint is displayed Fix The bearing distance from the previ
78. and mark line data see Section 3 11 USING CARD Selecting a card slot Specify the card slot to be used for operating a Select Card Slot route data file Saving route data Save Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card Loading route data Load Route data saved on a flash memory card is loaded into the radar system Erasing route data file A route data file saved in a flash memory card Erase S erased 3 8 1 Selecting a card slot Select Card Slot Specify the card slot to be used for accessing a route data file Flash memory card option is necessary 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 4 File Operation 3 Left click the set value of the 1 Select Card Slot item and select a card slot Slotl and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched 3 7 8 2 Saving route data Save Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card Flash memory card option is necessary 3 89 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Procedures 3 7 8 3 1 2 3 4 5 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 4 File Operation Left click the 3 Save button The file name input screen
79. gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 2 3 4 Flash memory card option is necessary Open the Plot Setting menu by performing the following menu operation Main 8 Plot Setting Left click the item button of 5 UTO Backup Backup button The AUTO Backup menu will appear Select the number for the card slot to back up data Off he automatic backup function is turned off Slot1 Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash memory card inserted into slot 1 Slot2 Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash memory card inserted into slot 2 Data that can be backed up includes own ship s track Own Track other ships trails data Target Track mark line data Mark Line destination data WPT and route data Route The file name to be saved 15 either 9998 or 9999 Every time the power supply is turned on those numbers are alternately displayed Japan Radio Ltd 3 112 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER Radar Function Setting 15 provided for easily obtaining the best radar video by storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use and calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function Functions are factory set for general use and the settings can be fine adjusted by operating the menu Four function modes are
80. two points In this case perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as and VRM2 as VRMI Japan Radio Ltd 4 22 SECTION 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING L LI I M fl I B 1 1 E 1 1 LI I i a E I t i 1 J a I i 1 j OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS ae a ee 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 5 1 1 Collision Avoidance 5 2 5 1 2 Definitions of SymbolS 3 2 22 2 operi ERIS 5 5 5 1 3 Radar 5 9 5 1 4 Cursor Modes Cursor 4 2 2 2 21111 5 11 5 1 5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria 5 13 5 1 6 Setting Vectors Vector Time eese 5 14 5 1 7 Setting the GPS antenna location 5 14 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 1 5
81. 1 1 5 200P NM GY R Q 250V MPYCYS 7 ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM NEAREST APPROACH O 6 1kV DPYCYS 1 5 z 4407 RJ 45 LAN CQD 1891 RED amp n m 58 BE 1 1 I 4501 1 NAVITX 2 NAVITX 3 NAVIRX 4 NAVIRX 5 NAV2TX 6 NAV2TX 7 NAV2RX 8 NAV2RX 9 LOGRX 10 LOGRX 11 ALMTX 12 ALMTX 13 ALMRX 14 ALMRX 15 16 17 JARPATX 18 JARPATX 19 5 20 5 21 HDGRX 22 HDGRX 4701 1 2 2 51 3 52 53 5 5 R2 6 NO DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 d CQD 2176 TERMINAL BOARD 455 4101 1 VD A 2 vD TB4201 ISW IN OUT TRIG 12 A 1 VDIN1 4 TRIG 2 VDINIE 5 A 3 TRIGINI 6 BP 4 TRIGINIE 7 BZ A 5
82. 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Display Unit to TXRX menu 3 Maintenance Menu 5 TXRX Time 4 Display Unit To TXRX 3 Select 1 Yes the Confirmation Menu The scanner unit time data in the display unit is restored transferred to the antenna s internal control circuit Japan Radio Ltd 7 42 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7 4 5 Update of Character String Data String Data Update The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the second language display The second language is factory set to Japanese Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be updated To update character strings the flash memory card option containing the character string file must be inserted in card slot 2 Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the String Data Update menu 3 Maintenance Menu 6 String Data Update 3 Select 1 the Confirmation Menu The character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system and the second language area is updated To display the read character strings in the second language select Other in the menu shown in Section 7 2 5 Language Setting Language 7 43 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manu
83. 104 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 7 1 Initial Setting Option Key Setting Set functions that can be performed with the option key switches Procedures 1 Open the Option Key Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 4 Option Key Setting The Option Key Setting menu will appear This system provides two user keys OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 Different functions can be allocated to each key Functions that can be allocated to each key are as follows Menu A specific menu is directly displayed Zoom The zoom display function is switched between on and off DEST Set Cancel Waypoint menu key gt O Start point Pass point key in simple route operating O gt End point key in simple route operating Capture Screen Screen capture key This function is enabled only when the card optional is connected 3 8 7 2 Using Option Keys Directly displaying a specified _ Menu Preset the _ Menu that is to be displayed with the option key switch Procedures 1 Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that is to be directly displayed with Option Key 2 While the menu is open hold down OPTION 1 key or OPTION 2 key for 2 seconds 3 105 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS The menu currently being displayed is saved for
84. 15 5 2 1 Acquiring Target ACQ essere eee 5 15 5 2 2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets ACQ CANCEL 5 17 5 2 3 Tracked Target Data Display TGT DATA 5 18 5 2 4 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display 5 19 5 2 5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name Name 5 20 5 2 6 Reference Target Reference 5 21 5 27 Operation Test TT Test Menu 5 22 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 27 Japan Radio Co Ltd 5 3 1 ETT T 5 27 5 3 2 Setting AIS Display Function AIS Function 5 27 5 3 3 Activate AIS Targets Activate AIS 5 28 5 3 4 Deactivate AIS Targets Deactivate AIS 5 28 5 9 9 Displaying AIS Information DATA 5 29 5 3 6 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display 5 32 5 3 7 Setting AIS Filter AIS Filter Setting 5 33 5 3 8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost 5 36 5 3 9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm AIS Alarm Setting 5 37 5 4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL Asso
85. 2 Individual Index Line 3 Individual Index Line 4 Individual Index Line 5 Individual Index Line 6 Individual Index Line 7 Individual Index Line 8 5 gt Oo Track HL Track Index Line 1 Track Index Line 2 Track Index Line 3 Track Index Line 4 Track Index Line 5 Track Index Line 6 Track Index Line 7 Track Index Line 8 eration Area 4 13 isplay for Individual Line page 4 13 gay a EG ee On et Peru e 3 4 D 1 The setting items are determined by the setting of Operation Mode 2 Operating Mode Control 3 Displayed only when 3 Control is Individual 4 Operating Mode Reference Bearing 5 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 2 PI Index Line 1 Index Line 2 Index Line 3 Index Line 4 Index Line 5 Index Line 6 Index Line 7 Index Line 8 ress EBL Dial to Control ress VRM Dial to Move End Point TT TT T T Fr gt 8 Japan Radio Ltd C 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 3 TT HE1 Ass lation Setting section 5
86. 2 Operation outside Radar Video PPI As shown at right the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar video PPI N Use the cursor to operate software buttons Use the cursor to select menu items The EBL VRM dial is available for operating the cursor mark Pressing the EBL dial for 2 seconds can perform switching to the trackball operation For details refer to Section 3 8 4 Set Cursor Cursor Setting 3 15 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 2 Operate Software Buttons Software buttons are provided on the radar display so as to easily switch functions without operating menu items For software buttons that can be operated and their locations see Section 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Procedures 1 Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display The software button indicated by the cursor will be shown in reverse video which indicates that the button is specified Standby S Band 2 Press the left button of the trackball The operating state changes according to the function of the software button In this instruction manual this manual operation is described as left clicking e On Off settings Each time the left button 1s pressed the operating state switches as follows On Off Off Multiple settings For example each time the left button 1s pressed the ope
87. 22 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 7 1 Test Video Test Video Test Video 1s used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking are inputted to and processed in the target detection circuit normally However it is sufficient to check that VDH in Test Video is displayed Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet NOTE acquired or tracked Test Video may not be displayed either if the GAIN dial or SEA dial is not properly adjusted Procedures 1 Open the TT test menu by following menu operation TT 9 TT Test Menu 2 Left click the item button of 1 Test Video The setting items for Test Video will be displayed 3 Select the test video to be displayed In general is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode displayed in the Test Video mode the target detection circuit of G If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble 1 Left click the item button of 1 Test video while the TT Test Menu is displayed The setting items for Test Video will be displayed 2 Left click 07 button The test video display will be turned off 5 23 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 7 2
88. 2479 1571 Bearing True course SEE IL lt Range Course 337 0 37 73 SPeed Tar 31 9 kn 227 1 20NM 1755 1843min CPA BOR RCP BCT Ts min TCPA BCT TT ID No information is displayed if digital information value is not displayed Numeric information Enhancement of cursor position numeric value indication Cursor Cursor bearing numeric Cursor bearing 126 2 value indication i true relative Cursor range 1 1 42 HN 35 i 33 393 N Cursor latitude 139 51 658 E Cursor longitude Japan Radio Ltd 2 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Numeric information Enhancement of EBL VRM numeric value display EBL VRM EBL bearing EBL bearing 2447 T VRM range 86 AU NM Numeric information Navigation information Navigation INFO Depth Depth 136 27 Current direction TEMP 236 Water temperature Current 2132 24kn Current speed Wind 7292 Wind direction Wind direction speed T T 3017 5 Wind speed numeric value indication DEST 0827 95 6 NM true relative 363 2 min Destination bearing Destination distance Remaining time before arriving destination Graph information Depth indication Depth Depth Depth range Depth graph Time range 2 7 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS gt 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Graph inf
89. 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 d Fr ee ae 12 Brilliance Setting section 3 8 5 3 on page 3 102 W RADAR Videos Rode er ee e section 3 8 5 4 on page 3 103 2 RADAR Trails 3 Target Symbol section 3 8 5 5 on page 3 103 4 Range Rings 5 EBL VRM PI 6 Character 7 Own Symbol HL Vector 8 Keyboard 3 User 1 Load User Setting section 3 10 2 on page 3 121 2 Save User Setting section 3 10 1 on page 3 120 3 Delete User Setting section 3 10 3 on page 3 121 4 Option Key Setting 1 1 section 3 8 7 on page 3 104 LC 2 0ption2 section 3 8 7 on page 3 104 5 Buzzer Volume section 3 8 6 on page 3 104 1 Key ACK OPE Miss CPA TCPA Alarm New Target Alarm Lost Alarm Navigation Alarm System Alarm 8 Inter Switch te Time Setting section 7 2 6 on page 7 18 1 UTC LMT 2 LMT Date 3 LMT Time 4 Time Zone 5 Display Style 6 Synchronize with GPS 7 Screen Capture Setting i241 Select Item 1 Graphic 2 RADAR Video 3 RADAR Trails 4 Map 2 Select Card Slot 3 File Erase 4 AUTO Capture Interval 5 AUTO File Erase 6 File Format L Cursor Setting section 4 1 3 on page 4 3 1 EBL1 Bearing Fix 2 EBL2 Bearing Fix 3 Cu
90. 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character 3 18 3 3 5 Overview of Menu Structure 1111111 3 23 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ioo 3 24 3 4 1 Interference Rejection IR Reo ies 3 24 3 4 2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length GAIN 3 25 3 4 3 Target Enhance ENH 3 26 3 4 4 Use Video Processing PROC 3 27 3 4 5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode AZI MODE 3 28 3 4 6 Switch True Relative Motion Display Mode TM RM 3 29 3 4 7 Move Own Ship s Display Position Off Center 3 30 3 4 8 Display Radar Trails Trails 3 31 UE NEMEZO g4bvARU UR 3 34 3 4 10 Hide Display Range Rings HL OFF 3 35 3 4 11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display DATA OFF 3 35 3 4 12 Switch Day Night Mode DAY NIGHT 3 36 3 4 13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance PANEL 3 36 34 14 SetTr e Bearlfig 3 37 3 4 15 Set Own Ship Speed oie rre 3 37 3 4 16 Magnet Compass Correction MAG Compass Setting 3 38 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK
91. 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER 6 5 6 4 gllb l 4 90 9 m rend 6 9 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART a docet 6 12 6 5 1 DIS DIAY En 6 12 6 5 2 Numeric Display CEN 6 13 SECTION 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7 1 7 1 1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu Service Man Menu 7 1 72 22 GYRONF SEUNG doit oci eee o cus 7 2 7 1 3 Tuning Tune Adjustment 7 5 7 1 4 Bearing Adjustment 4 1 121 7 5 7 1 5 Range exe dv 7 5 7 1 6 Navigator Setting Device eese esee 7 6 7 1 7 Setting of True Bearing Value eeeee see 7 7 7 1 8 Antenna Height Setting Antenna Height 7 7 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP Setting eee 7 8 7 2 SE Lk Cop ere eee cee er Oe nen Uu MID MEE 7 11 7 2 1 Communication Port Setting COM Port Setting 7 11 7 2 2 Sector Blank Setting Sector Blank 7 15 7 2 3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit Output Pulse 7 16 7 2 4 Slave Mode Setting Master Slave
92. 4 1 Using Cursor Cursor 4 2 Using Range Rings Range Rings 4 2 Using Electronic Bearing Line EBL1 EBL2 4 3 Using Parallel Index Lines Menu 4 8 Operating EBL Maneuver Function EBL Maneuver Setting 4 14 Operating EBL VRM and PI with Cursor 4 16 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 19 Measurement with Cursor Position Cursor 4 20 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker EBL 4 20 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points 4 21 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS The system is equipped with the navigation tools below Cursor Range Rings Electronic Bearing Line EBL1 2 Variable Range Marker VRM1 2 Parallel Index Line PI EBL Maneuver Marker EBL VRM PI Operation with Cursor Cursor AUTO Cursor bearing numeric value indication true relative Cursor range EBL1 numeric value indication true relative EBL1 On Off VRM 1 On Off EBL2 On Off VRM 2 On Off EBL2 numer
93. 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS Fig 1 9 General System Diagram of Radar Type JMA 9172 SA Japan Radio Co Lid 1 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS NKE 1532 SCANNER UNIT CRCUTBREARER SHIP YARD SUPPLY IM AC 100V 60Hz 5A 1 200 NE 0 6 1kV DPYCYS 1 5 NBL 175 SHIP S MAIN for HEATER STEPDOWN 220 60 2 1 6 TRANSFORMER 14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE H 2695110056 MAX 23 JRC SUPPLY NCD 9170 DISPLAY UNIT GYRO 250V MPYCYS 7 0 6 1kV DPYCY 6 SHIP S MAIN 250V TTYCS 1 220 60 2 1 6 800 LO G inmea 0183 DGPS 250V TTYCS 1 0 6 1kV DPYCYS 1 5 SHIP S MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM VDR 3C 2V x5 MAX 30m DC24V BATTERY 1W 18 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE H 2695111153 RADAR nter switch MAX 18 09 JRC SUPPLY 250V TTYCS 4 H 2695110006 JRC SUPPLY H 2668510019 JRC SUPPLY SPARE EC DIS 901 ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM NEAREST APPROACH POWER FAIL CONNING DISPLAY jAN 701 CON AIS 250V MPYC 4 250V TTYCS 4 250V TTYCS 4 Fig 1 9 General System Diagram of Radar Type JMA 9172 SA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment Ex Radiotelephone Communications receiver and direction finder etc Especially inter wiring cables between sca
94. 6 True vector display Relative vector display key This function switches the display mode true relative of the tracked target and AIS target vector 5 1 6 on page 5 14 TGT DATA Target data display key This function displays the digital data of the tracked target or AIS target at the cursor position the tracked target 5 2 3 on page 5 18 the AIS target 5 3 5 on page 5 29 ACQ MANUAL Manual acquisition key This function enables manual acquisition of the target at the cursor position 5 2 1 on page 5 15 ACQ CANCEL Tracked target cancellation key This function cancels the symbol and vector of the target that 1s being tracked and stops the tracking of the target If this key is pressed for 2 seconds or more all the targets that are being tracked are cancelled 5 2 2 on page 5 17 DAY NIGHT Day night mode key This function switches the color and brightness of the screen that was preset 3 4 12 on page 3 36 AIS TT AIS On Off key This function switches the AIS function to ON OFF when the AIS function is enabled 5 3 2 on page 5 27 HL OFF Ship s heading line Off key HL ship s heading highlight line can be set to Off only while this key is pressed 3 4 10 on page 3 35 Japan Radio Ltd 2 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS DATA OFF
95. 6 2AXG T GPS 1 14 Network H 1 Network Function section 7 2 9 1 on page 7 25 2 IP Address 3 Sensor Priority section 7 2 9 2 on page 7 25 L 4 Synchronization section 7 2 9 3 on page 7 26 11 15 LAN Port Setting 1 TX Setting section 7 2 10 1 on page 7 27 E 2 5 2 ied eben as ced den e section 7 2 10 2 on page 7 28 Lo 3 Sentence se ncmo uem MR E Rue section 7 2 10 3 page 7 29 T Line Monitor 3 Maintenance Menu H 1 Safety Switch section 7 4 1 on page 7 38 HE2 Area Initial section 7 4 2 on page 7 39 11 Partial Master Reset section 7 4 2 1 on page 7 39 1 Serviceman Menu 2 Except Serviceman Menu 3 User Setting H 4 TT Setting 5 AIS Setting 6 Day Night L 7 JRC Card Copy Record 2 All Master Reset secs section 7 4 2 2 on page 7 39 E 3 Internal To Card1 2 eS foes section 7 4 3 1 on page 7 40 4 Card1 2 TO Internal or section 7 4 3 2 on page 7 40 FEB TXRX TIME oss es ee et due e section 7 4 4 on page 7 41 A Gear TX Times m 5 25 425 dot ee erates section
96. 9 2 Function Setting Menu ltems ees 3 114 3 9 3 X Overview of Function Operations User Function Setting 3 115 3 9 4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data 3 119 2 10 SETIINQG 3 120 3 10 1 Save Operating State Save User Setting 3 120 3 10 2 Load Operating State Load User Setting 3 121 3 10 3 Delete Operating State Delete User Setting 3 121 IIT USING CARD 3 122 3 11 1 Operate File on the Card File Manager 3 122 3 12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING eto ooa paene eer ps aae E ices 3 129 3 12 1 Receive Port Setting RX Port 3 129 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 1 OPERATION FLOW 3 1 OPERATION FLOW Attention Do not put anything on the operation panel If you put anything hot on it it may be deformed Do not give any impact to the operation panel trackball or controls Otherwise any failure or damage may result POWER ON AND START THE SYSTEM OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ACQUIRE AND MEASURE DATA END THE OPERATION AND STOP THE SYSTEM Each operation is described in
97. Alarm Setting 2 Left click the item button of _ 1 Lost Alarm The setting items for Lost Alarm will be displayed 3 Left click the item button corresponding to the condition to be set Off lost alarm is not issued Danger A lost alarm is issued only for AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued ACT amp Danger A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued ACT amp Danger amp Select A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets data indicated AIS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued i lost alarm is not issued for sleeping AIS targets 5 3 9 2 Setting of Condition for CPA TCPA Alarm Procedures 1 Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 6 AIS Alarm Setting 2 Left click the item button of CPA TCPA Alarm The setting items for CPA TCPA Alarm is switched Off A CPA TCPA alarm is not issued A CPA TCPA alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets ACT amp Sleep A CPA TCPA alarm is issued for all AIS targets on the radar display i When the Lost Alarm menu set to Off the CPA ring color changes to dark color 5 37 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL 6 DECIS
98. Be sure to always adjust for the best gain See also the Section 3 2 8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed 1 Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the GAIN dial until targets can be easily observed Turning GAIN dial clockwise increases gain Turning GAIN dial counterclockwise decreases gain Turning the GAIN dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain and the range to observe radar video is widened However if the gain is too high unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase resulting in reduction of targets visibility To observe densely crowded targets or short range targets turning the GAIN dial counterclockwise will decrease the receiving gain which enables targets to be easily observed However caution must be taken so as not to overlook a small and important target It Is recommended to restore the setting to Current Lev l the factory default if you lost the appropriate EN settings The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line The factory default level is assigned by every function mode See the Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER Factory Default Japan Radio Ltd 3 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 5 Suppress Sea Clutter SEA AN CAUTION When using the sea clutter suppression function never set the suppression level too hi
99. Entering a character The connection pattern will be saved when the name is input Japan Radio Ltd A 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION 3 Erasing a connection pattern Erase Procedures 1 Open the Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units 2 Left click the 2 File Operation button The File Operations window will appear 3 Left click the 3 Erase button The Erase menu will appear The list of connection patterns stored in the memory will be displayed 4 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be erased Confirmation Window will appear 5 Left click the 1 ves to load The selected connection pattern is erased and the file name is deleted from the list A 2 6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units The display units and antenna units can be named Procedures 1 Open the Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units 2 Left click the 1 Name button Name will be highlighted indicating that the rename mode is activated 3 Move the cursor to the display unit Section b Display unit connected as master or Section c Display unit connected as slave scanner unit Section a Connected scanner unit to be renamed and left click he Input IND Name or the Input TXRX Name window will appear 4 Input a new unit name Up to 8 characters can be input as a unit name For the input meth
100. If system operation is unstable it may be stabilized by initializing the memory area To initialize the memory area follow the procedure in this section The memory area 15 reset to the factory setting when initialized 7 4 2 1 Partial Master Reset 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Partial Master Rest operation menu for the memory area 3 Maintenance Menu 2 Area Initial 1 Partial Master Reset 3 Select the items to be initialized 1 Serviceman Menu The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized 2 Except Serviceman Menu The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized 3 User Setting The user set values are initialized 4 TT Setting The set values for the target tracking function are initialized 5 AIS Setting The set values for the AIS display function are initialized 6 Day Night The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day night mode are initialized 4 Select 1 Yes in the Confirmation Menu The memory areas of specified items are initialized and the system 15 restarted 7 4 2 2 All Master Reset 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the All Master Rest operation menu for the memory area 3 Maintenance Menu 2 Area Initial 2 All Master Reset 3 Select 1 the Confirmation Menu The whole memory area is initialized and the system is re
101. Input button The Mark Input menu and the Line Input menu are switched 3 Left click the item button of 1 Type to select the type of mark font or line pattern to be created The desired mark font or line pattern is selected To add a line select midpoint O 4 Left click the item button of 2 Color to select the color of mark or line to be created The desired mark or line color is selected Japan Radio Ltd 2 50 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5 Left click the button to input the latitude longitude For the input method on the latitude longitude input screen see Section 3 3 4 5 Entering latitude longitude 6 Left click the 4 Comment button to input the comment For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character The window will not be open when the system is in the transmission state 7 Left click the 5 Enter button Mark Line plotting will be terminated To create another mark or line repeat procedures 4 to 7 3 6 2 Set User Map Display Mark Display Setting The user map can be individually displayed On or hidden Off oetting by type Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern oetting by color Setting can be made by color of mark or line The mark font display size can be selected Normal The mark is displayed in normal size omall The mark is displayed in
102. Operate Software Buttons 2 3 16 3 3 3 Basic Menu Operation 2 2 122 2 3 17 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character 3 18 3 3 5 Overview of Menu Structure 41112121 3 23 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 2 2 1 3 24 3 4 1 Interference Rejection 2 2 2 1 2 3 24 3 4 2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length GAIN 3 25 34 3 Target Enhance ENH 2 2 eU PP eps 3 26 3 4 4 Use Video Processing PROC 3 27 3 4 5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode AZI MODE 3 28 3 4 6 Switch True Relative Motion Display Mode TM RM 3 29 3 4 7 Move Own Ship s Display Position Off Center 3 30 3 4 8 Display Radar Trails Trails 3 31 29449 ZOOM a 3 34 3 4 10 Hide Display Range Rings HL OFF 3 35 3 4 11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display DATA OFF 3 35 3 4 12 Switch Day Night Mode DAY NIGHT 3 36 3 4 13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance PANEL 3 36 2 4 14 SOU True
103. Own Track Type The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system Water temperature track The water temperature value at the latitude longitude is recorded Water depth track The water depth value at the latitude longitude is recorded Tidal current track The tidal current vector at the latitude longitude is recorded Only one type of expanded own ship s track can be used at a time Multiple types of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time Specify the type of the expanded own ship s tracks to be used by performing the operation below 3 43 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 1 Left click the Track button located at the lower right of the display Target Man PI Track menu The Own Track Menu will appear 2 Left click the item button of 3 Track Type The numeric value of the navigation data can be shown by the color of own ship s track Normal he expanded own ship s track function is not used Depth The color of the tracks is changed according to the water depth value Temperature color of the tracks is changed according to the water temperature value 3 Select the function to be used 4 Left click the item button of 4 Num Vector Display Numeric value or vector of navigation data can be added to own ship s track Off Numeric value and vector are not
104. SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 2 To change parallel index line intervals 1 Putthe cursor on near the end of line and left click When the cursor is moved there it will turn into and PI will be displayed at the upper right of the cursor The parallel index lines become operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the interval to be set The parallel index lines interval will change as the cursor moves If Individual is selected for Operation Mode the parallel index lines move 3 Left click The parallel index lines will be fixed 3 To change the end points of parallel index lines If Individual 1s selected for Operation Mode the length of parallel index lines can be changed 1 Putthe cursor on the end point of parallel index lines and left click When the cursor is moved there it will turn into lt gt and PI will be displayed at the upper right of the cursor The parallel index lines become operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the position to be set The position of the end point will change as the cursor moves 3 Left click The parallel index lines will be fixed Japan Radio Ltd 4 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING Target position on the RADAR screen RADAR ante
105. abnormality is found OK 15 displayed When an abnormality is found NG is displayed The status display field of equipment not connected is left blank 4 Supply Voltage Check the voltage of internal power supply Item Normal operating range 12V 11 4 to 12 6V 5V 4 75 to 5 25V 3 3V 3 14 to 3 46V Battery 2 5V or more 8 7 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8 3 1 2 Monitor Test Checks for the display The test pattern will be shown on the display 1 Patterni All colors are filled with white 2 Pattem2 A white box is displayed on the black background of 1280 x 1024dot 3 Pattern3 Displays rectangle X 2 circle X 2 and cross shape X13 white lines on the black background 4 Pattem4 Displays H of 9 dots X 9 dots on the entire screen white character on the black background Pattem5 Gray scale display 16 levels Pattem6 Displays a color bar Pattern7 Displays the VDR test pattern Ui Pattem8 Displays the specified color To return to the normal display press any key If errors occur in the monitor no test pattern will appear 8 3 1 3 Operation Unit Test Keyboard Test Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel 1 Key Test 1 Key Test 2 Buzzer Test 2 Buzzer Test 3 Light Test 3 Light Test 1 Key Test Checks for the controls and switc
106. activated AIS ACT MAX INFO Maximum number of AIS targets to be activated T Alarm 5 Alarm AIS alarm Up to 10 alarm messages can be displayed AIS Max Target INFO Maximum number of AIS targets AIS PROC Data Alarm AIS processing circuit No communication or 328 communication error CPA TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target 301 Lost Alarm Failure in tracking the target that has been under tracking Failure in receiving AIS target data for a specified time New Target Alarm Acquisition or activation of a target in the automatic 302 acquisition activation zone REF Target Alarm Decrease in the reference target accuracy Trial Warning There is a dangerous target when trial maneuver is active TT Boot Alarm Target tracking unit start failure 344 TT Data Alarm target tracking unit is malfunctioning 323 95 Capacity INFO TT MAX Target INFO The maximum number of targets is under acquisition i ALR No Unique alarm number ALR sentence ACK sentence 9 3 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING ii is a 3 digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence Message Approach Arrival Break Off WPT Cross Track Error Table9 5 List of Route Messages and Warnings Class Alarm Alarm Alarm Description Approach the route Alarm Arrive at way point
107. added Depth Water depth value is added Temperature Water temperature value is added Current current vector is added 5 Select the function to be used NOTE use the expanded own ship s track function the track must be entered from the special navigation equipment into this radar system Japan Radio Ltd 3 44 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 7 Use Water Depth Track Water Depth Track Set the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship s track by performing the operation below 1 Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Track 6 Water Depth Setting The Water Depth Setting menu will appear Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship s track Water depth Color of track value White 1 xxxx m Min Gray 2 Xxxx m Blue 3 m Green 4 m Yellow 5 XXXX m Pink 6 xxxx m Max Red For example if 10m is entered for 1 30m is entered for 2 and 50m is entered for 3 the area with a water depth of less than 10 meters is indicated by white tracks the area with a water depth of 10 to 30 meters is indicated by gray tracks and the area with a water depth of 30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks 3
108. as you can standalone type only 3 Remove the screws M6 from the four corners and displace the face cover 8 17 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 4 LRemove the LCD operation circuit cables and remove the face cover 5 Remove six M4 screws 6 Displace the module and remove the three cables 7 Remove the LCD module Japan Radio Ltd 8 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Assembly 1 Tighten the lower three M4 screws halfway 2 Connect the cables to the LCD module 3 Align the module to the lower three screws and insert it downward 4 Check the positions of the two bosses and ensure that appropriate space is maintained under the LCD module Tighten the six screws evenly 5 Connect the LCD operation circuit cables and attach the face cover 6 Tighten the screws at the four corners 7 Attach the tilt fixing handle Operation Check 1 2 After completing the replacement Temporary tightening EE A w Positions of the two bosses procedures start the system to make sure that images are displayed properly Turn the brightness knob to make sure the brightness can be changed between the minimum and the maximum levels 8 19 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 CO
109. assess gates ondes ri m ie xi Ea 5 15 5 2 2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets ACQ CANCEL 5 17 5 2 3 Tracked Target Data Display TGT DATA 5 18 5 2 4 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display 5 19 Japan Radio Co Ltd 5 2 5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name Name 5 20 5 2 6 Reference Target Reference 5 21 5 2 7 Operation Test TT Test Menu 5 22 5 3 AIS OPERA TION idisse irit eee a 5 27 5 3 1 aju3iglejrrl x 5 27 5 3 2 Setting AIS Display Function AIS Function 5 27 5 3 3 Activate AIS Targets Activate AIS 5 28 5 3 4 Deactivate AIS Targets Deactivate AIS 5 28 5 3 9 Displaying AIS Information TGT DATA 5 29 5 3 6 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display 5 32 5 3 7 Setting AIS Filter AIS Filter Setting 5 33 5 3 8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost 5 36 5 3 9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm AIS Alarm Setting 5 37 5 4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL Association 5 38 5 4 1 Setting of Function
110. available and they are factory set as follows Function 1 Coast Useful for observing short range videos Function 2 Deep Sea Suitable for general ocean navigation Function 3 Storm Useful for observing videos in stormy weather Function 4 Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain snow clutter is strong 3 9 1 Operation Procedures 3 9 1 1 Calling a Function 1 Press the USER key Each time the USER key is pressed the selection changes cyclically as follows Function Off Functionl Function Function3 Function4 Function Off The name of the current function mode is displayed at the lower left 2 IR Middle of the display Function LeveD Alternatively left clicking the PROC Off function button located at the lower left of the radar display will enable the same operation 230 Sea Rain 3 9 1 2 Changing Function Setting temporary change When radar signal processing setting 1s changed by using the menu or button on the radar display while function 1 to 4 is called the change is temporarily reflected to the operating state Since this method does not change the memory contents the new setting is discarded as soon as another function is called When the previous function is called again operation is performed according to the memory contents 3 113 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruc
111. be shown at the cursor mode Upper right of the display on page 2 4 If the function of a selected cursor mode is not used for one G minute or more the cursor mode is automatically changed to AUTO 5 11 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 4 3 Operation of AUTO Mode As shown below the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the object at the cursor position when left clicked The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation Object at Cursor Position Operation None Acquires a target EBL EBL operation VRM VRM operation Intersection point of EBL Performs EBL operation and VRM operation at and VRM the same time Parallel index line Operates the parallel index line Tracked target Displays the numeric data of the tracked target Tracked target with Hides the numeric data numeric data displayed Sleeping AIS target Activates the AIS target Activated AIS target Displays the AIS target information AIS target with numeric Hides the AIS target information data displayed Automatic acquisition Operates the automatic acquisition activation activation zone zone AIS filter Operates the AIS filter zone Japan Radio Ltd 5 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria Attention
112. cannot be turned On in the following case LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor while the AIS function is on Setting AIS Display Function AIS Function Attention When the AIS function is set to Off the AIS display function is turned off and AIS symbols are no longer displayed Once the AIS display function is set to Off it is not automatically switched to On even if a dangerous target exists Procedures 1 Press the AIS TT key Alternatively left click the button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display 5 27 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 3 3 Activate AIS Targets Activate AIS Activate an AIS target and display the target s vector and make a collision decision 5 3 3 1 Manual activation AIS Activate an AIS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line Procedures 1 2 Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated and right click The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed Left click 2 ACT AIS The selected AIS target will be activated 5 3 3 2 Automatic activation Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line When the automatic activation function is used AIS targets are automa
113. clicked 2 23 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 4 Manual own ship s speed setting When selection of the speed sensor is set to MAN enter the own ship s speed manually If this button is clicked the numeric value input screen is opened After setting a value determine the entry by clicking ENT Target tracking TT AIS information D Target vector display true relative switching 3 CPA limit setting 5 Past position display true relative switching AIS On Off 9 Tracked target symbol display On Off AIS target symbol display On Off 2 Target vector length setting Vector R Limit 15 10min Past POSN 05 NM iS ay Association Filter Ranse is T 15min 0732 Target Information 5 4 TCPA limit setting Past position display interval switching 7 Past position display interval unit switching 1D Association On Off 2 AIS filter mode switching Radar trails display time switching 3 Radar trails display true relative switching D Target vector display true relative switching Japan Radio Co Ltd The tracked target AIS target vector display is switched to TI true vector R relative vector whenever this button is clicked This setting is switched together with the past position display true relative switc
114. cm 14 After replacing the motor 2 assemble the unit in the reverse order p of the disassembly procedure N CAUTION Do not forget to tighten the screws and bolts N CAUTION Do not forget to connect the cables Operation check Follow the procedure below to check the operation after you have replaced the motor 1 Turn on the radar power supply When the Countdown is completed push the TX STBY button and check that the radar image appears without error Check that you do not listen any unusual sound starting rotating and stopping the motor 2 Open the service engineer menu and initialize the motor rotation time Japan Radio Ltd 8 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8 4 3 Replacement of 23inch LCD Replacement of LCD monitor must be made by specialized o service personnel For details refer to Service Manual N CAUTION Do not touch the LCD screen directly with your fingers A CAUTION Do not touch the AR filter directly with your fingers A CAUTION Perform the replacement work on a soft cloth to avoid damage to the LCD screen and other parts Required tools e A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screws e A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screws Disassembly 1 Remove the tilt fixing handle standalone type only 2 Tilt up the screen as much
115. for a menu item for which settings are to be changed the selected item will be displayed To determine the selected item Left click the software button for an item you want to set and then the selected item will be determined If you do not change the setting right click the button The selected item will close without changing the setting 3 17 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 3 7 Menu Operation with the Trackball Item Press numeric keys corresponding to the desired item number to display the selected item Press numeric keys corresponding to the desired item number to select a set value Software button Press the 0 key to move to the higher level Process Setting Video Latitude Normal BJ 3ENarOw 2 Normal Pe AUIS Wide 4 Super Wide Process Switch OFF 2nd Process Mode Remain Process Switch Range 3 0NM Fast Target Detection OFF User Function Setting gt SART Off Exit Selected item Present state Cursor When the gt mark appears at the right end of a menu item press numeric keys corresponding to the selected item number to move to a lower level 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system the numeric value input screen wi
116. from of old Now it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance 1s positioned among the navigational aid problems The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels whether air water the boundary between air and water or space This pattern consists of two closed loops in principle one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and the other 1s a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterminate destination Fig 5 1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR E W Anderson The closed loop of collision avoidance 1s shown on the left side and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side Collision avoidance Decision of cource Traffic rule Cllision Fixing by radio wave visual and celestial observation Guide loop Caluculati on Visual and radio Cource and Compass watch speed and log avoidance loop Judgement Mancuver nsrumeni a judgement Control loop Ship traveling in controlled condition Fig 5 1 Navigation Pattern Vessel s Spacing loop Dead reckoning Japan Radio Co Ltd 5 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 1 2 Marine Accidents and Collisions Among marine accidents collision accidents have been highlighted as the tonnages and speeds of sh
117. from own ship s position Estimated Time of Arrival G A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the ground using ground track input data H Heading The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any instant expressed in angular units from a reference direction Heading line A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading of the ship High Speed Craft Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed craft Head up Own ship s heading line 1s always pointed to the top center of the radar display International Maritime Organisation RADAR Interference Rejector A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or more scanners L Japan Radio Ltd xxii Lost AIS target Lost tracked target LP MMSI MOB MON MP NM N up PI Past positions POSN PRF PROC Radar cross section Range Rings Reference target Relative speed Relative vector RM A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target before the reception of its data was lost or its last dead reckoned position One for which target information 1s no longer available due to poor lost or obscured signals Long Pulse M Maritime Mobile Service Identity Man OverBoard Performance monitor Medium Pulse lnm 1852m North up Parallel Index
118. gt DISPLAY UNITE O srr CMH 2246 1an ET i 12 AGND P1921 piii Of Ol emtr 13 0 MONI 1432V P1941 41941 41921 J1911 5 0 No 9 MTRE T amp AGND 2 GND Ol sv 1 0 EE gg 1 350209 0 llo 10 VD 43003 22 2 7 905 2NC 404 3 15VE 11 vo woos S3B XH A pe en IT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT Ifo EE EE 5 SPEND crs 5 TT 1 O le ib 2 MBK 2 1 3 NC J1201 OPNS J1212 P1212 P1912 21912 4 0 GND MOT OR B4P VH A 1 480700 0 308 5 MPS n ZCRD1587 219 MER RELAY FILTERCIRCUIT P1903 09 avi CSC 1 656 FORD 2080100 wan n 2 in PC 201 ws Ha DIN A 1 2 P1511 p J2214 2 DGND J2216 J22 R G 6P IL G 3P IL G 3P J1202 202 SAFETY SWITCH J2201 1 IL G 2P B8P VH B8P SHF gz po 4PHB RED 50 1656 lt lt lt a a 1 c 889929992 15552998 8 592 822 CBD art 9 5 8888 1 25855 2556028 Lae BUR MOTOR DRIVER 1 SW A5 5998 ra Bee SRS faa vo 248 12277 m pie PCI 501 U B201 H P2202 RED A RED FAN 0 0 is bH woo Nelo o WOT ZCRD1566 X wos jee 20801573 20801565 16 for MOTOR DRIVER wo
119. jpo AMSTERDAM Branch Telephone 31 20 658 0 750 Facsimile 31 20 658 0755 e mail service jrceurope com SEATTLE Branch Telephone 1 206 654 5644 Facsimile 1 206 654 7030 e mail marineservice jrcamerica com CODE No ZPHDO 730 ISO 9001 ISO 14001 Certified APR 2011 Edition3 JRC Printed in Japan
120. let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and quiet Never give him alcoholic drinks Method of mouth to mouth respiration by raising hea 1 Raise the victim s head Support his forehead with one of your hand and his neck with the other hand When you tilt his head backward the victim in most cases opens his mouth to the air This makes mouth to mouth respiration easy 2 Cover his mouth as widely as possible with yours and press your cheek against his nose 2 or pinch his nostrils with your fingers to prevent air from leaking 3 3 Blow into his lungs Continue blowing into his mouth until his breast swells Blow into his mouth as quickly as possible for the first 10 times Fig 1 Mouth to mouth respiration i Japan Radic Co Ltd x When both pulse and breathing have stopped Perform the Cardiac massage Fig 2 and Mouth to mouth respiration Fig 1 When no pulse has come not to be felt his pupils are open and no heartbeat 15 heard cardiac arrest 1s supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed 1 Place your both hands one hand on the other on the lower one third area of his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it 1s dented about 2cm Repeat compressing his breast 50 times or so a minutes Cardiac massage 2 In case of one rescuer Repeat cardiac massages about 15 tim
121. line Equally time spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and own ship POSitioN Pulse Repetition Frequency The number of radar pulses transmitted each second PROCess Radar signal processing function R Radar cross section of a target determines the power density returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the target A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target 1s used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation The speed of a target relative to own ship s speed data A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship s motion Relative Motion A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed and all targets move relative to own ship xxii Japan Radio Co Ltd RM R RM T ROT Route RR Sea stabilization Sea state SET Sleeping AIS target SOG SP STAB STW TCPA Test target TM Trails Trial manoeuvre True course True speed Japan Radio Co Ltd Relative Motion Relative Trails Relative Motion True Trails Rate Of Turn Change of heading per time unit A set of waypoints Range Rings S A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the sea Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind to sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions The cu
122. radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current HL Fixed on the radar display Moving depending on own ship s speed True Motion Display 3 4 6 2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion TM Mode 1 Left click the motion mode button for 2 seconds Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is changed to the true motion mode The ship starts moving from that position 3 4 6 3 Switching True Motion TM Mode to Relative Motion RM Mode 1 Left click the motion mode button RMT gt The relative motion mode will be selected Own ship returns to the center of the radar display 3 29 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 7 Move Own Ship s Display Position Off Center The own ship s position can be moved from the display center to any position within 66 of the display radius This function is convenient for observing a wide coverage in any direction If Off Center functions set to scanner position 1s outside of the PPI range when function switching display with reference to scanner position G This function is not available on the 96 NM range Procedures 1 Left click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the display 3 4 7 1 The cross cursor mark will appear at the own ship s position on th
123. returns 5Scan CORREL Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns Remain Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly Peak Hold Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low 3 27 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode AZI MODE Select the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display 1 Left click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the display The bearing display modes are switched N Up CUp True Bearing Mode North Up The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI 0 on range rings points to the due north Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the chart and the true bearing of a target can easily be read out Relative Bearing Mode Head U The video is displayed so that the ship s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI 0 on range rings Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ship s heading line the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea This mode is suitable for watching over other ships Course up Bearing Mode Course Up By setting the course up mode own ship s course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of the radar display 0 on range rings In the same way as in
124. route data saved in the radar system 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence 2 Left click the 2 Add button The Waypoint adding mode is selected The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar display 3 Left click the location at which you want to add a Waypoint A Waypoint will be added When a Waypoint is added the value of the Planned Speed in the section up to the menu is used for the Planned Speed value up to the added Waypoint Japan Radio Ltd 3 70 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4 To add another Waypoint repeat procedure 3 5 To finish adding a Waypoint left click twice at the last Waypoint The Waypoint adding mode is cancelled Example Beo 0627 12 0kn N Rubber band 024 Last Waypoint 3 7 2 3 Correcting coordinates of a Waypoint Correct Position The coordinates of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence 2 Left click the 3 Correct Position button The Waypoint correcting mode is selected 3 On the radar display put the cursor on the Waypoint that is to have its coordinates corrected an
125. s position Japan Radio Ltd 5 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION This section explains how to use the target tracking function The target tracking function automatically tracks a target and displays the target s course and speed as vectors The target tracking function calculates CPA and TCPA and issues an alarm as needed The tracking data 1s erased from memory when the power 15 turned off or during transmission standby 5 2 1 Acquiring Target ACQ Target acquisition can be performed on two modes Automatic and Manual and both modes can be used at the same time 5 2 1 1 Automatic acquisition lf the number of targets being tracked has reached the NOTE allowable maximum and other targets not being tracked go into the acquisition activation zone automatically acquired targets are canceled in ascending order of danger The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition activation zone 1 Turning On Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation AZ Menu Procedures 1 Open the AZ menu by following menu operations AZ The AZ Menu will appear 2 Left click the item button of 1 71 2 A22 The acquisition activation zone 1 71 or acquisition activation zone 2 AZ2 will be set to on or off On The a
126. selection and numeric value input BRILL Brilliance dial This dial is provided at the right of the monitor Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the monitor 3 2 1 on page 3 6 2 15 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS In this radar the frequently used functions can be directly set from the screen without opening the menu by using the software buttons on the screen for quick handling The screen is divided into a number of areas and each area is named Upperleft Upper right of the display PPI of the display e 12 Tuning OK m Cursor AUTO 1 5 T _ 0 75 11044529E ZNM pu hu AN a as 2 dus SENT 1930 x Own ships mc wll Tel enar enal information 2 Be RIT 1641 D Transmit po 5 ANT 3 Master Target Information TT AIS Vector Umt 15 10min Target Past POSN 05 X tracking TT AS Fiter AIS information ret etme Digital information Menu Brilliance Display information Alarm Lower left Lower right of the display of the display The name of each button is described from the next page The function can be used by left clicking while setting the arrow cursor on the button position Japan Radio Ltd 2
127. sensors No 1 ECDIS No 1 FFD Conning Display No 2 Data Server No 3 Remote GPS No 2 ECDIS No 2 FFD No 1 Converter Unit Console Conning None No 3 ECDIS No 3 FFD No 2 Converter Unit NAV W S No 4 ECDIS No 4 FFD No 1 Alart I F No 1 GPS No 1 MFD No 1 Chart RADAR No 2 Alart I F No 2 GPS No 2 MFD No 2 Chart RADAR Port Conning No 3 GPS No 3 MFD No 3 Chart RADAR STAB Conning No 1 Remote GPS No 4 MFD No 4 Chart RADAR No 1 Data Server No 2 Remote GPS i if you selected None the system does not receive data 7 25 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 9 3 Synchronization Setting Day Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchronized 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Synchronization setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 4 Network 4 Synchronization 3 Select the or to be synchronized On Day Night and operation panel brilliance are sinchronized Off Day Night and operation panel brilliance are not sinchronized Japan Radio Ltd 7 26 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 10 LAN Port Setting The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN The purpose of JRC LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems The JRC systems are synchronized with datum in JRC LAN network To connect JRC
128. signals ROT RSA Selectable ports When the automatic recognition AUTO function is used When ports are specified LOG NAV1 NAV2 ALARM COM Japan Radio Ltd 7 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 1 3 Reception Sentence Setting RX Sentence Set signal sentences to be received from sensors The system is factory set for using all sentences To receive only specified sentences select No Use for sentences which are not necessary Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Sentence setting menu 2 Installation Menu 5 COM Port Setting 3 RX Sentence 3 Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set Selection value Use or No be set for each sentence 1 GPS LL COG SOG GGA RMC RMA GNS GLL VTG 2 GPS WPT Time GGA RMC RMB BWC BWR ZDA 3 Depth DPT DBK DBT DBS 4 Wind MWV MWD 5 Current Data Set Number 0 9 Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data Set Number Initial value 0 Layer A Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer by Layer Number Initial value 3 Layer B Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer by Layer Number Initial value 4 Layer Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer by Layer Number Initial value 5 6 Autopilot APB 7 13 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 917
129. signals of definitely unwanted waves noise and clutter When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite the signals are rejected Only when detection of targets is definite the signals are displayed 3 8 1 3 Auto Dynamic Range When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode are in use the dynamic range is automatically controlled When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is in use this function improves gain by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter is strong and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter 1s not detected When the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is in use this function improves gain by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter and rain snow clutter are strong and narrowing the dynamic range of the other areas and videos become obscure when the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is in use Off Does not control the dynamic range automatically Standard setting The dynamic range is set in the same manner as when the manual sea clutter suppression mode or the manual rain snow clutter suppression mode is in use On Automatically controls the dynamic range Japan Radio Ltd 3 94 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 1 4 Process Switch This function sets a specific area and switches the video process m
130. soiled with smoke salt dust paint or birds droppings wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all times Otherwise radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect on it resulting in deterioration of radar performance Never use solvents of gasoline benzine trichloroethylene and ketone for cleaning Otherwise the radiation plane may deteriorate Check up and clean the radiator 8 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT c Rotating section c 1 Supply Oil Seal An scanner unit with a grease nipple needs grease supply Remove the cap on the grease nipple located on the front of JMA 9172 SA radar at which the radiator 1s supported and grease with a grease gun Make the oiling every six months The oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g which is as much as the grease comes out of the oil seal Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of Mobil Oil c 2 Oiling gears Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush Oiling in short intervals 1s more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life but oil at least every six months Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil 3 Mounting legs Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the antenna unit case for corrosion at intervals and maintain them to p
131. the North up mode fixed targets do not flicker and are stabilized even if the ship 1s yawing The bearing of the heading line varies by the same shift of own ship s course To change the course press the AZI MODE key several times again to select the course up mode so as to set a new course North HL HL 2b e North up mode Head up mode Course up mode Japan Radio Ltd 2 28 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 6 Switch True Relative Motion Display Mode TM RM 3 4 6 1 Switching Relative Motion RM Mode to True Motion TM Mode 1 Left click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the radar display gt The true motion mode will be selected In the true motion mode the own ship s position on the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving targets move on the radar display When the true motion mode is selected the own ship s position is set to about 60 of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current Subsequently when own ship arrives at the position of about 66 of the display radius it is automatically reset to its initial position at about 60 of the display
132. the battery with the wrong polarity remove the battery immediately and do not use the same battery again N CAUTION During the procedures do not put the battery on any circuit board or conductive item A CAUTION To dispose of a used battery follow the instructions provided in Section 10 2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES N CAUTION To disassemble of a used battery have to use non conductive tool 8 23 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Japan Radio Ltd 8 24 SECTION 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE 9 1 zs iMMIibsICqg M 9 1 9 1 1 List of Alarms and other Indications 9 1 9 1 2 Operation Checking 9 6 9 1 3 FUSE CHECKING 9 6 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 2 2 2 2 1121 9 7 9 2 1 Circuit Block to be Repaired eese 9 7 9 3 AFTER SALES SERVICE 9 9 9 3 1 Keeping period of maintenance parts 9 9 9 3 2 When you Request for Repair 9 9 9 3 3 Recommended Maintenance
133. the master gyro is recovered the alarm will be generated If this alarm occurs set the gyro Gyro Set Alarm A I a r Alarm sound Conditions characters Set Gyro Beep sound pipi pipi The signals from the gyro are stopped but the gyro is recovered 5 43 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 1 Past Position Past POSN 1 Left click the past position display interval unit switching button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display and set a desired unit The past position display interval unit will be set to min or 2 Left click the past position display interval switching button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display and set a desired track display interval The past position will be set Off Tracks are not displayed Numeric Tracks are displayed at intervals of a specified value The past position function can display up to ten past positions of a target under tracking The past position Target information TT AIS VUE IR 6mir display interval can be set to Limit 15 4 10 specified time intervals of Past POSN R O5 NM 0 5 1 2 or 4 minutes or Past position Past position Past position true relative display interval display interval unit C Vr mm specified range i
134. the own ship s position is set to the center of the screen This function cannot be used when the range is 0 125NM Interference rejection IR mode switching The interference rejection mode is switched whenever this button 1 clicked IR Off gt IR Low Medde gt IR High IR Off 3 Target enhance ENH mode switching The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked ENH Off ENHLevell ENHLevel2 ENHLevel ENH Off 4 Radar video processing PROC mode switching The radar video processing mode is switched whenever this button is clicked PROC Off 3ScanCORREL 4ScanCORREL 55 CORREL gt Remain gt Peak Hold gt PROC Off Function FUNC mode switching The function mode is switched whenever this button is clicked FUNC Off gt Coast gt Deep Sea gt Rain gt Storm gt FUNC Off If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the function registration menu User Function Setting 1s opened and Gain Sea clutter suppression Sea Rain snow clutter suppression Rain Adjust the gain sea clutter suppression rain snow clutter suppression and tune using the track ball If the button is clicked on the adjustment value is shown at the upper right of the cursor Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by left clicking 2 19 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS an
135. the parameters of 6 Monitor Range and 7 Rx MON The radar system is equipped with an interswitch For adjusting the performance unit set the interswitch connection to straight i e No 1 scanner is connected to No 1 display unit as the Master Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tx Monitor Adjustment menu 1 Adjust Menu 4 TXRX Adjustment T SSR MON Setting 5 Monitor Sector 3 The button is operated so that Rx ATT Value may become the maximum PM Rx 22 5 displayed on the PPI screen moves to operate button 4 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Rx MON Adjustment menu 5 Adjust the Rx MON Adjustment value to 0 0 1 0dB by operating the button 6 Left click the ENT button Japan Radio Ltd 7 36 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT Adjust to 0 0d B 1 0d B Maximum SSR MON Setting Rx MON Adjustment Monitor Sector Rx ATT Value Rx ATT Value 2 Tx MON Adjustment 4 Rx MON Adjustment 5 Monitor Sector 6 Monitor Range 7 7 MON Gain CLR ENT EXIT 7 37 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU T 4 MAINTENANCE MENU This item 1s provided for equipment m
136. the pressed option key The menu set for the pressed option key will open G Subsequently general menu operation can be performed 3 8 7 3 Howto use the Optin key Zoom Display Preset whether to execute the Zoom display by operating the user key 1 Press either OPTION 1 key or OPTION 2 key for which Zoom has been set The zoom mode is activated 2 Put the cursor on a location that is to be zoomed and left click Zoom is set 1 Press either OPTION 1 key or OPTION 2 key for which Zoom has been set The zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear 3 8 8 Set Navigation Data Display Multi Window Setting By performing the following operation it 1s possible to display navigation data of the wind direction velocity water depth and the like as a graph on the radar display 1 Open the Multi Window Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main Japan Radio Ltd 3 106 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 4 Multi Window Setting The Multi Window Setting menu will appear Detailed settings of the display are possible by changing the settings of each item 3 8 8 1 DIR DIST EXP Display Determine whether to expand the value display of cursor EBL and VRM The value display is expanded in digital information area 2 When the cursor mark moves on the PPI the display of cursor information 1s
137. this radar system consists of eight frequently used function menus one main menu and one service man menu used for the installation settings Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed the menu area located at the bottom ten of the display For each menu item and structure see the menu list in the appendix To prevent incorrect use enter the special code to open the service man menu For operating the service man menu see Section 7 1 1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu Service Man Menu Frequently used functions TT Track AlS Route AZ U MAP Main menu Main Serviceman menu Used for operating and setting the target tracking function Used for operating and setting the other ship trails function Used for operating and setting the AIS display function Used for operating and setting the route function Used for operating and setting the parallel index line function Used for operating and setting the automatic acquisition activate function Used for operating and setting the user map function Used for operating and setting the functions This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is installed It is not used during normal operation The special code must be entered to open the service man menu 3 23 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERAT
138. values for Course by turning the EBL dial and for Speed by turning the VRM dial 4 Setother characteristics Vector Time Vector time 1 to 60 min Time to Maneuver Time until trial maneuvering is started 0 to 30 min Own Ship Dynamic Trait Dynamic trait of the own ship Reach Range from when steered to when the ship beings to turn 0 to 2000 m gt Turn Radius Turning radius 0 10 to 2 00 nm Acceleration Acceleration 0 0 to 100 knots min Decceleration Deceleration 0 0 to 100 knots min For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 2 Directly entering a numeric value Dangerous target symbols are displayed in red and safe target symbols in white Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on If it is off the vector time G before trial maneuvering is displayed Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering If 0 0 kn min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster than the current speed or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is slower than the current speed the system performs simulation on the assumption that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver 5 57 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA I
139. wind speed becomes high and the waves become large Table 6 2 reveals that detection probability decreases from V 80 95 to NV less than 50 as the number of SS increases Therefore even 1f the sea state 1s calm and a target clearly appears on the radar display when the sea state becomes rough target detection probability decreases resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar Table 6 3 Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant wave height Sea state Average wind Significant wave speed kn height m 0 lt 4 lt 0 2 1 5 7 0 6 2 7 11 0 9 3 12 16 1 2 4 17 19 2 0 5 20 25 3 0 6 26 33 4 0 i Significant wave height an average of top N 3 higher waves when the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N For example in the case of a standard marine buoy RCS of X band radar 1s 5 m2 as shown in Table 6 1 When observing such a target in the sea state SS3 in which significant wave height exceeds 1 2 meters detection probability is M NV as shown Table 6 2 which indicates 50 or less b Rain and snow clutter Rain and snow clutter 1s a video image that appears in a location where rain or snow is falling The image changes according to the amount of rain or the amount of snowfall As precipitation increases the image of rain and snow clutter becomes intensified on the radar display and in the case of localized heavy rain an image similar to the image in
140. 1 Noise Level Adjustment Noise Level 210 Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise level adjustment menu 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 1 Signal Processing 1 Echo Noise Level 3 Increase decrease the noise level adjustment value The noise level is factory set Initial value 140 After system installation a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be avoided it should be fine adjusted within 5 Japan Radio Ltd 7 30 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 7 3 1 2 Noise Level Adjustment Mode Setting Mode A noise level is factory adjusted while this mode 1s turned on 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise level adjustment menu 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 1 Signal Processing 2 Setting Mode The noise level adjustment mode is switched between on and off Factory adjustment method The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130 While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased the value with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set value The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is finished 7 3 2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function TT 7 3 2 1 Vector Constant Adjustment Vector C
141. 105 on the gyro interface circuit PC4201 must be set in accordance with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below The switches are factory set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before starting the procedure below 1 Set S5 to OFF The gyro compass and GYRO I F are cut off 2 Set S6 and S7 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass There are two types of gyro compasses one type outputs a step signal and the other type outputs a synchro signal Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before setting the switches S6 and S7 oynchro signal Set the switches to SYNC otep signal Set the switches to STEP 3 Set the DIP switch 1 in accordance with the type of the compass The items to be set are listed below For the settings refer to Table 7 1 Gyro and Log Select Switches S1 DIP Switch 51 1 Type of gyro signal step synchro 1 2 3 Gyration ratio of gyro compass 51 4 Gyration direction of gyro compass 51 5 Type of log signal pulse synchro 1 7 8 Ratio of log signal Japan Radio Ltd 72 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 4 Set the DIP switch 52 The items to be set are listed below For the setting refer to Table 7 2 Gyro and Log Select Switches S2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON O
142. 12 RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE E CIRCUIT CIRCUIT zm ON CDC 1362 PC420 5 T 0 PCA4O _ A gt 2P 34402 JA TERMINAL BOARD AC OUT2 2 sop 2 CQ D 2176 TO SENSOR i PC430 gt SCANNER MOTOR T E O ig MOTHERBOARD RED pu CQC 1230 PCAIO 1 00 NCD 9170T amp EZ M JMA 9172 SA Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD 9170T desktop C N Q w O O 9 Q ion Interconnect Fig B 2 JRC Japan Radio Ltd B 3 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit 1 3 NWZ 178 R CML 1799 H 7WSRD0002 x e means revision of the specification document LCD x M N gt 2 5 3 v C Of sf N N i H 7ZCRD1328 2 N E gt C gt E gt CN DO lt CN T OD CO 5 28 A gt mg O O O CML 790 R NWZ 178 R Monitor Unit Interconnection Fig B 3 Interconnection Diagram of NWZ 178 R Japan Radio Co Ltd B 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit B 1 4 7 178 CML 1799 H 7WSRDO002 x age means revision of the specification document LCD T 5 e M D Ta E C Of sl 9 N N
143. 137 4 1137 064 113 8 00kn SN A 9 00 10 0kn SS A N 12 0kn 001 005 Left click Planned speed M 113 8 00kn DNS 90D 10 0kn Calculated again Waypoints are renumbered 3 2 6 Inserting a Waypoint Insert Waypoint A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence Japan Radio Ltd 3 74 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 2 Left click the 6 Insert button The Waypoint inserting mode is selected 3 On the radar display put the cursor on the section line into which a Waypoint is to be inserted and left click The section is specified the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark and the cross cursor mark is connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a rubber band 4 On the radar display put the cursor the location at which Waypoint is to be inserted and left click The coordinates of the new Waypoint are specified and the new Waypoint is connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a line 5 insert another Waypoint repeat procedures and 4 6 To finish inserting a Waypoint left click the _ Insert button The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled Example Ru
144. 15 ZCRD157 X woe ZCRD15723X W302 ZCRD 1564 1111111 pum um REDT ZORD 583 Le 5 Seto AN g J1902 u u w203 Pe ba ae en ee ae 4999 lt Lo ME v v 1 528 22 88522805 2548 PH 2 furs dou 55511152 11111111 prigo po d 3 BP VH BP SHF dde wot 8 BO3P VL CI 20801574 HEATER CONTROL PART NN 8 wio PC1101 CHG 215 ZORDA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT o PTION CBb 1798 uo om e 59 72 1 L means specification document No B02P VL Bios s m 8 1 RADAR PROCESS UNT BORERCEU HECYINEE a BOWER SUPPLY UNT means revision of the specfication document FG INTERCONNECTION CMP 482 NBD 890 SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION CAX 16 w305 ZCRD 1586 2 22 CFA 1255 BREAK CIRCUIT RD 0035 10514 wem s MOTOR CBP 1205 B101 MOTOR H 7BDRD0049 det NKE 1532 AC110V 5250 SSR 2unit SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION Ze rh git A Hielo E Interconnection Diagram of NKE 1532 AC110V Fig B 11 B 14 JRC Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Uni NKE 1532 AC220V B 6 2 RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS UNIT UNIT
145. 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Upper left of the display D Range scale switching o 2 Range rings display 7 Transmission pulse lengt On Off 12 Tuning OK switching MP1 Motion mode true relative Rings 2NM switching RMT N Up GND 4 Off center switching Off Center Transmit 5 Transmission Standby x y switching S Band al Azimuth display mode ANT 3 an switching 6 Interswitch connection Master Aa change D Range scale switching To increase the observation range scale maximum 96NM click and to reduce the range minimum 0 125NM click 2 Range rings display On Off The display of range rings are set to On Off whenever this button is clicked When the display is set to On the interval of the fixed range marker 15 displayed 3 Motion mode true relative switching The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is clicked true motion gt relative motion gt RM R indicates that the radar trails is a relative trail RM T indicates that the radar trails is a true trail 4 Off center switching If this button is clicked the cursor is moved and left clicked the ship s position can be moved to the cursor position The moving range is within 66 of the radius If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the off center is set to Off and the ship s posit
146. 1s used to display data Japan Radio Ltd 3 110 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS When the course bar graph is displayed the sizes of the target tracking TT AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased e eft click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display The course bar display function is switched between On and Off Off he course bar graph is not displayed Areal The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 1 Area2 The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 2 2 Autopilot Course Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to display AP course Course to Steer Heading to Steer to Destination From Origin Bearing Origin to Destination From CURR POSN Bearing Present Postion to Destination 3 ROT Scale Set the maximum scale for the TURN Rate graph 30 0 30 The scale is set at 30 min 60 0 60 The scale is set at 60 min 90 0 90 The scale is set at 90 min 120 0 120 The scale is set at 120 min 150 0 150 The scale is set at 150 min 300 0 300 The scale is set at 300 min 3 8 9 AUTO Backup Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot 3 111 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION
147. 2 1l e qc N in N Terminal board J4308 ISW Fig B 18 Interconnection Diagram of NQE 3141 2A B 23 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 9 Inter Switch Unit LOcvaL LOcva L 00 41 066 7 GON 0667 CON 066v QON 14610 CAV Id SIO LAW OL OL OL 606 606d EL ces ce cP a a n S1dNv4 o6 ANY 3NVJ 9 LA ANV 4 O NC ST p Nr s Lu O Z x3 oo z aniaaz 406 G06d 5 1068 81691 1691 9691 9691 691 1691 216 91 116 8L E bp d HO 2 st APTE N ME a iul G gl E AOvZ A001 OV gt LHL 9 10631 c G O 9 705 199 ov C C 5 06 06d 1560 QHOZL H Tr D C X KO LL C 2 lt 10631 G os 90 qvo1 6160QH OZL H 61 1064 10699 coer 06 02600457 206d 16 80 JRC Japan Radio Co Ltd Appendix C Menu Index es oot as me em mm rm ge ee ee rat tS SSS ESSE SES SSE SEE SEE LESSEE ESE SS SE SSS EE CESS SEES SSE LES ES SEES TERE SESH EZZZ22 00000000 C 8 C 12 Japa
148. 2 7 Input Installation Information 7 19 7 2 8 Setting the Alarm System 2 14 4 2111 1 7 19 7 2 9 Network Setting Network 1111111 7 24 7 2 10 EAN Port 2 7 27 7 3 ADJUSTNIENT uud UE 7 30 7 3 1 Noise Level Adjustment Noise Level 7 30 7 3 2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function TT 7 31 7 3 3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment MBS 7 33 7 3 4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor SSR MON 7 35 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENDJD 3 9 9 0 0 3 eoque quc oer e Eo res guess 7 38 7 4 1 Antenna Safety Switch Safety Switch 7 38 7 4 2 Initialization of Memory Area Area Initial 7 39 7 4 3 Save of Internal Memory Data 1 2 7 40 7 4 4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time TXRX Time 7 41 7 4 5 Update of Character String Data String Data Update 7 43 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7 1 SETTINGS AI INSTALLATION This section describes the electrical adjustment procedure
149. 2 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 1 4 Transmission Port Setting TX Port For each sentence set a communication port through which signals are transmitted to sensors Procedures 1 2 3 4 Open the Serviceman Menu Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TX Port setting menu 2 Installation Menu 5 COM Port Setting 4 TX Port Select the communication port through which the sentence to be set is output Settable sentences TTM TT TLL TT TTD TT TLB TT OSD RSD ALR ACK TTM AIS TLL AIS TTD AIS TLB AIS RemoteMaintenance JRC ARPA APB BOD GGA GLL RMC RMB XTE BWC HDT THS Selectable ports MAINTENANCE 1 2 ALARM JARPA ARPA COM Select the output format talker and transmission interval Signals for which the above items can be set ltem Name Option NMEAO0183 APB BOD GGA V1 5 Output Format GLL RMC RMB V2 0 VTG XTE BWC HDT V2 3 0183 APB BOD RMB STANDARD The talker is ll Talker XTE BWC The talker is GP THS NMEA0183 TX APB BOD GGA Setan interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds Interval GLL RMC RMB VTG XTE BWC HDT THS i The bold values are factory set ii For TTM TLL OSD RSD and ALR the talker is always RA For GGA GLL RMC and VTG the talker is always GP Japan Radio Ltd 7 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Ma
150. 20 target X 500 points Mark Line 20000 points maximum WPT 512 points maximum Route 1 route maximum These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file The internal capacity 1s as large as only a file An internally created file can be saved until the flash memory card is full 3 11 1 Operate File on the Card File Manager Procedures 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Set the radar the standby state While the radar is in the transmission state the File Manager screen cannot be opened 3 Open the File Manager window by performing the menu operation below Main 2 File Manager Japan Radio Ltd 3 122 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD The File Manager window will appear Copy file from Device 1 selected device 1 to device 2 Device 2 format Device 2 Type of file selected displayed File Device 1 1 File Type Device 2 device type 2 Devicei Internal 3 Device2 device type Device 1 format Format CF 2682 1 JRC JRC 2676 1TGT Own Track Target Track Own Track Target Track Mark Line WPT Route gt Copy 0 Device 2 file list Device 1 saved lt scroll information Select Al All Erase Select All Cancel All Erase 4 Device 1 E Memory Content Device 1 saved select and Own Track No Cbiect Remain can
151. 21 B 23 B 9 2 Interconnection Diagram 22222 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit _ 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit NCD 9170 B 1 1 MONITOR UNIT NWZ 178 R LCD PANEL H WSRDOOO27 x means revision of the specification document 8P H 7ZCRD1328 9P 2m H 7ZCRD1329A NWZ 178 R e nm m o NS x OPTION USER SUPPLY PS 2 MOUSE TRKBALL USER SUPPLY USER SUPPLY PS 2 EXTENSION CABLE RADAR PROCESS UNIT NDC 1478 AC 2m VM0301 VM0303B2M NWZ 178 R DVI 2m H 7ZCRD1345 NWZ 178 R POWER SUPPLY CBD 1861 AC100 115V 50 60Hz AC220 240V 50 60Hz RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1362 PC440 64P 64P 34402 CQC 1230 PC410 MOTHERBOARD AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1363 64P 4601 460 ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1364 450 GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CM J 523 420 OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 R CIRCUIT B CCK 1006 PC620 6P 26411 16408 26406 26405 16404 OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK 1007 0 640 6P CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 PC610 15P J6102 14P 15P 26403 16402
152. 250VO 5 circuit Interface circuit Japan Radio Ltd 9 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits it is necessary to request a specialist engineer for repair or instructions for remedy 1f any circuit is defective There are also troubles by the following causes which should be referred to in checking or repair work Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter Unit Cables Poor contact in terminal board The cable end is not fully connected that it contacted with earthed another terminal Disconnected cable wire Poor Contact of Connector within Unit This radar equipment is provided with Table 9 10 standard G spares Table9 10 7ZXRDOO25 Type Code Shape mm In Spare Parts Location MF60NR250V0 5 12 F1 F4 GYRO Interface Circuit 5ZFGDO00006 CMJ 462E ST6 10AN1 1 3 F501 AC DC Converter 5ZFCA00053 NBA 5135 9 7 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 2 1 Location Circuit Block to be Repaired Table9 11 Circuit Block to be Repaired JMA 9172 SA Circuit Block Remarks SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER
153. 3 JRC SUPPLY e rs a He GL Ct C WESS d FEIER i i i i i i Ii i lie Ilelelelelele CHEQUE JR om d e co sr oo o o co sr e 2695111153 JRC SUPPLY BZIN E MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1E PWRIN 1 PWRIN 1E PW ROUT 1 PWROUT 1E VD OUT 1 VDOUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 TRIGOUT 1E BPOUT 1 BPOUT 1E BZOUT 1 BZOUT 1E MTROUT 1 MTROUT 1 MTORUT 1E CH 3 DISPLAY 3 NCD 4990 TB4 201 NKE 31 41 4A CQL 304R VDIN 1E MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1E PWRIN 1 PWRIN 1E PWROUT 1 PWROUT 1E VDOUT 1 VDOUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 TRIGOUT 1E BPOUT 1 BPOUT 1E BZOUT 1 BZOUT 1E MTROUT 1 MTROUT 1 MTORUT 1E TB914 CH 2 un DISPLAY2 NCD 4990 4201 913 N 1E MTRIN 1E PWRIN 1 PWR PWROUT 1 PW ROUT 1E VD OUT 1 VDOUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 TRIGOUT 1E BPOUT 1 BPOUT 1 BZOUT 1 BZOUT 1E MTROUT 1 MTROUT 1 MTORUT 1E TB912 VDIN 1 VDIN 1E TRIGIN 1 TRIGIN 1E BPIN 1 BPIN 1E BZIN 1E MTRIN 1 CH DISPLAY1 N CD 9170 TB4201 TB911 Fig B 17 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of NQE 3141 4A Japan Radio Co Ltd B 22 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 9 Inter Switch Unit B 9 2 Interconnection Diagram H 7ZCRD0970A A Sc ER 970 UM NY H 7ZCRD0970A o 5 4 DTE 70 NY H 7ZCRD097
154. 3 1 Keeping period of maintenance parts 9 9 9 3 2 When you Request for Repair 9 9 9 3 3 Recommended Maintenance 9 9 SECTION 10 DISPOSAL 10 1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNT 10 1 10 2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES 10 1 10 3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS 2 0101 1 10 2 Japan Radio Co Ltd SECTION 11 SPECIFICATION 114 JMA 9172 SA TYPE 2 2 2 1 11 1 11 2 SCANNER UNIT 1532 2 2 2111121 1 11 2 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NGD 9170 2 oen eode iunc ena cipe eru uisa 11 3 11 4 Target Tracking Function aM va 11 6 11 5 AIS FUNC HON 11 7 Appendix A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit A 1 Re A 1 ATT OVerVieW ero A 1 A 1 2 Interswitch Setup oin ieu A 1 A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION t oese A 3 A1 FIOW a Eater 3 A22 INGER Switch A 4 A 2 3 Change of Connection Pattern with 2 Display Units A 6 A 2 4 Change of Connec
155. 3 5 9 on page 3 47 1 Current Size 2 Layer A 3 Layer B 4 Layer C l Qo E Japan Radio Ltd 5210 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 7 Route 7 Route 7 Select Route ee ee toy e section 3 7 1 on page 3 68 1 12 WPT Route Settig 1 WaypointAlam section 3 7 4 1 on page 3 80 2 Reute Alarms section 3 7 4 2 on page 3 81 3 SetRoute Sequence section 3 7 2 on page 3 69 H 6 WaypointlInput section 3 7 3 on page 3 76 7 Save Temporary Route H 8 Cross Track Limit Lines 26 5 see ee ee RE section 3 7 6 1 on page 3 84 1 19 Next 1 SEL NUM Comment Size section 3 7 6 2 on page 3 85 2 Waypoint Vector section 3 7 6 3 on page 3 85 3 Status of OriginDEST section 3 7 6 4 on page 3 86 4 WPT Number Display section 3 7 6 5 on page 3 86 6 Route Information Display section 3 7 6 6 on page 3 87 L 7 Draw AZI Mode section 3 7 6 7 on page 3 87 93 WPT Route Operations section 3 7 5 on page 3 82 H 1 Route Sequence section 3 7 5 1 on page 3 82 2 Waypoint Switch Mode
156. 3 minutes or more to reach the specified speed after the speed course change or the setting Even after 3 minutes or more has passed the speed may differ from the specified speed depending on the tracking condition Ifa large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference target the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident Ifa sailing ship is set as a reference target the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident Ifthe REF is selected for the speed sensor the AIS function cannot be turned on If the reference target is lost the target tracking function is stopped the speed sensor is placed in manual mode MAN The loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the accuracy of the results for true speed and true course of the target and that own speed will be degraded The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed Procedures 1 Tracking a target for which ground fixed 2 Put the cursor on the tracked target and right click The cursor mode list will appear 5 21 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 3 Left click 8 property The Property will appear 4 Left click the item button of 3 nererence The re
157. 4 1 on page 5 38 Association Proprity Bearing Range Course Speed Applicable AIS Target Track Setting section 5 6 2 on page 5 45 Target Track Function section 5 6 2 2 on page 5 45 Target Track Color section 5 6 2 1 on page 5 45 1 All Target Track No 1 Target Track No 2 Target Track No 3 Target Track No 4 Target Track No 5 Target Track No 6 Target Track No 7 Next Target Track No 8 Target Track No 9 Target Track No 10 Other Track Display section 5 6 2 4 on page 5 47 All Target Track No 1 Target Track No 2 Target Track No 3 Target Track No 4 Target Track No 5 Target Track No 6 Target Track No 7 Next Target Track No 8 Target Track No 9 Target Track No 10 Other Track Memory Interval section 5 6 2 5 on page 5 48 Clear Track Color section 5 6 2 6 on page 5 48 Clear Track Number File Operations section 5 6 2 7 on page 5 49 1 Select Card Slot 2 Load Mode 3 Load page 5 50 4 5 SS n H L NOOR WD rm 1 12 Targe espe vb e ele ee alt ahs is al ile ah KRONA OANA O1 e s 3 ge Iq dr uu RWNA OCANDAOARWHD lt Save
158. 45 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 8 Use Water Temperature Track Water TEMP Track Set the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own ship s track by performing the operation below Procedures 1 Open the Water TEMP Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Track 7 Water TEMP Setting The Water TEMP Setting menu will appear Enter a value of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below to set up the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own ship s track Water temperature Color of track value White 1 xx x C Min Gray 2 Blue 3 C Green 4 xx x Yellow 5 C Pink 6 Max Red For example if 10 0 C is entered for 1 13 0 C is entered for 2 and 15 0 is entered for 3 the area with a water temperature of less than 10 0 C is indicated by white tracks the area with a water depth of 10 0 to 13 0 C is indicated by gray tracks and the area with a water depth of 13 0 C to 15 0 C is indicated by blue tracks Japan Radio Ltd 3 46 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 9 Use Tidal Current Track Current Vector Track Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship s track by perform
159. 5 4 3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set Decision conditions 1 Association On Off Function to decide targets as identical 2 Priority AIS TT Symbol to be displayed 3 Bearing 0 0 9 9 4 Range 999m 5 Cource 0 99 6 Speed 0 99kn 7 Applicable AIS Target ACT or ACT amp Sleep activated AIS target or all AIS target AN CAUTION If a great value is set as a condition for deciding targets as identical a tracking target near an AIS target 69 is regarded as identical to the AIS target and it may not be displayed any more For example when a pilot boat which is a small target not being tracked equipped with an AIS function approaches a cargo ship as a tracking target not equipped with an AIS function the tracking target symbol of the cargo ship may not be displayed any more 5 39 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY 9 9 ALARM DISPLAY Critical alarm messages for Target Tracking TT and AIS functions Error message CPA TCPA Description There is a dangerous target See also Section 5 5 1 Alarm messages for Target Tracking TT and AIS functions Error message CPA TCPA New Target Lost REF Target 95 Capacity MAX Target AIS 95 Capacity AIS MAX Target AIS ACT 95 Capacity AlS ACT MAX AIS Alarm AIS Alarm 001 AIS Alarm 002 AIS Al
160. 62 PC440 64P 64P 34402 INTERSWITCH UNIT a AC OUT2 2P TO SUB OPU 30P 14312 4101 ISW 26 4201 TERMINAL BOARD to SC 148V INNER UNIT SCANNER MOTOR POWER gt 8 O acon 5 CQD 2176 TO SENSOR igo 20P W401 H 7ZCRD1339 P INPUT VOLTAGE ane PC430 SELECT SWITCH H 7ZCRD AC100 115V oO AC220 240V MOTHERBOARD 22208 50 60 2 1 e ue W403 H 7ZCRD 34108 1 2V 1 2 1 220 50 TO LOG 34107 12P 3 3V 5V 12V 12V 410 153 01 48V DC 24V 3 3V 9V 12V 12V Jobe 48V DC 24V RED 4351A07335 FILTER O wyour IN 100 115 50 60Hz v UNE 220 240 50 60Hz a NCD 9170 T BRAKE Power Supply system diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD 9170 T Power System Diagram of NCD 9170 T Fig B 7 JRC Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS B 3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit B 3 MONITOR UNIT NWZ 178 R RT LCD PANEL CML 1799 9 NI t e o EE 88 OQ S5 LCD 8P H 7ZCRD1328 9P 2m H 7ZCRD1329A NWZ 178 R 9P 5m H 7ZCRD1330A NWZ 178 RT OPERATION UNIT USER SUPPLY NCE 5322 R RT PS 2 MOUSE TRKBALL USER SUPPLY RADAR PROCESS UNIT NDC 1478 lt DVI 5m H 7Z
161. 7 4 4 1 on page 7 41 2 Motor Time section 7 4 4 2 page 7 41 3 TXRXtoDisplay Unit section 7 4 4 3 on page 7 42 L 4 Display Unit to TXRX section 7 4 4 4 on page 7 42 L 6 String Data Update section 7 4 5 on page 7 43 1 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 1 Signal Processing section 7 3 1 on page 7 30 1 Noise Level section 7 3 1 1 on page 7 30 L 2 Setting Mode section 7 3 1 2 on page 7 31 nie a del quc ee et e od a a section 7 3 2 on page 7 31 1 Vector Constant section 7 3 2 1 7 31 2 Video TD Level section 7 3 2 2 on page 7 32 3 Video High Level 4 Video Low Level 5 Gate Size L 6 Limit Ring LES MBS Sle eS ee See eed es Ese sce section 7 3 3 on page 7 33 EO MBS Level 3466 ecce eo ee be ee ee e section 7 3 3 1 on page 7 33 c 2 ee M RS ue section 7 3 3 2 on page 7 34 1 Only for ISW Extended Mode Japan Radio Ltd C 16 For further information contact Japan Radio Co Lid Not use the asbestos Since 1915 URL http www jrc co jp Marine Service Department Telephone 81 3 3492 1 305 Facsimile 81 3 3 79 1420 e mail tmscQGirc co
162. AIN dials of the radar so that the target to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability accuracy of automatic tracking This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions and the initial setting for using each function Target Tracking Function The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by automatically tracking the target s move The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using the automatic acquisition zone function The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function 5 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION If the mode is ground stabilization SOG COG used for own ship s information in target tracking If the mode 15 sea stabilization SPD speed through the water HDG heading used for own ship s information in target tracking AIS Automatic Identification System function The AIS function shows the target s information on the radar display using other ship s information sent out from the AIS unit 5 1 1 Collision Avoidance 5 1 1 1 Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation Marine collision avoidance 1s one of the problems that have been recognized
163. ASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 5 2 Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter 1s possible Use this mode when the sea clutter s intensity differs according to directional orientation 1 Press the SEA dial Alternatively Left click the Sea MAN button located at the lower left of the display The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected and Sea AUTO 1s displayed in the lower left of the radar display 2 Make adjustments by turning the SEA dial Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected turning the SEA dial can make fine adjustments manually When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected NOTE the automatic rain snow suppression mode is switched to the manual mode To select both the sea clutter suppression function and the rain snow suppression function in the automatic mode use the automatic rain snow suppression mode Press the SEA dial Alternatively Left click the Sea AUTO button located at the lower left of the display The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled and Sea MAN is displayed in the lower left of the radar display Japan Radio Ltd 3 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 6 Suppress Rain Snow Clutter RAIN AN CAUTION When using the rain clutter suppression fun
164. Antenna installation location Section 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP Setting Sector Blank Section 7 2 2 Sector Blank Setting Sector Blank Performance monitor Section 7 3 4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor adjustment SSR MON PRF Fine Tuning Section 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting A 1 2 Interswitch Setup Connection modes can be changed simply by changing the interswitch connection upper left of the display A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a slave G connection Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state the master display unit must be placed in transmission state A 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 1 OVERVIEW upper left of the display 6 T MP1 Rings 1 Up Sea Off Center T Connected Transmit 320 X Band m Unit ANT 3 EN Connection Connection Switch Master j Mode The upper stand indicates the number of the connected scanner unit The lower stand indicates the connection mode Master Mode in which the scanner unit can be controlled by the display unit Slave Mode in which the scanner unit cannot be controlled i When Slave is selected transmission standby and pulse length cannot be changed The available range is also limited Japan Radio Ltd Ac JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH O
165. Auro gt par ACTAIS gt gt Data gt E Property Mark font line pattern switching This function switches a mark font line pattern If this button 1s clicked while the cursor changed Japan Radio Ltd 2 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 3 Mark color line color switching This function switches a mark color line color If this button is clicked while the cursor mode 15 mark line the mark color line color is changed 4 Cursor bearing numeric value display true relative switching The bearing numeric value display T true bearing Ri relative bearing of the cursor 15 switched whenever this button is clicked 5 6 and EBL1 2 and VRM1 2 adjustment These functions set EBLI VRMI EBL2 and VRM2 displays to On Off and acquire the operation right If the button is clicked on the operation right is acquired Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by left clicking and EBL1 EBL2 numeric value true relative switching The 2 bearing numeric value display T true bearing relative bearing is switched whenever the button is clicked If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the EBL Cursor Setting menu is displayed 4 and 42 EBL 1 EBL2 sta
166. C 8 U Map 4 Blue 5 Green 6 Yellow 7 Pink 8 Red H 3 Select Mark Size de section 3 6 2 3 on page 3 52 L 4 Comment Font Size section 3 6 2 4 on page 3 53 6 Geo0deli RR E RUE m a E section 3 6 6 on page 3 66 H7 FileOperations section 3 6 5 on page 3 62 1 Select Card Slot EF 2 Load 52464 2s os eh oa c mee section 3 6 5 1 on page 3 62 3 Egad oe io dita d eth ete P die dede section 3 6 5 1 on page 3 62 4 Unload die we eat d io e de section 3 6 5 2 on page 3 63 Be SAVE Sa see eS rl section 3 6 5 3 on page 3 63 HERONEZII OLOR See GS cares See ee section 3 6 5 4 on page 3 64 L 7 Card Mark Display section 3 6 5 5 on page 3 65 C 13 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 9 Serviceman Menu C9 Serviceman Menu EServiceman Menu IR n d m eee section 7 1 1 on page 7 1 I I21 Adjust Menu 2 Bearing Adjustment section 7 1 4 page 7 5 F 3 Adjustment section 7 1 5 page 7 5 4 TXRX Adjustment 1 Antenna Height _ 6 Output Pulse
167. CRD1346 NWZ 178 RT A AC 2m VM0301 VM0303B2M NWZ 178 R AC 5m VM0301 VM0303B5M NWZ 178 RT Radar video Trigger Rotation POWER SUPPLY CBD 1861 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Uni RED WHT 22 AC100 115V 50 60Hz AC220 240V 50 60Hz RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1362 PCAAQSerial GPIO MOTHERBOARD CQC 1230 PC410 AIS PROCESS ARPA PROCESS PS 2 Ae PS 2 EXTENSION USER SUPPLY Power SW KEY matrix Encoder OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK 1006 OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 PC610 PC620 1722 Audio 15P J6102 7P 14 14 15 26406 26405 2164044 6403 16402 26408 OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK 1007 6P 6P 30P 40 60 7640 26401 2m H 7ZCRD1337 NCE 5163 R self 5127 5m H 7ZCRD1338 NCE 5322 RT desktop JRC SUPPLY GYRO INTERFACE OPTION B101 INTERSWITCH UNIT Tyger Rotation Power supply Control LCD Fan Alarm 2 Serial 9 TERMIIALBDARD EQD 2176 430 Radar video Trigger R e 55 Serial otation Radar video Radar video Trigger Rot GYRO STEP S esoo 810 4 c oon 4 PULSE S TB4701 lu Serial Power supply Fan
168. Direct contact with these high voltage components may cause electrocution For maintenance inspection or adjustment of equipment components consult with our branch office branch shop sales office or our distributor in your district To contact our sales department branch offices branch shops and sales offices Please refer to the Office List at the end of the document is a rotating part and it may cause injuries if it suddenly starts rotating and consequently hits the body It is recommended that the radiant section be installed at a high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse on the flying bridge on the trestle or on the radar mast so that no one can get close to it When any work must be done on the scanner make sure to turn the safety switch off S Do not get close to the radiant section of the scanner It Japan Radio Ltd viii AN WARNING Microwave radiation level S Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting The high level of microwave is radiated from the front face of the scanner specified below The microwave exposure at close range could result in injuries especially of the eyes Microwave radiation level System 10 W m Make sure to install the scanner at a place higher than human height Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects o
169. Display will be set to on or off 5 3 5 Display of Targets outside AIS Filter Filter Mode 1 Open the Filter Mode menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 4 AIS Filter Setting 2 Left click the item button of _6 Filter Mode Display Displays only AIS targets the AIS filter Priority Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority and also displays targets outside the AIS filter Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are G outside the AIS filter 5 35 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 3 7 6 Point Filter AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set and right click to select the filter to be set 2 setting items for cursor modes will be displayed Left click 2 AIS A point filter will be set at the cursor position If an AIS target is in the point filter it will be activated When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute the point filter will be cleared G The point filter s range is 1 nm and cannot be changed 5 3 8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost About a lost target When the data of an AIS target c
170. E key will increase the observation range enabling the wider area to be observed Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed However a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases Therefore when observing the vicinity of own ship use the smaller observation range 2 Pressing the RANGE key will decrease the observation range reducing the area that can be observed Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged However caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation range cannot be displayed Japan Radio Ltd 3 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 3 Tune JMA 9172 SA radar is fully automatic There is no adjusted necessary for a tuning function It is displayed on the left of the screen Tuning OK Tuning OK 12 Rings 2NM RMT N Up GND Off Center Transmit S Band AMT 3 Master 3 7 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 24 Adjust Gain GAIN AN CAUTION If the gain is too high unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase resulting in reduction of visibility of targets On the contrary if the gain is too low targets including ships and dangerous objects may not be clearly indicated
171. E 2 RADAR Trails Setting The RADAR Trails Setting menu will appear Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each menu item After the settings for radar trails processing are changed NOTE targets trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with unwanted waves Thus do not make a significant change in the settings 3 8 2 1 Trails Mode Set the radar trail display mode For details on the trail mode see Section 3 4 8 Display Radar Trails Trails 3 8 2 2 Trails Reference Level e Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails e The radar video threshold level increases in order of Level Level gt LeveB Level4 e To plot radar trails with unwanted waves change to a higher level e To thin radar trails change to a higher level e If radar trails are plotted in snatches change to a lower level 3 97 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 2 3 3 8 2 4 3 8 2 5 Trails Reduction Make a setting for thinning radar trails e The effect of thinning increases in order of Levell Leve Level3 Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails Off Disables the Trails Reduction function Levell Enables the Trails Reduction function Effect Low Level2 Enables the Trails Reduction function Effect Modest Level
172. E D upon B 12 B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit B 13 61 NKE 1532 AC 110 B 14 B 6 2 NKE 1532 AG22UW B 15 B 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram B 16 B71 JMA 9T472 SK 17 B 2 diede ise secu B 18 B 8 19 B 9 mter dice m B 21 B 9 1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram B 21 B 9 2 Interconnection Diagram B 23 Appendix C Menu Index C 1 Mil M N C 1 C 2 RTI E C 5 EE EE C 7 4 AIS ui E 8 5 va S C 9 C 6 AR C 10 C 7 ge C 11 C 8 12 9 Serviceman Menu C 14 Japan Radio Co Ltd Japan Radio Co Ltd NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL DISPOSAL D DAN O Ci MN Appendix GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS BASIC OPERATION MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY SEITINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SA
173. ERIES Call Sign MMSI CD Detail simple display switching 2 Unread message display 12701 712 E Destination JAPAN RADIO CO LTD NAY Status Under Way Using Ensinet0 gt D Detail simple display switching This function switches the display mode to detail simple display when AIS target information is displayed 2 Unread message display When there is an unread message from the AIS target that is displayed the message 15 displayed If this button is clicked the message is displayed Japan Radio Ltd 2 26 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Numeric information Tracked target information TT ID 2 1 V BRG 2479 1571 Range 3 97 5 98 Course 3370 3273 Speed 19 0 319 kn D Tracked target CPA 227 120NM numeric value indication TCPA 1755 1843min Sero BCR 227 NM BCT 172 min TT ID Tracked target numeric value indication scroll This function scrolls the target numbers that are indicated in the tracked target information Numeric information Navigation information Navigation INFO Depth 136 2 23 6 Current 213 2 24 D Wind direction speed Wind 7292 numeric value indication true relative switching T mis DEST 0877 95 6 NM 363 2 Wind direction speed numeric value indication true relative switching The wind direction sp
174. FF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 Confirm the settings of the DIP switch 10 The DIP switch must be set as shown below Do not change any of the settings re OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 6 Set the jumper TB105 The TB105 is set for using a low voltage step signal 1 2 connected Setting for normal use 2 3 connected Setting for a step signal of 22 V or less 7 Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal block 8 Set S5 to ON The gyro compass and GYRO I F are connected 9 After power on operation make sure of the radar video and the operation with the true bearing value See the Section 7 1 7 Setting of True Bearing Value 10 If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed change the setting of the switch 1 4 7 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION Table 7 1 Gyro and Log Select Switches 51 DIP Switch ON DIRECTION LM NOR OFF ne pou e GYRO SIG 100P 1000 30X 0 000 30X NM LOG SIG Table 7 2 Gyro and Log Select Switches 52 DIP Switch 52 SETTING TABLE LOG ALARM OFF GYRO et OFF LOG SIMULATOR ae C M GYRO ALARM TIME HEADING SENSOR SOURCE GYRO SIGNAL SIGNAL NMEA BAUDRATE SETTING a 9 um LLI x LLI I O Japan Radio Ltd 7 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction
175. HILEAN 1963 South Chile 41 PUERTO RICO Puerto Rico amp Virgin Islands 42 QORNOQ South Greenland 43 RT90 Sweden 44 SANTA BRAZ San Miguel island amp Santa Maria islands 45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 South America 46 SOUTHWEST BASE Faial amp Sao Jorge amp Pico amp Graciosa amp Terceira island 47 TIMBALAI 1948 Brunei amp East Malaysia 48 No Use 49 No Use 3 67 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 USE ROUTE FUNCTION In this radar system a destination mark set by navigation equipment can be displayed and a simple route can be created displayed loaded and saved To use this function navigation equipment must be connected to this system Map button to turn off the Map function Otherwise press the G If radar video is poor visibility caused by route function click the DATA OFF key to map displays temporarily off NOTE The user map function is available between latitudes of 85 N and 85 S 3 7 1 Display Route Destination Mark Select Route In this radar system the following route and destination marks can be displayed Route Route created in the radar system ECDIS and GPS are displayed Destination mark Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are displayed 1 Left click the Route button located at the lower right of the radar display The Route Menu will a
176. I O 2892 iL 2 MBK 1 3 NC J1201 OPNS J1212 P1212 P1912 21912 4 0 GND MOT OR B4P VH A 1 480700 0 306 5 MPS n ZCRD1587 219 ANEA RELAY FILTERCIRCUIT P1903 wan avi CSCI 656 aD ZCRD 166 m ZORD 1632X 3 aie Nc 201 Sua ZCRD 1316 1 PHZ P1511 7 12214 2 DGND J2216 J22 R G 6P IL G 3P IL G 3P J1202 202 SAFETY SWITCH J2201 1 IL G 2P B8P VH B8P SHF gz po 4PHB RED 50 1656 ae lt lt E eos ao amp 1 c 889929992 15552998 8 592 822 GBD 2010 9 5 8888 1 25855 2556028 Lae BUR MOTOR DRIVER l ia 253264441 TO Ya Luo Qu 227 m pie PC 501 RED U B201 1 P2202 o RED FAN p60 U lo 16 for MOTOR DRIVER cb woo 017 ZCRD 156 Co wos 20801573 20801565 015 ZCRD 1571 0016 26801572 ce 3 ZCRD 1564 1111111 pum um REDT ZORD 583 Le 5 Seto AN J1902 w203 e fe LL TRIO Js lt lt y 26801580 v v wow Olua 2996508656060 58552255 ae Ve do 225523323 34229588 255 2 41102 5m eet lo arc Ir m BO3P VL CI 20801574 w401 HEATE
177. INGS gt B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit B 13 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Uni NKE 1532 AC110V B 6 1 RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS UNIT UNIT NDC 1493 INTERCONNECTION CMC 1359 J2607 J3401 8830E 100 170S F XG4C 1431 J2604 PC2601 8830 100 1705 RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT J2606 CDC 1349 W101 PC3401 1 2 540 SA 3402 INPUT OUTPUT CIRCUIT 396 1 2 5VA 1266 42601 24NVA B 10P VH 5 amp 8820 050 1705 go oe o 5 ZC RD 1561 LIND lt lt 956289 2 US SMA type connector 58522282264 ag 2525222458 J2002 es apap a 2 tas eB 5H 996 E sb sb jj gid mate oon ORE for RADAR PROCESS UNIT E z o u u P2601 woot 1 ANTENNA ROTARY JOINT J3901 TRANS DUC ER 9 P3901 N type connector w013 4 ME PL ZCRD1 569 wen wow 1 07 ZCRD 1608 Z ORD 1559 X ZCRD1 560 B107 P2208 22203 for RADAR PROCESS UNIT e no il
178. ION 5 1 PREPARATION Attention e There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target tracking functions I Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target tracking Depending on the particular distance and echo size resolution between adjacent targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0 03 to 0 05 NM If multiple targets approach each other resolution will become about 0 05 NM and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or moves very close to land Il Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship and thus the target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession If a lost target exists therefore radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target If however radar gain is increased too significantly sea clutter returns or other noise may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target and resultingly a false alarm may be issued II Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking To execute accurate tracking it becomes necessary first to appropriately adjust the GAIN SEA and R
179. ION 3 4 1 Interference Rejection IR Interference by other radars is rejected 1 Left click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar display The interference rejection modes are switched IR Off gt IRLow IRMedde gt gt IR High gt IR Off Po Rejection levels of the interference rejector IR Off Interference rejector off Stagger trigger off IR Low Interference rejection level low Stagger trigger off IR Middle Interference rejection level moderate Stagger trigger on IR High Interference rejection level high Stagger trigger on When a high interference rejection level is selected the radar s ability of detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers In general _ IRLow should be selected Interference rejector switch link with stagger trigger switch automatically When a high interference rejection level is selected the radar s ability of detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers In general IR Low should be selected Japan Radio Ltd 3 24 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length GAIN 1 Press GAIN dial Values of the transmitter pulse width are switched 1 2 1 2 Peo Effects of transmitter pulse width With selected The transmitter pulse becomes shorter and the range resolution improves effe
180. ION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL Association 5 4 1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical Association When an AIS target and a tracking target are decided to be identical an association symbol is displayed for the targets regarded as identical In this case the AIS target symbol is automatically activated Attention Turn off Association in order not to make a decision on if targets are identical or in order to display symbols that have disappeared 1 Left click the Association in Target Information located at the upper right of the display Association will be set to on or off 5 4 2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical Association Setting Procedures 1 Open the Association Setting menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 1 Association Setting The Association Setting menu will appear 2 Select and enter the item to be set Conditions for deciding targets as identical will be set When the differences of all item between AIS and tracked target are under the set conditions Japan Radio Ltd 5 38 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL Once regard as identical when one of the differences exceed 125 of the set condition they are regarded as dissidence G The setting for this function is common to Association Setting in the AlS Menu
181. IONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 16 SECTION 3 BASIC OPERATION 3 1 OPERATION FLOW be Ns e ita e dU E Rd 3 1 3 1 1 Power ON and Start the System 3 2 3 1 2 Observe and Adjust Video 3 4 3 1 3 Acquire and Measure Data 1 1 3 4 3 1 4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP 3 4 3 1 5 the Operation and Stop the System 3 5 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 6 3 2 1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance BRILL 3 6 3 2 2 Change Observation Range RANGE 3 6 P MENU GS erc 3 7 29 4 4 Adjust Gain GAIN 3 8 32 5 Suppress Sea Clutter SEA eh RR REOR Yao 3 9 3 2 6 Suppress Rain Snow Clutter RAIN 3 11 3 2 7 Reset Alarm Buzzer ALARM ACK 3 13 Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 2 8 3 3 3 4 3 5 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed 3 14 OPERATION PROCEDURES 2 erect 3 15 3 3 1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball 3 15 3 3 2
182. IS GPS DLOG Alarm Depth Temperature Wind Current ROT RSA Time Zone Date Time Selectable ports When the automatic recognition AUTO function is used When ports are specified Own LAN LAN GPS LAN Ship s Clock Behavior pattern of selectable ports AUTO Data from JRC LAN is prior Own The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly LAN The system uses data from JRC LAN LAN GPS The system uses GPS data from GPS JRC LAN connected LAN Ship s Clock 4 o uses ship s clock data from ship s clock JRC LAN Setting of Section 7 2 10 2 Reception Port Setting RX Port is prior If you want to set this G menu Section 7 2 10 2 Reception Port Setting RX Port menu set to User Setting 3 129 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING Japan Radio Ltd 3 130 D L L 1 il a E I SECTION 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING t ll t Ill I i 1 I a a i I MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 USE OF NAVIGATION POOLS
183. ISPLAY Upper left of the display Range scale Optimum performance indication Range rings display On Off Range rings interval 12 4 Tuning OK Transmission pulse length MP1 Motion mode true relative Radar trail true relative Rinss 2NM RMIT N Up GND Off center Off Center Stability mode On Off Transmit F 5 E o Azimuth display mode Transmission standby ANT 3 Master S band Interswitch connection status About ground and sea stabilization Speed sensor source is MAN 2AXW If Set Drift Setting menu is on GND Ground stabilization If Set Drift Setting menu is off Sea Sea stabilization Speed sensor source is GPS 2 GND Ground stabilization Lower left of the display Double zoom On Off Interference rejection IR mode Radar video processing PROC x2 mode IR Low Target enhance ENH mode ENH Levell m Function FUNC mode PROC Off Ae Sea clutter suppression Sea FUNC Off mode T Rain snow clutter suppression Sed MILL Rain mode Sea clutter uppression Sea dial position Rain snow clutter suppression Rain dial position 2 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS gt 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Upper right of the display Cursor bearing Cursor bearing Cursor mode numeric value indication Cursor latitude true relative Cursor range lop
184. ITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS ay y HE LINN dX G S XOUddV SSVNW 0007 0002 0001 007 Gr 02 0 9 SNOI LVIA 30 3 ASSAY 3d SNOLLVIA3O INNOISN3AIO 3 IBlSSIWH 3d SNOISN3AIG 3N 1L00 INIMVad AN ILNO NOLEVe3aO0 NS 14 2 1030709 YSHLO SSO 10 6 630 102 ASVO 01108 Gat HId3Q SA 4 SNIXIS OOE LJ Lj CS A818 wav Ty XL HD __ e by SERS 1 3 19 19399 10 40102 10 SUNLXAL 55018 5 PNA 109 13110 FTV 65 676 Fig 1 5 Outline Drawing of Operation Unit Type 5322 Desktop type option 1 10 JRC Japan Radio JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS TR 9 LIND 3X 9 XOWNddV SSVIA QF 0002 9r 0002 000 Ct VF 000 007 LF 00 02 02 90 0 9 GOF 9 ALT YEA xs xeu Ef if Hs cF 9 000 0002 9r 0002 000 Ct VF 000L gor LF GEF 00 Qc GLF 02 DE SOF OE 9 GT 9 C Ages
185. Interval Own Track Interval Unit Mark _ y _ Own Track Color Track 30 sec Map Map Shift Map On Off 2 Left click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right of the display Every time the button is clicked storage intervals are switched When Off is selected the storage function is turned off 3 5 4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory Storage of own ship s track can be turned off 1 Left click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right of the display Every time the button 1s clicked interval for track storage are switched When Off is selected the storage function is turned off Japan Radio Ltd 3 42 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 5 Clear Own Ship s Track Clear Own Track This function cancels the storing of own ship s track Procedures 3 5 6 1 Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu operation below Track 2 Clear Own Track Color The Clear Own Track Color menu will appear 2 Left click the button for the color to be deleted All All tracks are deleted White Gray Blue Red Pink Yellow Green Only track of specified color is deleted After the item has been selected Clear Own Track Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click the Yes button Own ship s track indicated by the specified color will be deleted Use Expanded Own Ship s Track
186. LAN LAN cable and HUB option is G necessary For details contact the JRC offices NOTE If the connection is not suggested from JRC office don t connect PC or other maker s system to JRC LAN Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower radar system performance Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower that performance 7 2 10 1 Transmission Setting TX Setting For each sentence turn on off transmission 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the TX Setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 5 LAN Port Setting 1 TX Setting 3 Set on off for each sensor On The sentence is transmitted Off The sentence is not transmitted These sentences can be turned on off Settable sentences TTM TT TLL TT TTD TT TLB TT OSD RSD ALR ACK TTM AIS TLL AIS TTD AIS TLB AIS 7 27 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 10 2 Reception Port Setting RX Port Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors There are two methods for receiving signals specifying a port for each sensor or using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 5 LAN Port Setting
187. LES SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION 1 v n v E iW 1 if 1 B 1 1 1 I aq hi 1l 1 1 EEG Il I 1 4 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION 1 1 FUNG IONS qe H 1 1 1 1 1 Function of This System 1 1 FEATURES qe 1 2 CONFIGURATION 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 10 2 2 2222 04141 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 14 cmm mum mm o MEN ERTE 7 PP Se eas ese a a ee T aaa Pa Tua 4 122 EEE zu m vs mar eo RR 0x m H A z See ESE _ a z
188. Ltd 3 64 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 4 Left click the 6 Erase button The Erace screen will appear The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed 5 Click numeric buttons corresponding to the number for the file to be deleted Confirmation Window will appear 6 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected navigation data 1s deleted and the name of the file is deleted from the list 3 6 5 5 Displaying saved navigation data Card Mark Display 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 7 File Operation 3 Left click the item button of 1 Select Card Sot select the card slot Slotl and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched 4 Left click the 7 Card Mark Display button The Card Mark Display screen will appear The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed 5 Left click the button corresponding to the number for the file to be displayed Confirmation Window will appear 6 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected navigation data will be displayed 3 65 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 6 6 Set and Display Geodetic System Geodetic To create navigation information set t
189. MJ Sf 90 MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Japan Radio Co Ltd 9 4 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION Cautions for high voltage High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices You do not face any danger during normal operation but sufficient cares are required for maintenance inspection and adjustment of their internal components Maintenance check up and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are prohibited except by maintenance specialists High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death from electric shock but even voltages of hundred volts may sometimes lead to a death from electric shock To prevent such an accident make it a rule to turn off the power switch discharge capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you touch any parts inside these devices At the time wearing dry cotton gloves ensures you further to prevent such danger It 1s also a necessary caution to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were shocked by electricity If you were injured from electric shock disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly B What to do in case of
190. Manual 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7 1 3 Tuning Tune Adjustment JMA 9172 SA radar is fully automatic There is no necessary for a tuning function 7 1 4 Bearing Adjustment Make adjustment so that the bearing of the target measured with the ship s compass matches the bearing of the target echo on the radar display Procedures 1 Select HUp for the bearing presentation Set video processing PROC to PROC Off 2 Measure the bearing of an adequate target e g a ship at anchor a breakwater or a buoy relative to own ship s heading 3 Open the Serviceman Menu 4 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Bearing Adjustment menu 1 Adjust Menu 2 Bearing Adjustment For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value Make adjustment by the 0 17 5 Adjust the bearing adjustment value by operating the button so that the target measured in step 2 is adjusted to the correct bearing 6 Left click the ENT button to determine the value 7 1 5 Range Adjustment Make adjustment so that the range of a target on the radar display is shown correctly Procedures 1 Search the radar display for a target of which range is already known 7 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 2 Open the Serviceman Menu
191. NLLNPIOIN 3NETLPIO SNOISNJAICI 3 IISSINH 13N 971549 ONIA VeO 71002 052 Bu p THODE 002 HOLIMSYs LN a S E C M gcc Dor De coe 9 5800 40 95 v YN 3 3Hn1X3l SSO TEHW3S PNAD 100 9 Ter 37 OBE e i A Y 43 GAN 88 31 0 Hlava ONG OH pue GN LAN 219 Id EA 51778 9NO p f gemmam e DET 097 2 T1002 002 3002 004 NIN Fig 1 7 Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit Type NQE 3141 8A Option 1 12 JRC Japan Radio JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 9LE 30N ONIMVSO 1 LINN 71041 039 H3MOd SOT ma reir 1108 ONOTOH 5 7 TB 052 052 MM m 12 Fig 1 8 Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit Type NQE 3167 Option Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1
192. P CCRP1 2 Select GPS GPS1 X 10 0 Antennal Antenna2 Antenna3 Antenna4 Antennab Antennab Antenna Antenna Japan Radio Co Ltd RADAR Antenna2 X 5m Y 250m Length 300m 51 X 10m Y 30m CCRP1 X 0m Y 25m RADAR Antennat X 0m Y 15m CCRP Setting Yim Lensth 300 0 m Beam 30 0 m GPS Y RADAR Antenna 30 0 m CCRP m m m 7 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 1 2 SETTINGS This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation N CAUTION Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons If wrong setting is carried out this may cause unstable operation Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation Otherwise the radar performance may be affected resulting in an accident or trouble 7 2 1 Communication Port Setting COM Port Setting External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication port The radar equipment has ten communication ports For signals to be input from sensors or to be output to the sensors communication ports need to be set in accordance with the sensors 7 2 1 1 Baud Rate Setting Baud Rate Set the baud rate of the signal to be input to the COM port 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the B
193. PERATION 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION Follow the flowchart below to change the current interswitch connection pattern A 2 1 Operation Flow Place the transmission standby state Open the Inter Switch Menu Change the connection pattern Close the Inter Switch Menu 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION A 2 2 Inter Switch Menu The Inter Switch Menu can be opened only when the transmission standby state 1 Press the TX STBY key to stop transmitting The transmission standby state will be placed 2 Move the cursor onto the Interswitch connection change upper left of the display and left click The Inter Switch Menu will appear 1 Left click the 0 Exit button The Inter Switch Menu will close Inter Switch Menu with 2 Display Units Inter Switch Current connection status a Connection pattern Display unit in operation b Set c Exit Japan Radio Ltd 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION a Connection pattern If this button is clicked the connection pattern is selected The display unit in operation is enclosed in a square LJ The background of the current connection pattern display is highlighted b Set If this button is clicked the change of connection is determined c Exit If
194. R CONTROL PART w309 PC1101 219 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 1 4 PTION CBb 1798 uo om zene qu H 7ZCRD IHR 1 101 means specification document B02P VL TENE B106 ay iei 8 RADAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY UNT POWER SUPPLY UND means revision of the specfication document FG INTERCONNECTION CMP 482 NBD 890 SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION CAX 16 w305 ZCRD 1586 2 22 CFA 1255 BREAK CIRCUIT RD 0035 10514 wem s MOTOR CBP 1205 B101 MOTOR H 7BDRD0049 det NKE 1532 AC220V S250W SSR 2unit SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION Ze rh git A Hielo Ed f NKE 1532 AC220V iagram o Interconnection D Fig B 12 JRC Japan Radio Ltd 15 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram Japan Radio Ltd 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS B 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram JMA 9172 SA B 7 1 RADAR 2695111153 INTERSWITCH SUPPLY 250V TTYCS 1 3ceavxs MAX H 2695110006 SUPPLY 55 5 ECDIS 250V TTYCS 1 CONNING soy rrYcs 1 L DISPLAY DG PS 250V TTYCS 1 ECHO J2 sovrrvcsi SOUNDER 1 LOG _ 5 1 183 250V TTYCS 4 LOG 6
195. R Trails The brilliance of the radar trails is selected Target Symbol The brilliance of the target symbol is selected Range Rings he brilliance of the range rings is selected EBL VRM PI The brilliance of the EBL PI is selected Character The brilliance of the character and bearing scale is selected Own Symbol HL Vector The brilliance of the own ship symbol heading line and own ship vector is selected Keyboard The brilliance of the operation panel is selected i Minimum level is LevelO it means OFF G Those selected brilliance can be saved for each Day Night mode 3 8 5 4 Setting radar video brilliance VID The brilliance of the video on the radar display is adjusted 1 Left click the button located at the lower right of the radar display and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to get the best view of the video display The brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted on four stages without opening the Brilliance Setting menu Adjust the radar display to obtain the best to view video 3 8 5 5 Setting target symbol brilliance TT The brilliance of the target symbol on the radar display is adjusted 1 Left click the O button located at the lower right of the radar display and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as to get the best view of the video display 3 103 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION g
196. RATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2 Specify the mark font size Normal The mark is displayed in normal size omall The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual 3 6 2 4 Setting the character size for comments 1 Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 5 Mark Display Setting 4 Comment Font Size The Comment Font Size menu will appear 2 Specify the comment font size Normal The characters for comments are displayed in normal size Small The characters for comments are displayed in a size smaller than usual 3 6 3 Edit User Map Edit User Map 3 6 3 1 Manually entering the own ship position Own Ship Position Use this function when editing navigation data for a location different from the own ship position 1 Open the Own Ship Position menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 1 Own Ship Position The number key screen for entering the latitude longitude of the Own Ship Position will appear 3 53 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2 Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of latitude XX xxx xxx 3 To make changes between north latitude and south latitude use the buttons North latitude Left click the button South latitude Left click the button 4 Left click the ENT button The manually entered lati
197. REFLECTION FROM THE 6 2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target but also on its material and shape The echo intensity from a higher and larger target 1s not always higher in general In particular the echo from a coast line 15 affected by the geographic conditions of the coast If the coast has a very gentle slop the echo from a mountain of the inland appears on the radar display Fig 6 3 Therefore the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully Mountain displayed on the radar display HL Sea shore line not displayed Fig 6 3 Sea shore line which is not displayed Table 6 1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection distance and the radar reflection cross sectional area RCS with regard to the type and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good the sea state 1s calm and the radio wave propagation is normal As revealed by this table even on the same sea shore line detection distance greatly differs depending on the height of the target from the surface of the sea Furthermore because the target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the target and environmental conditions such as the sea state weather and radio wave propagation caution should be taken when detecting distance of target 6 3 Japan Radio Co Lid
198. RMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Disassembly 1 Remove the four fixing screws to remove the cover from the display unit NCD 9170 A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws For standalone type NCD 9170 Remove For desktop type NDC 1478 2 Remove the cable connected to the radar process circuit board The radar process circuit is the first board from the left 3 Remove the two fixing screws M4 4 Pull out the board to the front 5 Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for adjustment or some stick between the battery and the battery holder and lift the battery up 8 21 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 6 Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for adjustment or some stick to the location shown in the figure below and slide the battery sideways to remove the battery Assembly 1 Check the polarity of the battery Make sure that the battery s positive side is facing up 2 Slide the battery sideways into the battery holder 3 Make sure that the battery is inserted fully Check Item 1 Check that no error message comes up 2 Check that the system starts up normally Notes Japan Radio Ltd 8 22 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS A CAUTION If you installed
199. SS CIRCUIT 0 1A typ TERMINAL BOARD 0 1A typ OPERATION UNIT 0 1A Fig B 9 Primary Power System Diagram 10 JRC Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit 11 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit NKE 1532 B 5 1 Slot Antenna Absorbable Recovery Current Brake Circuit CFA 1255 DC280V Motor Driver CBD 2010 AC220V CBD 2011 AC100V VERR TX IF Analog IF Input Output TRX 1 PM Antenna CHA 396 CMN 750 External RX IF Analog gital gital BP BZ TX IF Digi Clock RX IF Digi Radar Processor Interface CDC 1349 EU CMH 2246 Control 12V 5V 15V x 12V 5V 2 5V 15V AC100V 220V 14 cores Brake Control Circuit Relay and Filter Power Supply composite 1655 5 1656 CBD 1798 cable CCB Absorbable Recovery urrent Brake Circuit A 1261 100 220 12V ON OFF Control Absorbable Recovery urrent BP BZ TRIG MTR V Display Unit Safety Switch Terminal Board NCD 9170 CSD 1656 AC100V 220V TB102 DC48V AC100V AC220V Brake Circuit B CFA 1262 Note 1 PM Performance Monitor Fig B 10 Block Diagram of NKE 1532 12 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAW
200. Screen Fix and p L L Fix y Lower right of the display D Mark color switching 3 Own ship s track interval switching 4 Own ship s track interval unit switchin Own ship s track color g switching Mark Track 30 sec Map Map Shift Map display Data HL CPA On Off Off Off Ring CPA ring display Graphic display Off On Off 7 Ship s heading line Off Mark color switching Japan Radio Co Ltd The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is clicked If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the Mark Setting menu is opened Own ship s track color switching The own ship s track color is switched whenever this button 1s clicked Own ship s track interval switching The own ship s track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked Own ship s track interval unit switching The unit of the own ship s track interval 1s switched whenever this button 1s clicked sec gt mn gt NM gt Map display On Off The own track target track and route display are set to On Off whenever this button is clicked If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the Map Setting menu is opened Graphic display Off While the button is clicked the graphic display other than VRM EBL HL a cursor and range rings on the radar screen is cleared temporarily 2 22 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE B
201. Select this mode particularly when resolution is required Select this mode in general Radar echoes are expanded by 1 scale in all directions Select this mode to easily view the radar video Radar echoes are expanded by 2 scales in all directions on the display Select this mode to detect small targets such as buoys The expansion near a screen center is added to ENH Level2 When ENH Level3 is selected sea clutter returns and rain snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded When using this expansion mode operate SEA dial and RAIN dial to suppress sea clutter returns and rain snow clutter returns In general ENH Levell or ENH Level2 should be selected Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 26 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 4 Use Video Processing PROC This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets Attention If video processing mode is set to CORREL it may be difficult to detect high speed target 1 Left click the PROC button located at the lower left of the display The video processing modes are switched PROC Off gt 3ScanCORREL gt 4Scan CORREL 7 t Peak Hold Remain 5 CORREL Video process modes PROC Off Select this mode in general 3Scan CORREL Select this mode when many rain snow clutter returns are detected 4Scan CORREL Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter
202. System number Total transmitting time Total operating time Total power on time Total operating power on time of the scanner unit Total operating power on time of the display unit Japan Radio Ltd 8 10 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS The system includes parts that need periodic replacement The parts should be replaced as scheduled Use of parts over their service life can cause a system failure N CAUTION Turn off the main power source before replacing parts Otherwise an electric shock or trouble may be caused Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal monitor If only one person does this work he may drop the LCD resulting in injury Even after the main power source is turned off some high voltages remain for a while Do not contact the inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands Otherwise an electric shock may be caused JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8 4 1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement Here are parts required for periodic replacement Part name Interval Part type Part code 1 Motor 10 000 hours MDBW108885 MDBW10885 2 Fan Scanner Unit NZF 1532 NZF 1532 120mm Radar process Unit 90 000 hours p 92mm Radar process Unit 45 000 hours 60mm Motor Driver 45 000 hours 60mm Power Supply Unit 45 000 hours 3 LCD PANEL 50 000 hours CML 1799 CML 1799 4 Fan Display
203. TIONS 1 Depth Graph Display Determine whether to display received water depth information with a graph One of two digital information areas 1s used to display data When the water depth graph 1s displayed the sizes of the target tracking TT AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased eft click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display The water depth graph display function 1s switched between On and Off Off Does not display a water depth graph Areal Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 1 Area2 Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 2 2 Depth Range e Select the depth range on the water depth graph 50m Sets 50 m as the depth range 100m Sets 100 m as the depth range 250m Sets 250 m as the depth range AUTO Uses the depth range in the DPT sentence included in received data 3 Time Range Select the time range on the water depth graph 10min Sets 10 minutes as the time range 15min Sets 15 minutes as the time range 30min Sets 30 minutes as the time range 60min Sets 60 minutes as the time range 12hour Sets 12 hours as the time range 4 Depth Unit Set the unit of water depth for the water depth graph Feet The foot is used as the unit of water depth Japan Radio Co Lid 3 108 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS Fathom T
204. Target Tracking Simulator Target Tracking Simulator Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the target tracking units are operating normally Since the pseudo targets move depending on known parameters the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known value 1f the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked and displayed Thus it can be checked if the system 1s operating normally Procedures 1 2 3 4 5 Japan Radio Co Ltd Press the TX STBY key to stop the transmitting The equipment will enter the transmission standby state Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu operation TT 9 TT Test Menu Left click the item button of 2 TT Simulator The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed Select the scenario to be set The TT Simulator display will be turned on Press the TX STBY key to transmit When the TT simulator is active the character X will display at the bottom of the radar display Target tracking simulator scenario Scenario Target start point Target end point Pseudo target Distance Bearing Distance Bearing Specs 1 3 2NM 20 1NM 90 20kn 2 6NM 0 ONM 0 10kn 3 6NM 18 every 1NM 18 every 1Okn 4 6NM 45 1NM 45 105kn 5 6NM 45 6NM 150 20kn 6 6NM 45 6NM 150 20kn When the simulator is operating set 0 as the heading bearing and O kn as the speed of own ship When the range between own sh
205. The setting items for Track Color will be displayed 4 Left click the button corresponding to the track color to be set Colors set by performing the procedure in Section 5 6 2 3 Setting of Target Ship s Track Colors Target Track Color can be selected Individual colors can be set for up to 10 ships The same color is set for 11 to 20 ships 5 6 2 2 Target Ship s Track Function On Off Target Track Function 1 Open the T TRK menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 2 Left click the item button of _ t Target Track Function The Target Track Function will be set to on or off On Target Track Function is turned on Off Target Track Function is turned off Note that when this function is turned off all the other ship s track functions are turned off In this case the track data of other ships is not saved so they cannot be traced later 5 45 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 2 3 Setting of Target Ship s Track Colors Target Track Color You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking or individual colors for the ships of track numbers 1 to 10 The tracks of ships 11 to 20 are displayed in the same color If the other ship s track function Target Track Function is G turned off the track data of other ships is not saved 1 Open the Tar
206. Time Coordinated The international standard of time kept by atomic clocks around the world V Variable Range Marker An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target W A geographical location on a route indicating a event XXV Japan Radic Co Ltd Japan Radio Ltd xxvi 9 4 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION 9 9 FIRST AID TREATMENTS Wii gie d ee V The Mounting Point of the Warning EOUIPMENT APPEARANCE xviii GLOSSARY asditystut Das nd I Pu y adn cp eM ud TM UM xxi SECTION 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION 1 1 qul pexgiel qe RE 1 1 1 1 1 Function of This System 42 2 2 222 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 CONFIGURATION eed eee 1 4 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS ee 1 5 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 14 SECTION 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY EI ERR SR M vH EUR EHE 2 1 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 2 11 2 3 FUNCT
207. UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANNER UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS UNIT OPERATION UNIT OPERATION UNIT OPERATION UNIT OPERATION UNIT MONITOR UNIT MONITOR UNIT MOTOR TRX MODULE AC220V MOTOR DRIVER AC100V MOTOR DRIVER BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKE UNIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT ENCODER SIGNAL PROCESS UNIT IF INPUT OUTPUT CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT INTERFACE CIRCUIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT FAN MOTOR KIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT TERMINAL BOARD MOTHER BOARD FAN RPU POWER SUPPLY FAN PSU OPERATION CIRCUIT A OPERATION CIRCUIT B OPERATION CIRCUIT D TRACKBALL BEZEL KIT 23 inch LCD Japan Radio Co Ltd MDBW10885 CMN 750 CBD 2010 CBD 2011 CFA 1255 NZR 1017 CCB 1655 CHT 1071A NDC 1493 CHA 396 CBD 1798 CDC 1349 CMH 2246 CSC 1656 NZF 1532 MPBC45622 MDLW12056 CDC 1363 CDC 1364 CMJ 523 CQD 2176 CQC 1230 109 061254013 CBD 1861 CBP 220 CCK 1005 CCK 1006 CCK 1007 CCK 2013 MPXP34743 CML 1799 DC brushless motor Including CFA 1261 and CFA 1262 Including CHA 396 CDC 1349 and CMH 2246
208. UNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8 4 4 Replacement of Backup Battery Replacement of backup battery must be made by specialized service personnel For details refer to Service Manual A coin cell battery maintains radar system configuration date and time information while power off condition Radar system configuration 1s saving to non volatile memory at fixed intervals 8 4 4 4 About the Battery Alarm If Battery Low is appeared at the lower right of the display when start up the radar system the battery has not enough time left to live We recommend to replace the battery If Battery Dead is appeared at the lower right of the display when start up the radar system the battery has no time left to live There is a necessary to replace the battery In This condition this radar system is restored configuration information from flash memory and normal operation 1s available However you turned of the radar system before saving to flash memory the configuration information is maybe lost In this case you must setup the configuration again o About disposal of used battery refer to Section 10 2 8 4 4 2 to Replacement of Backup Battery Required tools e A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws e A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screws e A flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for 3 mm screws Japan Radio Ltd 8 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTE
209. UTTONS D Ship s heading line Off The ship s heading line HL display is set to Off while this button 1s clicked Since the ship s heading line is cleared while the button is clicked the target in the ship s heading bearing can be clearly seen CPA ring display On Off The CPA ring display is switched to On Off whenever the button is clicked When the target vector display mode is il true vector the CPA ring cannot be set to On Own ship s information Own She Information D Heading device CMPS 315 0 switching SPI 2 15 6 2 Speed 006 305 9 4 4 Manual own ship s speed peed sensor switching 500 158 setting UTC 2008 07 01 1234 cs 5514350M we 1155234E 3 Time display mode switching Heading device switching The heading device is switched whenever this button 1s clicked GYRO 5 Electronic compass 2 GYRO When the selected heading device is not connected to the equipment an alarm is issued opeed sensor switching The speed sensor is switched whenever the button 1s clicked MAN Manual gt 106 Single axis water log gt 2 Dual axis water log 2 Dual axis ground log gt GPS When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment an alarm is issued Time display mode switching The time display mode 775 universal time clock local mean time is switched whenever this button is
210. Unit Radar Process Circuit 20 000 hours 109R0612S4D13 5 00588 Power Supply 20 000 hours CBP 220 CBP 220 5 Backup battery 5 years CR2032 5ZBCJ00012 i means revision such as A and so on ii The 92mm Fan is auxiliary use of the 120mm Fan 8 4 2 Replacement of Motor Replacement of motor must be made by specialized service personnel For details refer to Service Manual 8 4 2 1 Scanner Unit NKE 1532 Required tools e Wrenches 5 8 and M10 Ses e A Phillips screwdriver M2 Required procedure Removal of the pedestal cover 1 Turn off the safety switch of the scanner before replacing the motor a P rno e safety switch Japan Radio Ltd 8 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 2 Remove the pedestal cover of the port side and the starboard side Make sure that there is no foreign matter or dust adhered to the gasket when you put the cover on Work of Port side 3 Loosen the hexagonal bolts four M5 bolts And remove the motor driver unit Portside 4 Remove the relay connector P1901 connected to the motor driver unit P1901
211. WARE BUTTONS gt 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Alarm Alarm indication The system alarm indicated in red Other information indicated in blue or yellow Japan Radio Ltd 2 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AIS AR HL DATA PA OFF OFF PTION DAY NIGHT PANEL PWR ACK The name of each button is described from the following page See below 2 11 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS POWER Power supply switch The lamp is lit and the equipment is activated If this switch is pressed while the equipment is running the power of the equipment is shut down 3 1 1 on page 3 2 2 PWR ACK Power alarm acknowledgement key Use this function to acknowledge the alarm when power supply abnormality occurs To enable this key an external battery separate power from normal AC is required TX STBY Transmission Standby key When the POWER switch is pressed the STANDBY message is displayed in the top left corner of the screen in about 10 seconds If this key is pressed transmission starts If this key 1s pressed during transmission the equipment is set to a standby state
212. XXX 5 To make change between east longitude and west longitude use East longitude Left click the button West longitude Left click the button 6 Left click the ENT button The manually entered longitude value is determined 7 To cancel input put the cursor on CLR and then left click the button The latitude longitude input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state 3 21 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 4 6 Character input screen Character Number button Entered character Enter button Delete button Back Space button Exit button 3 3 4 7 Entering a character 1 On the character input screen use trackball to select alphabet from A to Z numbers from 0 to 9 or symbols only comments for mark line and then left click the ENT button to enter one character of the name to be inputted For example JRC for a name click button as follows 2 Make sure that the entered character is correct left click the ENT button The character has been entered 3 To cancel input left click the button The character input screen will be closed without entering the character Japan Radio Ltd 2 22 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 5 Overview of Menu Structure The menu structure of
213. a is displayed the target displayed target symbol is enclosed in a square L 317 Lost target The alarm sounds 12 The alarm message Lost turns red and blinks The symbol turns red and indicates with X mark Past position The past positions of an AIS target are displayed 2 as well as the target tracking symbol Target track The track of another ship as an AIS target is 7 displayed as well as the target tracking symbol 9 9 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 2 2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols Vector Definition Remarks Sleeping target This symbol is displayed when received data is valid The direction of the triangle s vertex indicates the target s bow or course Activated target The heading direction is displayed with a solid line and the course vector is displayed with a dotted line The line perpendicular to the 1512 heading direction indicates the direction to which the course is to be changed This line may not be displayed ASA Target acquired in alarm sounds automatic acquisition zone The alarm message New Target turns red AIS12 and blinks Outline display The outlines of ships are displayed scaled down S AIS12 Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed the target target symbol is enclosed in a square 1512 Dangerous target
214. a line repeat procedure 3 4 When finished with the correction of all items left click the 0 Exit button 3 59 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode terminating the user map delete mode Example The vertex to be deleted 3 6 3 7 Batch clearing marks or lines Clear With regard to the created user map marks or lines are batch cleared by type or by color 1 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear 2 1 Left click the item button of by Type Select the type of marks or lines to be deleted To select all types select All For example to delete red marks select O 2 2 Left click the item button of Select the color of marks or lines to be deleted To select all colors select All For example to clear red marks select Red After the items have been selected Confirmation Window will appear Japan Radio Ltd 3 60 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected mark will be deleted NOTE f data is not copied on the flash memory card option the data is not be reloaded 3 6 4 Correct Position on User Map Shift User Map 3 6 4 1 Correcting the display position on
215. a size smaller than usual 3 6 2 1 Setting display by type 1 Open the Display Mark Type menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 5 Mark Display Setting 1 Display Mark Type 3 51 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP The Display Mark Type menu will open 2 Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each type of mark and line When 1 All is selected the setting will reflect to all types of marks and lines Off All types are not displayed Individual All types are displayed On Setting by type is activated 3 6 2 2 Setting display by color 1 Open the Display Mark Color Type menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 5 Mark Display Setting 2 Display Mark Color The Display Mark Color Type menu will open 2 Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type of mark and line When 1 All is selected the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and lines Off All color types are not displayed Individual Setting by color type is activated On All color types are displayed 3 6 2 3 Setting the mark font size 1 Open the Mark Size menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 5 Mark Display Setting 3 Select Mark Size The Mark Size menu will appear Japan Radio Ltd 3 52 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPE
216. activation zone Activated AIS target Target inside AIS filter Target outside AIS filter oO A C Ifthe number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable maximum they are displayed in the following priority order 1 Association target 2 Activated AIS target 3 Sleeping AIS target The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over water depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting The type of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting of the stable mode When GND is displayed for Vector over ground the stability mode Upper left of the display on page 2 3 When Sea is displayed for Vector over water the stability mode Upper left of the display on page 2 3 When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water the system has converted the AIS target s vector over ground to the vector over water according to the data received from the AIS and the own ship s information When the AIS target s symbol is activated but the vector is not NOTE displayed the following are probable causes of the trouble e COG SOG is not yet input from the GPS The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning 5 7 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 2 3 Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols When a tracked ta
217. adio Co Ltd Warning Label NQE 3141 4A 8A Interswitch Unit Japan Radio Ltd xvi To LU 77 u CES La NKE 1532 Scanner Unit Japan Radio Co Ltd xvii EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE Scanner Unit Type NKE 1532 12 feet Display Unit Type NCD 9170 Stand alone type Japan Radio Ltd xviii Interswitch Unit Type NQE 3141 4A J 7 4 13 M 7H gt Eo gx 7 Monitor Unit Type NWZ 178 Desktop type Operation Unit Type NCE 5322 Desktop type xix Japan Radic Co Ltd Radar Process Unit Type NDC 1478 Desktop type DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD 9170T DESKTOP TYPE Japan Radio did XX GLOSSARY This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related maritime terms AZ Activated target AIS Anti clutter rain Anti clutter sea Associated target AZI BCR BCT C up CCRP Clutter COG CORREL A Acquisition Activation zone A zone set up by the operator in which the system should automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets when entering the zone A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional information Automatic Identification System A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ship
218. ain and snow clutter and those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function a Sea clutter Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves Generally as waves become larger image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter far away 1s also displayed When waves are large and the sea clutter level 1s high it is difficult to distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity is weak Accordingly it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection function Table 6 2 shows the relation between the sea state SS showing the size of waves generated by wind and the radar s detection probability Table 6 2 Sea state and probability of target detection S band radar probability to detect a target at a distance of 0 4 NM RCS 551 2 552 3 553 4 554 5 0 1m2 V v M 0 5 m2 V V V M M NV 1m2 V V V X band radar probability to detect a target at a distance of 0 7 RCS 551 2 5527 39 553 4 554 5 1m2 V M M NV 5m2 V V M M NV 10 m2 V V V V M i V Detection probability of 80 M Detection probability of 50 iii NV Detection probability of less than 5096 6 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW As shown in Table 6 2 the number of SS increases as the
219. aintenance including settings of antenna safety switch master reset etc AN CAUTION Only our service engineers are to make the adjustment Neglecting this caution may cause accidents and failures Do not make the adjustments during navigation Otherwise adjustments may affect the radar functions causing accidents and failures 7 4 1 Antenna Safety Switch Safety Switch Use this switch to measure the transmission reception performance while the antenna 1s 1n stopped state 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Safety Switch setting menu 3 Maintenance Menu 1 Safety Switch 3 Select the item to be set Set operation when the antenna safety switch 15 turned off 1 TX OFF The transmitter stops transmission The screen on the display unit remains in transmission state 2 Standy Normal setting The transmitter stops transmission The screen on the display unit is placed in standby state 3 TX ON The transmitter continues transmission The screen on the display unit remains in transmission state In this case however an error such as a bearing signal failure occurs because the safety switch is turned off 4 Change the setting back to 2 Standy when the work is finished Japan Radio Ltd 7 38 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7 4 2 Initialization of Memory Area Area Initial
220. al 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU Japan Radio Ltd 7 44 fd SECTION 8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE I i n i T J i I I 1 IET 4 1 it i i H I i I I M ML WII COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT x X H m z SS SS Se SSS PS eee eee 22 ee i E i I n 1 11 1 1 8 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 8 1 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 04141 11112 8 2 8 2 1 Scanner Unit NKE 1532 8 2 8 2 2 Display Unit NCD 9170 1 8 4 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK _ 8 5 8 3 1 Check Performance on Test Menu 8 5 8 3 1 1 Self diagnosis function Self Test
221. alarm otation ation D D SCANNER MOTOR POWER act NC SYNC NCD 9170 T E5 RMRI Signal flow diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD 9170 T f NCD 9170 T iagram o Signal Flow D Fig B 8 JRC Japan Radio Ltd B 9 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 4 Primary Power System Diagram OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION AC100 115V AC220 240V 50 60Hz 1 i CIRCUIT M BREAKER LINE FILTER P 12V VOLTAGE SELCT SWITCH 48V 3V D AC100 115V AC220 240V MONITOR UNIT 5 0V 50 60Hz 1 POWER L MOTOR D POWER AC100 230V 3 3V SCANNER MOTOR 16 POWER _ O POWER CONTROL CL CIRCUIT E um A AN 5 2 O O A BATTRY e DC24V lt a lt gt INTERSWITCH 1A OPERATION UNIT 0 5A typ GYRO I F CIRCUIT 0 1A typ SCANNER X BAND 2 5A S BAND 3 0A RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT 1 2A typ ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT 0 15A typ AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT 0 15 typ TERMINAL BOARD 1 0A typ RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT 2 2A typ ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT 0 1A typ AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT 0 1 typ TERMINAL BOARD 0 2A typ RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT 0 1A typ TERMINAL BOARD 0 4A typ RADAR PROCE
222. ance with Navigation Status Z O Status Under Way Using Engine at Anchor Not Under Command Restricted Manoeuvrability Constrained by Her Draft Moored Aground Engaged in Fishing CONDO BW DY Under Way Sailing 5 29 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 14 Reserved 15 Not Defined 5 3 5 2 Displaying AIS Target Information TGT DATA Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the AIS target of which information is to be displayed and press the TGT DATA key The information of the selected AIS target will be displayed When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark yt is not on the radar display the target is outside the LY J display 5 3 5 3 Canceling AIS Target Information Display CNCL Data Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the activated AIS target of which information display is to be cancelled and right click The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed 2 Left click 6 CNCL Data The information display of the selected AIS target will be cleared 5 3 5 4 Selecting Detail Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display 1 Left click the O or button in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display The detail or simple mode display for AIS target information will be selected 5 3 5 5 Message Received AIS messag
223. annot be received for a specified time the target is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted As shown in the table below the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status Deciding AIS Target to be Lost Target status Time until data deletion SOLAS ship Class A SOLAS ship Class Vessel below 3 knots Class A or 2 knots 18 min 18 min Class B and it is now at anchor or on the berth Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at 60 sec 18 min anchor or on the berth Vessel of 0 to 14 knots Class B 0 to 14 knots 60 sec 180 sec Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 36 sec 180 sec Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec 180 sec SAR Search and Rescue 60 sec 60 sec ATON Aid to Navigation 18 min 18 min Base Station 60 sec 60 sec When a dangerous target ship is lost a lost alarm is issued and the symbol changes to a lost symbol The lost symbol will display continuously on the last received position If the ALARM ACK key is pressed the symbol 1s cleared Japan Radio Ltd 5 36 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 3 9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm AIS Alarm Setting Conditions for issuing a Lost alarm and CPA TCPA alarm for AIS targets can be set 5 3 9 1 Setting of Condition for Lost Alarm Procedures 1 Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 6 AIS
224. aph is displayed the sizes of the target tracking TT AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased 3 109 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS e eft click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display The water temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off Off The water temperature graph is not displayed Areal The water temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 1 Area2 The water temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 2 2 TEMP Graph Color Set the color for the water temperature graph There are eight selection items White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red 3 TEMP Range When Color is selected for the display color for the water temperature graph set the temperature range of each color 4 Time Range Set the time range for the water temperature graph 10min The time range is set at 10 minutes 15min The time range is set at 15 minutes 30min The time range is set at 30 minutes 60min The time range is set at 60 minutes 12hour The time range is set at 12 hours 3 8 8 6 Course Bar Setting The Course Bar Setting menu will appear 1 Course Bar Display Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been received on the radar display One of two digital information areas
225. aracter and bearing scale is selected RADAR Video The color of the radar video is selected RADAR Trails Time The color of the time radar trails is selected RADAR Trails All The color of the time radar trails is selected Target Symbol The color of the target symbol is selected Cursor The color of the cursor is selected Range Rings The color of the range rings is selected EBL VRM PI The color of the EBL VRM PI is selected Own Symbol HL Vector The color of the own ship symbol heading line own ship vector is selected G Those selected color can be saved for each Day Night mode 3 8 5 3 Setting display brilliance Brilliance Setting For each Day Night mode background color outside the bearing scale background color inside the bearing scale and color for characters radar echo and radar trails can be selected Procedures 1 Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 2 Brilliance Setting Japan Radio Ltd 3 102 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS Display Brilliance Setting menu will appear Setting brilliance of each element e Specify the brilliance for the element Level4 indicates maximum brilliance and Levell indicates minimum brilliance The brilliance for the following elements can be specified RADAR Video The brilliance of the radar video is selected RADA
226. ard 4601 Radar video TIY VD BP 2048p BZ Terminal board TB4401 NAV1 NAV2 ALM ARPA JARPA port at TB4501 RSD OSD TTM TLL TTD TLB JRC ARPA TTM TLL TTD TLB ALR APB BOD GGA GLL RMC RMB BWC VTG XTE JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 Heading data HDT THS External alarm Default setting normally closed contact Maximum current 200mA SYSALM ALPAALM PWRALM port at terminal board TB4601 Acknowledge Contact output ACKOUT port at terminal board TB4401 Watchman reset Contact output WMRST port at terminal board TB4401 Remote maintenance JRC format MNT port at terminal board TB4601 AIS alarm acknowledge ACK AIS port at terminal board TB4601 External monitor Multi scan monitor Analog RGB HD15pin Connector 2 port i Only with Navigation Equipment is connected li The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC 96 72 The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC 112 73 Can t be use for target tracking 11 5 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION gt 11 4 Target Tracking Function 11 4 Target Tracking Function Target Tracking Function Available range scale All range Acquisition Acquisition mode Manual AUTO AUTO mode uses Auto acquisition Zone Manual Cancellation Any one Target or All targets at once Acquisition Ran
227. are displaying hiding the tracks of all ships and Individual displaying the tracks of individual ships 1 Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting gt 3 Target Track Display 1 All The setting items for All will be displayed 2 Left click the button corresponding to the track display to be set Individual Track display is set for individual ships Off The tracks of all ships are hidden On The tracks of all ships are displayed Even when Target Track Display is turned off the track data of G other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set Individual settin 3 Left click the button corresponding to the track number to be set The selected track number display will be set to on or off On track number display is turned on Off track number display is turned off When Individual 15 selected the track numbers Target Track No 1 to and the individual setting for are valid Select on off for each target Setting for 1 to 10 ships Setting for 11 to 20 ships Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual G is selected 5 47 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 2 5 Setting of Target Ship s Track Saving Interval Track Memory Interval An interval for saving tar
228. arm 003 AIS Alarm 004 AIS Alarm 005 AIS Alarm 006 AIS Alarm 008 AIS Alarm 025 AIS Alarm 026 AIS Alarm 029 AIS Alarm 030 AlS Alarm 032 AIS Alarm 035 Description There is a dangerous target A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone There is a lost target The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached 95 of the maximum The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached the maximum The number of displayed AIS target symbols has reached 95 of the maximum The number of received data items exceeds the maximum number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has reached 95 of the maximum The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has reached the maximum Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS is a 3 digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence See below Tx malfunction Antenna VSWR exceeds limit Rx channel 1 malfunction Rx channel 2 malfunction Rx channel 70 malfunction general failure MKD connection lost external EPFS lost no sensor position in use no valid SOG information no valid COG information Heading lost invalid no valid ROT information Error message and alarm are displayed in the lower right of the display Mo Alarm Japan Radio Co Ltd See al
229. ars at a position that 1s about 35 5 NM shorter than the actual distance If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display the true distance of the target 15 5 35 5 40 5 NM On the pulse length 15 on the repetition frequency of 1280 Hz a false echo may appear at a position that 1s about 63 NM shorter than the actual distance This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale the repetition frequency because the distance of the target changes accordingly If second time echo is appeared the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is effective Otherwise Stagger Trigger menu set to on See Section 3 8 3 Set scanner Unit TXRX Setting f Radar Interference When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship Is near own ship a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms In many cases these spots do not always appear at the same places so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes See Fig 6 9 HL HL Fig 6 9 Radar interference If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same model their transmitting repetition frequency 1s nearly the same As a result interference patterns may be displayed concentrically In this case the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the interference reflector function s
230. at can be used 29 types Lines that can be used 3 types solid broken and dashed dotted line Color of mark and lines 7 colors that can be used If radar video is poor visibility caused by user map function G press the DATA OFF key to map displays temporarily off NOTE The user map function is available between latitudes of 85 Nand85 5 3 6 1 Create User Map Mark Line In this system when the radar 1s in the transmission state the user map is displayed all the time However valid latitude longitude data and true bearing data must be entered into the system The user map can be created and edited by performing the following operation 3 6 1 1 Plotting a mark Procedures 1 Left click the button located at the upper right of the display to set the Mark mode Mark font line pattern Mark color line color Cursor mode switching switching switching Cursor AUTO 55 17 967 N The mark font to be used is displayed to the right of the button Japan Radio Ltd 3 48 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2 Left click the mark font 0 button to select a font for the mark The mark fonts are switched 3 Left click the c button located to the right of the mark font to select a color for the mark The color for the mark font located to the right of the button will change 4 Left click at a desired location on the radar display The s
231. ata save the operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3 10 1 Save Operating State Save User Setting Procedures 1 Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 3 User Setting 1 Load User Setting The Load User Setting menu will appear 2 Left click the button for the file to be loaded Confirmation Window will appear To load the file left click the 1 Yes button 3 10 3 Delete Operating State Delete User Setting The operating state saved in the system can be deleted by performing the operation below Use this function to delete unnecessary operating state data Procedures 1 Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 3 User Setting 1 Load User Setting The Delete User Setting menu will appear 2 Left click the button for the file to be deleted Confirmation Window will appear To delete the file left click the 1 Yes button 3 121 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD 3 11 USING cARD This radar has two card slots Inserting a flash memory card option into a card slot you can save the following contents saved in the processor in the card or can load data from the card to the processor Trails of own ship 7000 points maximum Track of other ship
232. ative bearing mode Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the EBL1 2 numeric value indication true relative switching located at the upper right of the display and left click The selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is clicked gt gt T EBL bearing is displayed in true bearing mode R EBL bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode 2 To set a mode for fixing EBL display EBL Bearing Fix When this function is set to Angle EBL is fixed to the preset bearing For example if a true bearing of 020 is preset the EBL is fixed to the true bearing 020 even when the own ship turns When the function is set to Screen the EBL 15 fixed on the radar display In this case the EBL 1s always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own ship turns 4 5 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 1 Open the EBL Cursor Setting menu by performing the following menu operation Main 7 Sub Menu 9 EBL Cursor Setting 2 Left click at the item button of 1 EBL1 Bearing FIX or 2 EBL2 Bearing FIX Angle EBL bearing is fixed to the preset value Screen EBL bearing is fixed on the radar display Course data is necessary for turning on this function Variable range markers VRM are indispensable to the measurement of ranges Operators must be familiar with the ope
233. aud Rate setting menu 2 Installation Menu 5 COM Port Setting 1 Baud Rate 7 11 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 3 Set the baud rate of the port to be set 1 COMPASS 4800 NMEA 9600 NSK 38400 fast bps 2 MAINTENANCE LOG 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 3 NAV1 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 4 NAV2 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 5 ALARM 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 6 JARPAIi 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 7 AIS 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 8 ARPAV 1200 4800 9600 38400 bps 9 1200 4800 9600 38400 115200 bps i The compass port is a receive only port that is dedicated to COMPASS signals ii The bold values are factory set ili The JARPA port is a transmit only port that is dedicated to JRC ARPA signals iv The ARPA port is a transmit only port v The COM port connector is D sub 9pin 7 2 1 2 Reception Port Setting RX Port Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors There are two methods for receiving signals specifying a port for each sensor or using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port setting menu 2 Installation Menu 5 COM Port Setting 2 RX Port 3 Seta port for each sensor Settable sensor GPS DLOG Alarm Depth Temperature Wind Current
234. aved 5 51 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 3 Erasing File Erase 1 Insert the flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 7 File Operations 3 Left click the item button of to select a card slot The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slotl and Slot2 4 Left click 5 Erase The Erase menu will appear Currently saved target ship s track data on the card will be listed 5 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be erased The Confirmation Window will appear 6 Left click 1 Yes to erase the file The selected target track data will be erased and the file name will disappear from the list Japan Radio Ltd 5 52 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 4 Displaying File Card Target Track Display 1 Insert the flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 7 File Operations 3 Left click the item button of to select a card slot The setting item for Select Card Slot 15 switched be
235. bber band 1 090T 10 0kn Waypoint is inserted into this section Waypoint is inserted into this section 3 75 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude Waypoint Input In this radar system it is possible to create and correct route by performing operation on the Waipoint Input menu Waypoint Waypoint Number Waypoint Scroll Latitude Longitude Planned Speed Waypoint Comment Waypoint Input Yi Waypoint Input LAT LON Planned Speed Comment 35 00 290 N 139701 702 E 10 00kn 35 04 440 N 138 56 899 Waypoint Scroll Exit Waypoint Waypoint Waypoint Input Character Insert Addition Delete 3 7 3 1 Open the Waipoint Input Menu Procedures 1 Open the Waypoint Input menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 6 Waypoint Input When transmitting it can not be open Japan Radio Ltd 3 76 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 3 2 Adding a Waypoint Add New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the ADD button The new latitude of waypoint is reversed 3 Enter a latitude longitude and a planned speed A Waypoint will be added For the input method on the latitude longitude and numeric value input screen s
236. be placed in transmission state the master display unit must be placed in transmission state If the master display unit is moved from the transmission state to the transmission standby state the slave display unit 1s forcibly placed in transmission standby state When they are in transmission standby state is shown in the alarm indication lower right of the display and the alarm sounds A slave display unit cannot control tune Tune 15 controlled by the master display unit Slave is shown in the transmitter pulse length upper left of the display Range change for a slave display unit 1s limited by the range and pulse length repetition frequency of the master display unit As a rule a greater range than the range of the master display unit cannot be set for a slave display unit However if the transmitter pulse length of a slave display unit is identical to the master display unit s and the repetition frequency is within the master display unit s a greater range than the master display unit s can be selected for the slave display unit When the master display unit narrows the range or changes the transmitter Japan Radio Ltd A 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3144 Interswitch Unit gt A 3 REFERENCE pulse length the range of the slave display unit may be forcibly changed In this case Master Range CHG is shown in the alarm indication lower right of the display and the alarm sounds A 3 4 Setti
237. cal Alarm Japan Radio Ltd 7 90 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 4 Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed The item 1s switched Setting of alarm sound On The alarm sound is not stopped when acknowridgement have received The alarm sound is stopped when acknowridgement have received Setting of alarm indication Lightning The alarm indication brinking is stopped when acknowridgement have received Brinking The alarm indication brinking is not stopped when acknowridgement have received Acknowledge State Setting of ALR sentence Add acknowridgement to ALR sentence WUNACK Add no acknowridgement unrecognized to ALR sentence 7 2 8 6 Setting the Alarm Buzzer Sound Output Mode This function enables the control of alarm buzzer 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External ACK Setting menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System 4 Sound Output Mode 3 Select the function to be used On ofi Setting and Ararm Function Alarm Setting Operation Operation CPA New Lost NAV system ISW Miss Target On D Off1 D D off2 D 3 D 2 D D Followed by Buzzer Volume menu setting 2 Alarm Buzzer is turned off 3 If Relay Output menu is turned on when Alam Buzzer is tu
238. ce D of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10 longer than the distance to the optical horizon The distance D 1s given by the following formula D 2 23 fh fh NM Height m of radar scanner above sea level h Height m of a target above sea level Fig 6 2 1s a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the curve of the earth surface the normal propagation D Earth h2 Targets Fig 6 1 RADAR wave with the horizon 6 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON h 2 m 100 660 600 p 200 400 hl m D NM 2i Height of Target Height of RADAR Scanner Detective Range Fig 6 2 Maximum detection range of a target When the height of own ship s scanner is 10 m for instance l A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to have a height of 660 m or more li If the height of a target is 10 m the radar range has to be approx 15 nm However the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions that is the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those conditions Japan Radio Ltd 6 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 2 STRENGTH OF
239. cedures 1 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button Selected items for Devicel or Device2 will be displayed 2 Left click button corresponding to the device in which data to be displayed is saved The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed Left click the 1 Exit button The File Manager menu will close Japan Radio Ltd 3 128 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING 3 1 2 RECEIVE PORT SETTING The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN The purpose of JRC LAN 16 interoperation with other JRC systems The JRC systems are synchronized with datum in JRC LAN network NOTE If the connection is not suggested from JRC office don t connect PC or other maker s system to JRC LAN Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower radar system performance Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower that performance 3 12 1 Receive Port Setting RX Port Select ports for receiving signals from sensors There are two methods for receiving signals specifying a port for each sensor or using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports 1 Open the RX Port Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 6 NAV Equipment Setting 6 RX Port 2 Seta port for each sensor Settable sensor signals Heading Speed A
240. cel all files Target Device 1 erase information Track Device 2 erase selected file Remain selected file Internal Total 0 Device 2 Processor saved select and information Exit Device 1 file list cancel all files Copy file from device 2 to device 1 Message scroll Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content Own Track Number of data points for own ship s track 7000 points maximum Remain Number of remaining data points of own ship s track that can be saved Target Track The number of other ships trails up to 20 targets Remain The remaining number of other ships trails to be saved Mark Line Number of mark and line points made with user map up to 20000 items Remain Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved WPT Number of data points of created waypoints 512 points maximum Remain Remaining waypoints that can be saved Route Number of data points of created routes 1 route maximum Remain Remaining routes that can be saved Internal Total Total number of data points The file name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the file name list will scroll the list 3 123 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD 3 11 1 1 Copy Internal Information to Card Copy Int
241. ciation 5 38 5 4 1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical Association 5 38 5 4 2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical Association Setting 5 38 5 4 3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set 5 39 5 5 ALARM DISPEA uo oe Ro 5 40 5 5 1 5 41 5 5 2 Alarm for New Target Acquired Automatic Acquisition Zone NEW Target etd 5 42 5 5 3 Lost Target Alarm Lost iere eiie cine cta retur 5 42 55 4 5 43 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 ote obit 5 44 5 6 1 Past Position Past POSN 5 44 5 6 2 Target Ship s Tracks Target Track 5 45 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 5 54 5 7 1 Trial Maneuvering the True Vector Mode 5 55 5 7 2 Trial Maneuvering the Relative Vector Mode 5 56 5 7 3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function 5 57 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARAT
242. clutter use the RAIN dial In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low unwanted waves may remain being judged as targets Thus use the automatic clutter suppression mode together with the video process mode Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function Off Disables the automatic clutter suppression function Select off when rain snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the ship is in a bay AUTO Sea Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter and performs the most suitable sea clutter suppression processing Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind direction AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression processing Land like islands can be displayed naturally Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land there is no effect of suppressing rain snow clutter AUTO Sea Rain Along with AUTO Sea AUTO Rain automatically detects the strength of rain snow clutter and performs the most suitable rain snow clutter suppression processing When rain clouds are scattered about AUTO Rain performs rain snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain cloud areas Since land is recognized as rain clouds land videos become obscure Japan Radio Ltd 3 116 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER page 2 1 7 PL Pulse Length Sets the standard transmitter pulse l
243. cquisition activation zone is turned on The mark and target ID number are put to an acquired target and move with the target The vectors are displayed within 1 minute AIS targets are activated Off acquisition activation zone is turned off The acquisition activation zone will disappear from the radar display but the system continues to track the acquired target The activated AIS targets remain activate 5 15 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 2 Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone Make AZ 1 Open the AZ menu by following menu operations AZ The AZ Menu will appear 2 Left click the item button of 9 AZ1 4 Make 22 The range setting of the acquisition activation zone 1 AZI or acquisition activation zone 2 AZ2 will be started 3 Setthe starting azimuth and range by turning the EBL dial and VRM dial and left click 4 Setthe ending azimuth and range by turning the EBL dial and VRM dial and left click The acquisition activation zone will be determined 5 2 1 2 Manual Acquisition ACQ MANUAL If more targets are acquired manually in the condition that the NOTE maximum number of targets are under tracking the targets cannot acquired 1 Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired and press the ACQ MANUAL key The target
244. ct of suppressing sea clutter returns and rain snow clutter returns heightens Recommended condition for selection In bays harbors where targets are densely crowded Rough sea state due to torrential rain or stormy weather With selected The normal transmitter pulse length is set Both range resolution and gain are appropriately set Recommended condition for selection General navigation With selected The transmitter pulse becomes longer and gain improves Small targets are zoomed and are easy to observe When the sea state is bad detection performance decreases Recommended condition for selection Detection of small targets in good weather conditions Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used and the observation range being used For usable pulse width see Section 11 2 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 3 25 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 3 Target Enhance ENH The dimension of video display 15 enlarged to enhance a target Procedures 1 Left click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar display The target enlargement levels are switched ENH Off ENHLevell ENHLevel2 ENHLevel3 gt ENH Off Po Effect of target enlargement ENH Off ENH Level1 ENH Level2 ENH Level3 NOTE Expansion off Expansion small Expansion medium Expansion large
245. ction never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at the close range Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited When using the AUTO RAIN function make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level See also the Section 3 2 8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed 3 2 6 1 Using the manual rain snow clutter suppression mode 1 Adjust the rain snow clutter returns of the display by turning the AUTO RAIN dial until targets can be easily observed Turning RAIN dial clockwise suppresses rain snow clutter returns Turning RAIN dial counterclockwise intensifies rain snow clutter returns When the RAIN dial is turned clockwise the rain snow clutter suppression function suppresses rain snow clutter returns and gets targets hidden by rain snow clutter returns to appear of the display However be careful that excessive suppression may cause small targets to be overlooked Since the rain snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter the suppression efficiency improves when the RAIN dial is used with the SEA dial In general turn the RAIN dial fully to the left the factory default if you lost the appropriate settings The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green l
246. ctorial Indication Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any danger to you and or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation Such indications and their meanings are as follows Please understand them before you read this manual This indication is shown where incorrect N DANGER equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries This indication is shown where any person is N WARNING supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly This indication is shown where any person is CAUTION supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly Examples of Pictorial Indication WARNING Detailed contents of CAUTION Electric Shock in the example on the left is shown in the mark The A mark represents CAUTION including DANGER and Electric Shock The mark represents prohibition Detailed contents of the prohibited action Disassembling Prohibited in the example on the left is shown in the mark Disassembling Prohibited Prohibited Disconnect the Instruction power plug The mark represents instruction Detailed contents of the instruction Disconnect the po
247. d Ship name Phone Fax Radar general model name JMA Serial No i Write the full model name correctly Check the following items in the order of the number and check the applicable answer between YES or NO If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO explain in detail in the item 16 others No Check Item Result 1 Power be turned on lamp on the Operation unit is lit YES NO 2 A few minutes after powering on it will become standby status YES NO When powering on or TX ON LCD monitor something is lit YES NO YES 6 Fixed marker is displayed YES NO 6 is displayed YES NO 7 7 While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum GAIN YES maximum IR OFF and range 48 NM 8 Target reflection echo is displayed YES NO 9 Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal YES NO 10 EBL is displayed YES NO 11 Cursor mark moves YES NO 12 GYRO course be set and normally displayed YES NO LOG speed can be normally displayed YES NO 14 Target tracking function works normally YES NO 15 X the failures items marked NO in the above 1 to 14 are switched over to the other unit 16 Others Error message etc i If result is NO then check the fuse Refer to Section 9 1 2 Operation Checking and Section 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING li Check these items at transmission iii Funct
248. d SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 49 0 and 42 Sea clutter suppression Sea mode Rain and snow clutter suppression Rain mode switching Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter suppression rain and snow clutter suppression and tune The bar on the left side indicates the position of the dial The mode is switched to manual AUTO automatic whenever the button is clicked If rain and snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode sea clutter suppression 1s switched to an automatic mode also Upper Right of the display 9 EBL1 numeric value indication 2 Mark font line pattern true relative switching switching D Cursor mode switching 3 Mark color line color LC A switching Cursor lt AUTO 2C 4 Cursor bearing T 300 9 55 17 967 N 1 1 starting point numeric value display NM pie true relative switching RPM TES mode switching 1 VRM1 3 10 2 EBL2 starting point EBL1 adjustment EBL2R 199 7 NT mode switching VRMZ 252 NM VRM adjustment EN pan P D 13 Parallel index line 2 M 7 EBL2 adjustment VRM2 adjustment EBL2 numeric value indication Parallel index line true relative switching starting point mode switching Cursor mode switching The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button 1s pressed
249. d left click The Waypoint to be corrected is specified The cursor display becomes a 47 cursor mark and a rubber band is displayed 3 71 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4 Move the cursor to new coordinates and left click The coordinates of the Waypoint are corrected and then the Waypoint correcting mode is cancelled Example 25 Ow M 1087 M 1087 064T 7 8 00 d ad 8 00KT 12 0kn 7 Koz 7 120kn 026 Rubber band ey Waypoint that is to have its position corrected Cross Planned Course bm Qoa 060T lt 105 12 0k D 8 00kn 25 Click at this position dd 3 7 2 4 Correcting Planned Speed Correct Planned Speed Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system 1s corrected Procedures 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence 2 Left click the _ 4 Correct Planned Speed button The Planned Speed correcting mode is selected 3 Left click the 1 Planned Speed button The Planned Speed input screen will appear Enter a numeric value of new Planned Speed Japan Radio Ltd 2 72 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4 On the radar display put the cursor on the line extending be
250. de RFS di BEL Eus EU I ER DEA me dd Der E J EN ld EH et HAI SED DANG VAT TO Fig 1 2 Outline Drawing of Display Unit Type NCD 9170 Japan Radio Ltd qe JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS AN 16667 2709 8 1110 SOL NOW LEC 974 DY 4 LAIN J189 bw Bere 9 94 6 3 BY oc BE LINN GZ XONddV 55 9T 0007 0002 OF 0002 0001 VF 0001 007 GEF 007 0 GIF 0241 06 OE 9 Gr 9 LET YRS XI A NS ZINK oF QF 0007 0002 OF 0002 000 Ct es 000 107 007 0 qur 021 OE qt IF 06 9 24058 9 E SNOILVIA3O SNOLLVIA3O ve TWNOISN3IATG JY NOISN3AIG J3N 11 0 SNOISN3AIQ 37HSSIAMH3d 3 IBISSINHZd 3N 1100 jHvid30Qv LONHO 100 H3HID 1 1 550 19 IN3S Y N O 109 0 15 YOLINON y EAB Exige SONA SNOISN3ALQ 4 LNOYS ON r ee 51708 3789 Fig 1 3 Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit NWZ 178 Desktop type opt
251. detail below 3 1 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 1 OPERATION FLOW 3 1 1 Power ON and Start the System AN CAUTION A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is o instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar In this case the power should be turned on again Attention Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again Japan Radio Ltd den JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 1 OPERATION FLOW Procedures 1 Check that the ship s mains are turned on 2 Press POWER key The system is turned on and the preheating time is displayed Preheat is indicated at the upper left of the radar display 3 Wait until the preheating time is over When the preheating time is over the preheating time screen disappears and Preheat at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby 4 Press TX STBY key The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating Standby at the upper left of the radar display changes to Transmit 1 It will be displayed Tuning OK at the upper left of the radar display The radar system is optimum If not displayed Radar should be checked by a service engineer The radar does not start transmission if you press TX STBY NOTE key while _ Preheat 5 indicated 3 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt
252. dicating land 1s displayed in some cases Furthermore because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow the ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and snow clutter may decrease The amount of attenuation depends on the transmission frequency antenna beam width and the pulse length Fig 6 4 and Fig 6 5 show examples in which detection distance 1s reduced due to the influence of precipitation Because of this a target which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by an X band radar pulse width of 0 8us when it was not raining may become dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per hour Furthermore when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar target detection distance decreases less when the S band radar is used which means it is influenced less by precipitation Japan Radio Ltd 6 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW Predpitation of16 mm hr Pulse width 0 05us F Predpitation of4 mm hr Pulse width0 05us 9 Predpitation of 16 mm hr Pulse width 0 8us H Predpitation of4 mm hr Pulse width0 8us Detection distance while it is raining NM 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Detection distance while it is not rainning NM Fig 6 4 Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to precipitation
253. e terminals For disposal of batteries be sure to follow the local laws and regulations For detail consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business office or local government 10 1 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 10 DISPOSAL gt 10 3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS 1 0 3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS A SER EW RR ER Names amp Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements J 3X 44 Type JMA 9100 Series JMA 7100Series 4 RADAR SEHE CR PAVE AZ BR Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part name RS NUES Pb Hg Cd Cr6 PBB PBDE ZR RU Scanner Unit UR fi PIG Transmitter receiver Unit EM Ay g Inboard Unit Display Unit OperationUnit X X X X X X RADAR Process Unit Ah wat 1524 Peripherals Options H2 Cables Documennts SEA TME VAM PUE EA E EEST 11306 2006 IRER A F o Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in SJ T 11363 2006 KRZA EEA EBD EEA BE E A AER BUE S T 1 1363 2006 PREE AY IR ESK Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T 11363 2006 Ja
254. e Display Units A 7 A 2 5 Operating Connection Pattern Files File Operations A 8 A 2 6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units A 9 A 3 REFERENCE M A 10 A 3 1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern A 10 A 3 2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern A 10 A 3 3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit A 10 A 3 4 Setting at Installation cuins dive desecemeteoctnewnsacetexeueves A 11 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3144 Interswitch Unit gt A 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW A 1 1 Overview Interswitch NQE 3141 1s equipment that enables free changeover between radar display units installed on the bridge and antenna units having different characteristics If display unit is turned off or malfunctioned the scanner unit can be controlled by other display unit If interswitch unit had malfunctioned the radar system is switched to standalone mode Up to 8 units can be changed over When the connected scanner is changed following setting values are automatically loaded Tune Adjustment Section 7 1 3 Tuning Tune Adjustment Bearing Adjustment Section 7 1 4 Bearing Adjustment Range Adjustment Section 7 1 5 Range Adjustment Antenna Height Section 7 1 8 Antenna Height Setting Antenna Height
255. e entered name is written into the selected device as a file name Japan Radio Ltd 3 126 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD 3 11 1 4 Erase File Erase 1 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button Selected items for Devicel will be displayed 2 Left click button corresponding to the device in which data to be erased is saved The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed 3 Select data to be erased Left click button one more time will cancel the selection 4 Left click Erase button Confirmation Window will appear 5 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected file will be erased 3 11 1 5 Initializing a card Format 1 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button or the device 2 selection button Selection items for Devicel or Device2 will appear 2 Left click the button which corresponds to the system device where data to be displayed is saved The File Manager window will appear 3 Putthe format for the device to be initialized and Left click button Confirmation Window will appear 4 Left click the 1 Yes button Initialization will be executed 3 127 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD 3 11 1 6 Showing data saved on the card Show Card Pro
256. e of Connection Pattern with 2 Display Units If two display units are installed a connection pattern needs to be selected 1 Open the Inter Switch menu with 2 Display Units 2 Move the cursor onto the Connection pattern see Section A 2 2 Inter Switch Menu and Section a Connection pattern to be changed and left click The connection pattern will be selected and 3 Set Section b Set will blink 3 Left click the 3 Set button The connection pattern will be changed Japan Radio Ltd A 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION A 2 4 Change of Connection Pattern with 3 or More Display Units If three or more display units are installed the layout of connection patterns needs to be set 1 Open the Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units 2 Move the cursor onto the display unit Section b Display unit connected as master or Section c Display unit connected as slave to be changed and left click The selected display unit will be highlighted To deselect the display unit left click key again 3 Move the cursor to the change destination display unit and left click he selected display unit in step 2 will be switched to the change destination display unit and 3 Set Section f Set will blink If the change destination is empty control will move and 3 Set will blink 4 Left click the 3 Set button The c
257. e radar display 2 Move the cross cursor mark own ship s display position to a desired position by using the trackball While the cross cursor mark is moving the own ship s display position moves following the cross cursor mark When it moves to a position outside 66 of the display radius the center position 15 limited to a position within 66 of the display radius 3 Press the trackball button on the left key The own ship s display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark HL HL Press the ENT key The own ship s display position will be fixed Move the cursor mark to a desired position Returning Own Ship s Position to the Center Procedures 1 Left click the Off Center button for 2 seconds The own ship position is returned to the center of the display Japan Radio Ltd 3 30 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 8 Display Radar Trails Trails Other ship s movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and directions of their trails serving for collision avoidance The trail length varies according to setting 3 4 8 1 Changing the length of the trail 1 Left click the Radar trails display time button located at the upper left of the display RADAR trails display time Values of the length of the radar trails are switched Trails length setting Short mode Off gt 15sec 30sec
258. e starboard side of the motor 11 Remove the motor s 2 N ZA GEE diner 2 4 ZY INP N Winns Ww AMAA Remove the motor 8 15 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 12 Grease the gear wheel of the new motor 13 Install the new motor in the scanner unit and secure it using the j hexagonal bolts Tighten the bolts with the specified torque 380 kgf
259. e switched gt Day2 Day3 gt Dusk Day2 Dusk lt Night The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode see Section 3 8 5 Set Radar Display Display Setting 3 4 13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance PANEL Adjust brilliance of the operation panel according to the ambient lighting conditions 1 Press the PANEL key Alternatively left click the O button located at the lower right of the radar display In consideration of the ambient brightness adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read the characters on the operation panel but does not glare The PANEL key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment Japan Radio Ltd 3 36 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 14 Set True Bearing When the GYRO I F is used to enter a gyro signal there 1s a rare case in which a true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing value indicated by this radar system In that case adjust the true bearing value of this system so that it matches the value indicated by the master gyro 1 Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing value by performing the menu operation below _ Main 6 NAV Equipment Setting 1 Gyro Setting 2 Enter a value indicated by the maste
260. ect the input method Data Base Selection of of previously input ship names When this method is selected a list of ship names that have been input by selecting Input will be displayed Input Input of new ship name When this method is selected the ship name Name input window will open 5 2 5 1 Entering a new ship name Input 5 Input a new ship name Up to 8 characters can be input as a ship name For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character The input name by selecting Input is saved in Data Base 5 2 5 2 Selecting one of previously input ship names Data Base 5 Press the numeric key corresponding to the ship name to be selected The selected ship name will be entered G Data Base can contain 30 ship names Japan Radio Ltd 5 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 6 Reference Target Reference The system can display the own ship s speed To do so it sets a reference target by tracking a target for which ground fixed Attention The reference target function is to be used if the own ship s speed cannot be displayed normally due to trouble such as a speed sensor malfunction Do not use the reference target function except in emergencies If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new reference target is set the displayed speed may take
261. ed 3 6 5 Save User Map 3 6 5 1 Loading navigation data Load User Map 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map gt 7 File Operation 3 Left click the item button of and select the card slot Slotl and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched 4 Left click the item button of 2 Load Mode and select Aii Ovew Add and of the Load Mode items are switched When Add is selected new data is added to the savedd data When Overwrite is selected the saved data is overwritten Japan Radio Ltd 3 62 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5 Left click the 3 Load button The list of navigation data saved in the system will be displayed 6 Left click the button for the file to be loaded Confirmation Window will appear 7 Left click the 1 Yes button The selected navigation data will be loaded and displayed on the radar display 3 6 5 2 Discarding navigation data Unload User Map Procedures 1 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map gt 7 File Operation 2 Left click the 4 Unload button Unload Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click the 1 Yes button The saved navigation data will be discarded 3 6 5 3 Storing navigation data Save User
262. ed by the radar equipment only in a rare case In this case perform the following procedure to adjust the true bearing value of the radar equipment to the value of the master gyro Procedures 1 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true bearing value setting menu Main 6 NAV Equipment Setting 1 Gyro Setting 2 Input the master gyro value to the value input screen For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value 7 1 8 Antenna Height Setting Antenna Height Set the height of radar antenna above sea level Do not change this setting carelessly 1 Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance 2 Open the Serviceman Menu 3 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Antenna Height setting menu 1 Adjust Menu 4 TXRX Adjustment 1 Antenna Height The Antenna Height menu will open 7 7 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 4 Select the setting that matches the antenna height measured in step 1 7 1 9 Setting of CCRP CCRP Setting Set the own ship s CCRP location radar antenna installation location and GPS installation location CCRP Up to four locations can be input One location selected when used Radar antenna Up to eight radar antennas can be input Automatically selected in respo
263. ee Section 3 3 4 5 Entering latitude longitude and Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character 3 7 33 Adding a Comment Comment New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the Waypoint Scroll button Left click to show the desired comment 3 Left click the Comment button to be added The comment of waypoint is reversed 4 Enter a comment A comment will be added For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character 3 77 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 34 Correcting latitude longitude of a Waypoint LAT LON The latitude longitude of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the Waypoint Scroll button Left click to show the desired latitude longitude 3 Left click the Latitude Longitude button to be corrected The latitude of waypoint is reversed 4 Enter a latitude longitude A Waypoint will be corrected For the input method on the latitude longitude input screen see Section 3 3 4 5 Entering latitude longitude 3 3 5 Correcting Planned Speed Planned Speed Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system 1s corrected 1 Open the Waipoint Input menu 2 Left click the Waypoint Scroll button
264. eed numeric value indication is switched to T true relative whenever this button 1s clicked 2 27 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Graph information Wind direction speed Wind 225 19 1 3 5 D Wind direction speed numeric value indication true relative switching D Wind direction speed numeric value indication true relative switching The wind direction speed numeric value indication 1s switched to TI true relative whenever this button 1s clicked Menu 4 Main menu D Digital information display 7 Parallel index linemenu T mean Jua 2 Automatic acquisition 9 9 TT AIS 2 activation zone AZ menu Track Route 3 Own ship s track menu 9 User map menu 5 AIS menu 6 Route menu D Digital information display If this button is clicked while the menu screen is open the menu is closed and control returns to the digital information display This function switches between the tracked target AIS target display and navigation information or the course bar and so on 2 Target Tracking TT menu If this button is clicked the TT Menu is opened 3 Own track menu If this button is clicked the Own Track Menu is opened 4 Main menu If this button is clicked the Main Menu is opened Japan Radio Ltd 2 28 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Ma
265. electric shock When finding a victim of electric shock turn off the power source and earth the circuit immediately If it is impossible to turn off the circuit move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly In case of electric shock breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center the brain If the shock is not so strong artificial respiration may recover breathing When shocked by electricity the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity In this case it is necessary to perform an emergency measure immediately Japan Radio Co Ltd 9 9 FIRST AID TREATMENTS 99 9 First aid treatments As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition do not move him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately Once started it should be continued rhythmically 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident but the rescuer may also get an electric shock Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie clothes belt etc a Examine the victim s pulse b Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to hi
266. ength in each range When the range is called the pulse range 1s used 3 1 7 Video setting menu Process Setting Operation 1s the same as that of the Process Setting menu described in Section 3 8 1 Set Radar Signal Processing Process Setting page 4 1 7 Radar trails settings Trails Setting same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu described in Section 3 8 2 Set Radar Trails RADAR Trails Setting page 5 1 Gain Offset Corrects gain while the function mode is called Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the video process mode and the interference rejection level gain needs fine adjustment for always obtaining the highest level The gain correction function saves the correction value set by the gain adjust in each function mode so it can obtain the highest gain without the gain adjust being operated when the function mode 1s changed To set high gain set a value on the side 66 22 set low gain set a value the side When the radar interference rejection level is increased the noise level 1s 55 lowered Thus set a gain correction value to the side When the video process mode 35can CORREL 4Scan CORREL 55 CORREL is used the noise level is lowered Thus set a gain correction 2 value to the side When the video process mode Remain or Peak Hold is used 66 22 noise 1s hard to disap
267. erator can easily judge whether the target is approaching the own ship While the own ship is moving the system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets True motion The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target trails irrespective of the own ship s position The operator can easily judge the course and speed of the target The system does not plot the trails of land and other fixed targets Trails HL Land Trails True Motion Trails Ship Relative Motion Trails Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode With true motion TM Only the true motion trails mode is available mode With relative motion The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails RM mode mode isselectable RM R is indicated while the relative motion trails mode is active RM T is indicated while the true motion trails mode is active While the true motion trails mode is active this system enables the continuous use of true motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed e Motion display mode change TM RM TM reset Bearing display mode change Center move Off Center MAP display on off Map Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary G for using the true motion trails mode Japan Radio Ltd 399 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 8 4 Changing Motion Mode of Trai
268. ernal gt Card Procedures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button Selected items for Devicel will be displayed Left click the 1 Internal button among the selection items Internal is selected Left click the device 2 selection button Selected items for Device2 will be displayed Left click button corresponding to the device to which data is to be copied The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed Put the cursor on the data to be copied and Left click button Left click button one more time will cancel the selection Left click the e button The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear Enter the file name to be saved Up to 10 characters can be entered For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character After the data has been entered Confirmation Window will appear Left click the 1 Yes button The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name Up to the maximum number of items described on the previous page can be saved in the device With regard to the capacity for saving data data can be saved on a flash memory card as a file and those files can be saved until the flash memory card is full Japan Radio Ltd 3 124 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 11 USING CARD
269. es and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly and repeat this combination In case of two rescuers One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow into his mouth twice and they shall repeat this combination Perform the cardiac massage and mouth to mouth respiration 3 Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes When the both have returned to normal stop the artificial respiration serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully Commit the victim to a medical specialist depending on his condition Never give him alcoholic drinks To let him recover from the mental shock it 1s necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the necessary treatment ji a Fig 2 Cardiac massage Japan Radio Ltd iv PREFACE Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment JMA 9172 SA This equipment 15 a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ships This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter receiver unit a LCD display unit and a scanner unit as its main units Before operating the equipment be sure to read this instruction manual carefully for correct operation Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs d Japan Radio Co Ltd Before Operation 6 Pi
270. es can be displayed Up to 10 messages of addressed message and up to 10 messages of broadcast message can be displayed If the number of messages exceeds 10 the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted 1 Displaying Message Selected from List Message Japan Radio Co Ltd 5 30 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 1 Open the Message menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 9 TT Test Menu 2 Left click Addressed Message Or Broadcast Message Addressed messages list or broadcast messages list are displayed Each list shows ship names and message received time For an unread message is displayed to the left of the item number 3 Left click the item button to display the message The message will appear 2 Displaying Specified Target s Message 1 Display AIS target information If there are messages from the target a message mark will be displayed in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display 2 Left click the unread message display button in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display The message will appear 3 Deleting Message Delete 1 Left click 1 Delete while the message is displayed The Confirmation Window will appear 2 Left click i ves to delete the message The message will be deleted and the ship name and message received time will di
271. estore the setting to G the factory default if you lost the appropriate settings he factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line The factory default level is assigned for Factory Default every function mode See the Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER Japan Radio Ltd 3 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball The cross cursor mark 1 used for position designation and other purposes in various operating procedures The cross cursor mark moves in coupling with the trackball If the trackball 1s rotated up and down or right and left the cross cursor mark follows the move of the trackball Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system 3 3 1 1 Operation inside Radar Video PPI The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video mE The distance bearing and latitude longitude are digitally indicated in the cursor bearing distance latitude and longitude fields located at the upper right of the radar display When moving the current center position use the cross cursor mark to designate a new center position e Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines Use the cross cursor mark to manually acquire a target in the target tracking AIS display functions 3 3 1
272. expanded When an EBL or VRM is operated the value display of each marker is expanded While the menu is open any display is not expanded Off Does not expand any display On Expands the display in digital information area 2 The expanded display remains for 5 seconds after the operation of each marker and then it will disappear Always On Expands the display in digital information area 2 3 8 8 2 Numeric NAV INFO Determine whether to display the numeric values of received navigation information One of two digital information areas 1s used to display data e When navigation data is displayed the sizes of the target tracking TT AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased Navigation information of the water depth water temperature tidal current wind direction velocity and destination is displayed with numeric values eft click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display The navigation data display function 1s switched between On and Off Off Does not display the numeric values of navigation information Areal Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1 Area2 Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2 3 8 8 3 Depth Graph Setting The Depth Graph Setting menu will appear 3 107 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERA
273. f in order to ensure safety operation Japan Radio Co Ltd A 12 Appendix B DRAWINGS DRAWINGS B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit B 1 2 NN MEME osculis c B 3 ERN B 4 B 5 NCES 2A R Z B 6 B 1 6 NCE 5322 Rf t B 7 B 2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit B 8 B 3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit B 9 B 4 Primary Power System Diagram B 10 B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit 1 B 11 BSI I 22 0 A E M B 12 B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit B 13 B 6 1 1532 110 14 B 6 2 M NKE 1532 AG22UW B 15 B 7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram B 16 B 7 1 JMA 9172 SA 2 2 1 21 1 B 17 Japan Radio Co Ltd B72 B 8 GIROTE sueta 19 B 9 Inter Switch UNIT iso exces bin So oa a B 21 B 9 1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram B
274. ference target function will be set to on or off On A reference target is set Off reference target is canceled 5 Left click the speed sensor switching button in the Own Ship Information located at the upper right of the display and select REF The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target will be displayed When a reference target 1s set the symbol display is changed to C R Only one target can be set as a reference target When a new reference target is set the previously set reference target is canceled 5 2 7 Operation Test TT Test Menu AN CAUTION This function is provided to test if the target tracking S function is operating normally Thus do not use the function except when you test the target tracking function In particular if the operation test mode is used during navigation pseudo targets appear on the radar display and they are confused with actual targets Do not use the mode during navigation Otherwise an accident may result The following functions are available for testing the target tracking function Test Video Makes an operation check on the target detection circuit TT Simulator Generates pseudo targets on the radar display in order to test if the target tracking function is operating normally Status Displays the status of the target tracking function Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring tracking a target Japan Radio Co Ltd 5
275. ft click the item button corresponding to the display method to be set On Displays target ID numbers Off Hides target ID numbers Target Track Displays target ID number with AIS track Ship s Name Displays the ship s name If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing set Target Number Display to off to view the radar display easily An ID number or ship s name is always displayed for only G targets with which numeric value is displayed 5 3 7 Setting AIS Filter AIS Filter Setting 5 3 7 1 About an AIS filter By setting an AIS filter an AIS target in the area can be displayed by priority or only the targets in the area can be displayed An AIS filter is initially set in a circle having a radius of 20 nm from the CCRP If 301 or more AIS targets exist in the filter range they are displayed in the priority order explained in Section 5 1 2 Definitions of Symbols 5 3 7 2 Types of AIS Filters Filter Type There are the following 3 types of AIS filters Range A filter is set in a circle with a set range as the radius Sector A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the bow as reference Zone A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two ranges with the bow as reference 5 33 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 1 Left click the AIS filter mode switc
276. g condition are stored in FUNC as factory default settings In most cases to select the FUNC mode which fit in the current sea state 1s lead to get the appropriate image easily and quickly So It is recommended to enable the FUNC mode Procedures 1 Press USER key Press EH T FUNC mode switch button aa DEC and select the mode which fit Function ENH Level2 FUNC mode in the current sea state The four preset modes is assigned on the FUNC mode For details refer to the Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY Ran USER Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range for example bays and coasts where many boats and ships are running Importance is attached to resolution Coast Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range for example Deep Sea the open sea Importance is attached to long range gain Use this mode when many rain snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected in stormy weather Importance is attached to rain snow clutter and sea clutter suppression and gain slightly lowers Storm Rai Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain snow am clutter is strong Importance is attached to rain snow clutter suppression and gain slightly lowers 2 Make adjustments by turning the GAIN dial the SEA dial and the RAIN dial when it is necessary In most cases it may be get the appropriate image Current Level It is recommended to r
277. ge Default data Standard data of each function mode that users can change Data that can be called Procedures 1 Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Saved data that can be called by pressing the USER key Main gt 3 RADAR Menu 1 Process Setting 8 User Function Setting FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING Factory set data Default data Data that can be called Current data 5 gt femen RU Present Fishnet Fishnet Storm Storm FUNC4 Calm Calm Rain Rain 18 Bird Bird Long Long Buoy Buoy User1 User 1 User 2 User 2 page 1 1 Mode Calls the default value of the mode and saves it for the function number page 1 6 Save Present State The currently operating state can be saved for the function number Use this function to save the state of good setting that will be frequently used page 5 8 Set Mode Default e Saves the setting of the current function number as the default setting of the mode page 5 9 Initialize Changes the memory contents of the mode which is used with the current function number back to the factory setting 3 119 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 10 USE USER SETTING 3 10 USE USER SETTING The operation status of the radar is recorded If the system is opera
278. ge 0 1nm 24nm 32nm Available all range scale Tracking Number of Target 100 Targets AUTO Tracking Tracking range 0 1nm 24nm 32nm Available all range scale Presentation Display mode TM True Motion RM Relative Motion Azimuth mode North up Head up Course up Vector mode True Relative Display Vector Length Variable 1 to 60 min 1min step Past Position True Relative Display Number of Dots 10 points Display Interval Time 0 5 1 2 4 min Time to Display Vector Within 1min Time to Stabilize Vector Within 3min Alarm Auto acquisition Zone 2 sector Setting Range AZ1 0 5 32nm AZ2 0 5 32nm Alarm Indication Symbol on Display Visible Audible Alarm Safe Limits Setting Condition CPA LIMIT 0 1 to 9 9NM CPA TCPA TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99 minute Setting Condition Safe Target gt 0 TCPA TCPA gt TCPA LIMIT Danger Target CPA LIMIT S TCPA LIMIT Alarm Indication tatus Symbo Alarm Audible Safe Target O wht OFF OFF Danger Target red CPA TCPA ON Lost Target Symbol on Display Visible Audible Alarm Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 4 Targets True Bearing Range True Course True Speed CPA TCPA BCR BCT Own Ship s Data Course and Speed Trial Maneuver Manual Setting Trial Course 0 to 359 97 Trial Speed 0 to 100 kn Accuracy of Display Complied with IMO Requirement System Failure Alarm Visible Audible Alarm Speed Inpu
279. gence or force major such as natural disaster and fire the product will be repaired with charges Repair after the Warranty Period If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair the repair of it will be made at your own charge upon your request Necessary Information for Repair 9 3 3 Product name model manufacturing date and serial number Trouble conditions as detailed as possible Refer to Radar Failure Check List on page 9 10 e Name of company organization address and telephone number Recommended Maintenance The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the parts used in it though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of operation So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your daily care For maintenance consult with the near by dealer or our sales department Such maintenance will be made with charges For further details of after sale service contact the JRC Offices Japan Radio Ltd 9 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 3 AFTER SALES SERVICE Radar Failure Check List confirm the check items and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact If there is any unclear items contact the ship on which the product is installed and give the correct information on the product G When placing an order for repair of the product it is requested that you coul
280. get Track Color menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 2 Target Track Color 1 All The setting items for All will be displayed 2 Left click the button corresponding to the track display to be set Individual Track color is set individually for ships color name One color is set for all ships Individual setting 3 Left click the button corresponding to the track number to be set The setting items for the selected track number will be displayed 4 Left click the button corresponding to the track color to be set The track color of the selected track number will be set When 1297901 is selected the track numbers Target Track No 1 to and the individual setting for are valid Select a color for each target The color list 1s displayed by left clicking the button corresponding to the item number to be set Select a desired color There are 8 color choices Off White Gray Blue Green Yellow Red 2 Setting for 1 to 10 ships Setting for 11 to 20 ships Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual G is selected Japan Radio Ltd 5 46 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 2 4 Setting of Target Ship s Track Display Target Track Display The target track display function can be turned on off Choices for track display
281. get ship s track data can be set This function is not available when the Target Track Function is G turned off Procedures 1 Open the Track Memory interval menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 4 Track Memory Interval 2 Left click the button corresponding to the interval to be set Select an interval from the following Off 3sec 5sec 10sec 30sec 1min 3min 5min 10min 30min 60min 1NM 3NM 5NM 10NM 5 6 2 6 Clear of Target Ship s Track Clear Track The target ship s track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number If Card T TRK Display is used target ship s tracks displayed G through the card cannot be cleared 1 Clear of Tracks by Setting Color Clear Track Color Procedures 1 Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 5 Clear Track Color The setting items for Clear Track Color will be displayed Japan Radio Ltd 5 48 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 2 Left click the button corresponding to the color of the target tracks to be cleared The Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click 1 Yes to clear the track line All the tracks of the selected color will be cleared 2 Clear of Tracks by Setting Track Number Clear Track Number 1 Open the T TRK menu by pe
282. gets that issues alarm refer to Section 5 3 9 AIS12 Red blinking CPA Limit and TCPA Limit The Setting Values 5 41 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY 5 5 2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone New Target N CAUTION In setting an automatic acquisition zone it is necessary to adjust the gain sea clutter suppression 69 and rain snow clutter suppression to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued for targets undetected The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm when a new target which is not yet acquired goes into this zone For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone refer to Acquiring Target in section 5 2 1 1 Automatic acquisition Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone otatus oymbol on A 1 r m Alarm sound Conditions display characters New target in x New Target Beep sound The alarm is issued automatic pipi pipi when a new target is isiti acquired in the ES Alarm Sones acquisition zone 0 knowledge Red Blinking d np ge When an already acquired target goes into automatic G acquisition zone the alarm message is not displayed and the buzzer does not sound either 5 5 3 Lost Target Alarm Lost Attention
283. gh canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited When using the AUTO SEA function make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level See also the Section 3 2 8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed 3 2 5 1 Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode Procedures 1 Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the SEA dial until targets can be easily observed Turning SEA dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns Turning SEA dial counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by decreasing the receiving gain on a short range Turning the SEA dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter suppression However be careful that excessive suppression causes low signal strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from the radar display It Is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level the factory default if you lost the appropriate settings The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line The factory default level is assigned by every function mode See the Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER Factory Default 3 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 B
284. gs 2NM S OO E Own ships RMT 5 VRMI 2 NN 17 information Transmit 2 5 UTC 2008 07 01 1234 EU 26 pt 4 cs 5514350N n3 AA NON 11 55 234E Fd v mt Target Information TT AIS Umt 15MM 10m Target Past POSN R 05 NM tracking TT AIS information p E j r AIS ID 1 rn Name 9100 7100 SERIES Sian JRCJ MA Digital information Menu Brilliance ul mel Display information MAN All is 190 Data Alarm Lower left Lower right of the display of the display 2 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS gt 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY PPI Automatic acquisition activationzone Association target Own ship s symbol Ship s heading sao OE ES marker Rinas 2NM p ECC ONE CAE T M 1930 4 Past position Ship S d jp r _ i yi e 235 7 E CCRPI testi dne a gt AIS target number Cursor mark Tracked target vector Tracked target ATMEL AlS target vector Tracked target Radar trails symbol Parallel index lines VRM2 on Pw Track 20 Other ship s track EBL 2 csi ua M CPA Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF D
285. h Mode Set how to update the Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached 3 87 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 1 Open the WPT Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 3 WPT Route Operations 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode When next Waypoint has been reached user updates the following Waypoint Manual AUTO When next Waypoint has been reached the following Waypoint is automatically updated 3 7 7 Clear Waypoint Route Data Clear WPT Route Data This function clears waypoint route data from memory Procedures 1 Open the WPT Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 3 WPT Route Operations 2 Left click the button Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click the 1 Yes button A route data will be cleared If data is not copied on the flash memory card option NOTE the data is not be reloaded Japan Radio Ltd 3 88 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 8 Operate Route Data File Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card and data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system With regard to this item only route data can be saved and loaded To save or load own ship s track target track data
286. h for 0 75nm range SP1 MP1 Standard pulse length for 1 5nm range SP1 MP1 MP2 Standard pulse length for 3nm range SP1 MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 Standard pulse length for 6nm range MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 Standard pulse length for 12nm range MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 Standard pulse length for 16nm range LP1 LP2 Option Dynamic range of radar video Narrow Normal Wide Super Wide Radar video noise rejection Off Level1 Level2 Automatic dynamic range control Radar video process switching Off Range FIX AUTO 2nd video process mode PROC Off 3Scan CORREL Video process switching range Range Setting Off On Option Radar trails length Off 15sec True Relative Radar trails plotting threshold Level1 4 Thinning of radar trails Off Level1 3 Superimpose display of time radar trails and Off On continuous radar trails Maximum time for radar trails display Short Middle Long Option Gain correction Transmitting repetition frequency Normal Economy High Power Small target detection mode Off On Fishnet detection mode Off On Default 5m 5 10m 10 20m 20m 3 114 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 3 9 3 Overview of Function Operations User Function Setting The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function setting menu 1 Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main gt 3 RADAR Menu 1 Process Setting 8 User Function Setti
287. he control panel The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked Five levels of settings are available Radar video brilliance switching Adjust the brightness of the radar video echo The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked Four levels of settings are available 4 Tracked target AIS target symbol brilliance switching Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the tracked target AIS target symbol The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked Five levels of settings are available Day night mode switching The day night mode is switched whenever this button 15 clicked gt Day2 Day3 Dusk d Day2 e Day3 Dusk Night User map load If this button is clicked the user created map read menu is opened 7 User setting load If this button is clicked the user setting read menu is opened Japan Radio Ltd 2 30 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS mE EE EM EM NN Alarm D Alarm acknowridgement 2 Error log display Alarm acknowledgment If this button 1 clicked the buzzer sound of the alarm that is currently issued is stopped and the alarm lamp stops blinking If multiple alarms are issued t
288. he fathom is used as the unit of water depth Meters The meter is used as the unit of water depth 3 8 8 4 Wind Graph Setting The Wind Graph Setting menu will appear 1 Wind Graph Display Determine whether to display received wind direction velocity information with a graph One of two digital information areas 1s used to display data When the wind direction speed graph is displayed the sizes of the target tracking TT AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased eft click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display The wind direction speed graph display function 1s switched between On and Off Off Does not display the wind direction speed graph Areal Displays the wind direction speed graph in digital information area 1 Area2 Displays the wind direction speed graph in digital information area 2 2 Wind Speed Unit Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction speed graph m s Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed km h Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed kn Knots are used as the unit of wind speed 3 8 8 5 TEMP Graph Setting The TEMP Graph Setting menu will appear 1 TEMP Graph Display Determine whether to display the graph of the water temperature data that has been received on the radar display e One of two digital information areas is used to display data When the water temperature gr
289. he geodetic system that 1s used with the connected navigation equipment When navigation information 1s loaded the geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved is displayed Make sure that the displayed geodetic system is identical to the one used with the navigation equipment If the two geodetic systems are different the positions of navigation information on the radar display will be shifted Therefore it is important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment 1 Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved Geodetic Procedures 1 Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 6 Geodetic The numeric value input screen for Geodetic will appear 2 Enter the desired geodetic system number The geodetic system is determined For how to input numeric datas on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 2 Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed Geodetic Procedures 1 Load navigation data by referring to Section 3 6 5 1 Loading navigation data Load User Map 2 Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map The geodetic system will be displayed in the 6 Geodetic field Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 66 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
290. he next alarm to be acknowledged is displayed If the button is clicked the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged The alarms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one Alarm log display If this button is clicked the alarm log 15 display 2 31 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Japan Radio Ltd 22 35 E E L i i 15 I i a H B H h 1 I a i I M 1 H 4 I I i I I 11 1 1l Wil SECTION 3 BASIC OPERATION lal i I a i i 1 a I Il Il F pi Fi BASIC OPERATION 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 3 3 3 1 OPERATION FLOW Fri EUN Sn XII xs gu Un NIU KIT DINE 3 1 Power ON and Start the System
291. he radar display Type 4 is selected for the cross cursor mark 4 displayed in the radar display 3 8 5 Set Radar Display Display Setting This system can save combinations of display color and brilliance in accordance with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be easily switched Follow the procedures below to set display color and brilliance to be saved before hand 3 8 5 1 Setting display color Display Color Setting Procedures 1 Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 1 Display Color Setting Display Color Setting menu will appear 3 8 5 2 Day Night e Specify the mode to be changed The following modes are available Day1 Day mode 1 Used under bright lighting conditions Day2 Day mode 2 Used under bright lighting conditions Day3 Day mode 3 Used under bright lighting conditions Dusk Dusk mode Used under dim lighting conditions 3 101 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS Night Night mode Used under dark lighting conditions Setting color of each element e Specify the color for the element The color for the following elements can be specified Outer PPI The color of the background outside radar video PPI is selected Inner PPI The color of the background inside radar video PPI is selected Character The color of the ch
292. hes of the operation panel Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown reverse video at the same time the key is pressed and the name of the pressed key 1s displayed 2 Buzzer Test Checks for the operation panel buzzer The buzzer will sound The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a specified length of time 3 Light Test Checks for the control panel light The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels Japan Radio Ltd 8 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8 3 1 4 Check of the Performance Monitor MON Display The radar system is equipped with an interswitch For checking the performance unit set the interswitch connection to straight i e No 1 scanner is connected to No 1 display unit as the Master Procedures 1 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the 4 MON Display menu Main 9 Test Menu 4 MON Display Blind sector appears on stern direction of ship to check receiver performance Range scale will be automatically changed to 24nm Ci Sea and Rain dial will be automatically changed to minimum and IR ENH PROC and FUNC will be automatically changed to off Push EXIT button it will be returned to former state 2 Check the Transmitter System ATT Value and Receiver System ATT Value If Transmitter System ATT Value down gt 7 0dB o
293. hing Target vector length setting Set a vector length of the tracked target AIS target If this button is clicked the numeric value input screen is opened After setting the length determine the setting by clicking ENT limit setting Set a CPA limit If this button is clicked the numeric value input screen is opened After setting the limit determine the setting by clicking ENT TCPA limit setting Set a TCPA limit If this button is clicked the numeric value input screen is opened After setting the limit determine the setting by clicking ENT 2 24 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Past position display true relative switching The tracked target AIS target past position display is switched to T true past position relative past position whenever the button is clicked This setting is switched together with the target vector display true relative switching Past position display interval switching The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is clicked Past position display interval unit switching The past position display interval unit is switched whenever the button is clicked min gt gt min AlS On Off The AIS display is switched to On Off whenever the button is clicked Tracked target symbol display On Off The tracked target symbol display is sw
294. hing in Target Information located at the upper right of the display and select the filter to be set The AIS filter will be selected 5 3 7 3 Creation of AIS Filter Make AIS Filter Procedures 1 Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 4 AIS Filter Setting 2 Left click 2 Make AIS Filter The mode to make an AIS filter will be activated 1 Setting Range Filter 3 Seta filter range by turning the VRM dial and left click 2 Setting Sector Filter 3 Seta starting bearing by turning the EBL dial and left click 4 Setan ending bearing by turning the EBL dial and left click 3 Setting Zone Filter 3 Seta starting bearing and range by turning the EBL dial and VRM dial and left click Japan Radio Ltd 5 34 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 4 Setan ending bearing and range by turning the EBL dial and VRM dial and left click When the automatic activation function is enabled the filter G range is automatically changed for covering the automatic activation zone Thus the automatic activation zone is always within the filter range 5 3 7 4 AIS Filter Display On Off Filter Display 1 Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 2 4 AIS Filter Setting 2 Left click the item button of 2 Filter Display Filter
295. hort pulse SP middle pulse MP and long pulse LP The pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the same short pulse according to the range that is used and it is displayed as 5 Azimuth display mode switching The azimuth display is switched whenever this button is clicked H Up Head Up gt NUp North Up gt CUP Course Up gt HUP If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the GYTO Setting menu 1s displayed Lower left of the display 4 Radar video processing PROC mode switching 5 Function FUNC Gain adjustment FU 7 Sea clutter suppression Sea adjustment D Double zoom switching 2 Interference rejection IR mode switching 8 Target enhance ENH mode switching NH Levell mode switching E PROC Off FUNC OFF NC Off 9 Sea clutter suppression Sea Gain mode switching Rain and snow clutter suppression Rain mode switching Rain snow clutter suppression Rain adjustment Japan Radio Ltd 2 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Double zoom switching Use this function to enlarge to double the size the display screen of the position specified by the cursor If this button is clicked the zoom mode is set When the cursor is moved to the radar screen and left clicked the screen is enlarged to double the size so that the middle of the cursor and
296. ic value indication true relative opecifies an arbitrary point and measures the range and bearing from the own ship Displays concentric circles with own ship s position as the center at specified intervals and the rings are used as rough guides for range measurement Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing and measures the bearing from the own ship The process unit is equipped with two electronic bearing lines Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range and measures the range from the own ship The process unit is equipped with two variable range markers Displays straight lines at even intervals and the lines are used as rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses Displays the course by steering the own ship and it is used as a rough guide for ship maneuvering otores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the point of storing the markers and shows an anchor symbol on the radar display When the own ship has moved the system displays the range and bearing to the position Operates EBL VRM or PI on the radar display by using the cursor Cursor mode Cursor latitude Cursor bearing Cursor longitude EBL1 bearing hr AUTO 7 d N 300 9 A Ea 742NM 11944068F 1863 2 EBL1 starting point mode range m 3010 M EBL2 bearing EBL2R 19 Zinc KR 252 s We s PI gt lt NC range EBL2 starting point mode
297. ine G It Is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level The factory default level is assigned by Factory Default every function mode See the Section 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 3 11 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 6 2 Using the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode The rain snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain snow clutter 1s possible Use this mode when the rain snow clutter s intensity differs according to directional orientation Procedures 1 Press the RAIN dial Alternatively Left click the Rain MAN button located at the lower left of the display The automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is selected and Sea AUTO Rain AUTO 15 displayed in the lower left of the radar display 2 Make adjustments by turning the RAIN dial and the SEA dial Even when the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is selected turning the RAIN dial and the SEA dial can make fine adjustments manually When the automatic rain snow clutter suppression mode is NOTE selected the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and Doppler Filter are also activated It is not possible to set only the rain snow clutter suppression function to the automatic mode 1 Press the RAIN dial Alternatively Left click the Rain AUTO button located at the lower left of the display
298. ine as reference Japan Radio Ltd 4 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS Track is selected True Displayed with true bearing with North as reference HL Displayed with the heading line as reference Index Line1 to Line8 Displayed with a specified line as reference Line1 Line3 5 and i Linel Groupi Line correspond to Group1 Group2 Group3 Lines lt Group and Group4 respectively lt Group3 Line7 Group4 d If Equiangular is selected The setting cannot be changed 9 Operation Area If All 1s selected for Section 2 Operation Mode this function sets an area for displaying parallel index lines One Side Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side Both Side Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides 10 Display for Individual Line Determines whether to turn on off the parallel index line display of a selected number On _ The line of the selected number is displayed Off The line of the selected number is not displayed lf All is selected for Section 2 Operation Mode the line near the own ship is Index Line If Track or Equiangula js selected for Section 2 Operation Mode lt _ Groupi Line1 Line3 Line5 and Line7 Line3 Group2 correspond to Group1 Group2 lt Group3 Group3 and Group4 respective
299. ing the menu operation Track gt 1 DISP Own Track Color The Display Own Track Setting menu will open Operations differ according to the following set modes When 1 All is set to On All of own ship s tracks are displayed When 1 All is set to Off All of own ship s tracks are not displayed When 1 All is setto Individual Settings are made by color by performing the operation below 2 Left click the color button for the desired display setting which is to be changed Display of each item is switched between On and Off On Own ship s track plotted by the color is displayed Off Own ship s track plotted by the color is not displayed 3 41 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 3 Save Own Ship s Track Own Track Memory To save own ship s track storage at a specified time interval and at a specified range interval can be selected The track storage interval can be selected from 10 preset time intervals and 8 preset range intervals Storage intervals that can be selected Time 3 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min and 60 min Range 0 1 NM 0 2 NM 0 3 NM 0 5 NM 1 NM 3 NM 5 NM and 10 NM Procedures 1 Left click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower right of the display Every time the button 1s clicked the units of measure for the storage are switched Own Track
300. ing the operation below Procedures 1 Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Track 8 Current Setting The Current Setting menu will appear Set the tidal current vector display conditions 1 Length of the tidal current vector Current Size e Set the length of the tidal current vector e The unit of measure is kn cm e f 1 0kn cm is set a tidal current of 1 0kn is shown as a one centimeter line on the radar display 2 Color of the vector for tidal current layer A Layer A e Set the vector s display color for tidal current layer e Choose one of the following colors White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red 3 Color of the vector for tidal current layer B Layer B e Set the vector s display color for tidal current layer B e Choose one of the following colors White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red 4 Color of the vector for tidal current layer C Layer C e Set the vector s display color for tidal current layer C e Choose one of the following colors White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red 3 47 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP Up to 20 000 items of NAV lines coastlines depth contours and NAV marks can be created displayed loaded and saved This function is available only when navigation equipment is connected to this radar system Marks th
301. input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 3 79 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 4 Use Route Monitoring Function Waypoint Route Alarm This radar system can monitor the movement of own ship with regard to its route and activate a variety of alarms Destination alarm When own ship arrives at next Waypoint an alarm will Waypoint Alarm be activated Route alarm When own ship deviates from the specified route an alarm will be activated 3 7 4 1 Destination alarm Waypoint Alarm The destination alarm is activated when own ship has reached next Waypoint or own ship has deviated from the scheduled route A Waypoint alarm circle with a specified radius distance is displayed Waypoint alarm circle m mw e Own ship position To Waypoint Waypoint Alarm has the following two types of alarms Arrival An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside Break Off An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside Procedures 1 Open the WPT Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 2 Left click the set value of the 1 Waypoint Alarm 1 Waypoint Alarm item and select YP Arrival 0 00nm Pd Operation mode an operation mode Radius of the Waypoint ala
302. int of EBL The system provides three types of EBL starting points Select one of them in accordance with purpose The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship s position The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and longitude The navigator needs to be connected 1 To move the starting point of EBL Procedures 1 2 3 Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable Press the EBL dial to set or p for the EBL1 EBL2 starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the display The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is pressed gt EM gt mu Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved and left click The selected EBL starting point will be determined Radio Ltd 4 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 2 To return the EBL starting point to own ship s position Procedures 1 Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable 2 Press the EBL dial to set for the EBL1 EBL2 starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the display The selected EBL starting point will be set as the own ship s position 4 1 3 3 Setting EBL Operation Mode 1 To set the numeric value display mode of EBL EBL Bearing REF Determine whether to display EBL in true bearing mode or rel
303. ion 1 8 JRC Japan Radio JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS unu T 3x Og BK LINA 0 XOWddV SSVI QF 0007 0002 OF 0002 0001 VF 000 OOF GEF zl qu ogl 0 OE 9 G OF 9 LYT 4 EX EX Ef B XE fp ANG Hf ANS OF 1007 004 9 0002 000 VF 0001 107 OOF 0 qu 04 06 60 LF OE 9 qt 9 SNOLLVIA3Q SNOLLVIASO a 3 0 TV NOISN3IAIG IV NOISN3IATO ONLLNDIOI 3NILNO SNOISN3IALCI 37HISSIIAH 3d JIASSINY Id 86 LE ONIMY 0 LINN 5540044 CONFA vYN 3 FYNLXAL 55019 35 YN 8O 102 LINA 5539059 PROV e Z 4 NOISN3NICI LAIN 3 18V9 997 GEL 9962 682 OY gv 4 1 47 47454 LAN 3 BY2 1N03J pue LNN ONIM 2722227777777 m 5 91895 111004 052 NW 8 S1 108 ONU OH OL 9 8 D pad C967 E e 52 C947 as zi mg Q C3 zx tg 0 lt 4 mq E 3m x C i li Z 7 19052 79062 052 NW 052 Fig 1 4 Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit Type NDC 1478 Desktop type option JRC Japan Radio 18 59 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOS
304. ion Approx 600VA typical Approx 2200VA at Maximum wind speed PS Voltage Fluctuation 10 at the maximum cable length Pre Heating Time Within10 sec From STBY to TX Within 5 sec SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 See 11 2 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 See 11 3 OPTION Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE 1532 D Only heater collar Interswitch Unit NQE 3141 2A Maximum 2 Radars NQE 3141 4A Maximum 4 Radars DISPLAY UNIT Desktop type NCD 9170T Maximum Cable Length SCANNER UNIT to 65m TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS SCANNER UNIT 5 1m DISPLAY UNIT 4 0m 11 1 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION gt 11 2 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 11 2 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1130 Dimension Mass Polarization Directional Characteristics Revolution Power Supply for Motor Maximum Wind Velocity Transmitting Frequency Transmitting Power Transmitter TX Pulse width 1st TX Pulse width Frequency Deviation Width 2nd Repetition Frequency Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Height 791 x Swing Circle 4000 mm Approx 170kg Horizontal Horizontal beam width 1 9 Vertical beam width 25 Side lobe Level below 26dB within 10 below 30dB outside 10 Approx 24rpm AC100 115V 50 60Hz 1 or AC220 240V 50 60Hz 1 01 5m s 100knots PON 3040MHz QON 3060MHz 4MHz 250W 25 50 oolid S
305. ion is returned to the center of the screen 5 Transmission standby switching At expiration of the pre heat time after the power is turned Preheat changes to Standby Standby Indicates a standby state If this button is clicked in this state the equipment is set to a transmission state 2 17 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 6 Transmit Indicates a transmission state If this button is clicked in this state the equipment is set to a standby state Interswitch connection change This button 1s displayed when the interswitch 1s connected This button indicates the connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator If the button is clicked in the transmission standby state the menu for changing the connection state between the scanner unit and the indicator 1s displayed The connection state of the scanner unit and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in a standby state Refer to the Appendix A NOE 3141 Interswitch Unit Interswitch Optional Instruction Manual that is attached for the setting method This button is not displayed if the interswitch is not connected Un available for evaluation model Transmission pulse length switching The transmission pulse length is switched whenever this button is clicked Three types of pulses are available s
306. ions mentioned in the items 12 13 and 15 may be optional answer is not necessary 9 11 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 3 AFTER SALES SERVICE Japan Radio Ltd 9 12 SECTION 10 ee ee ee EU DISPOSAL EN 4 DISPOSAL 10 1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT 10 1 10 2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES 10 1 10 3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS 10 2 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 10 DISPOSAL gt 10 1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT 1 0 1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT When disposing of this unit be sure to follow the local laws and regulations for the place of disposal 10 2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES N WARNING When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by taping the terminals Otherwise heat generation explosion or a may occur In this unit Lithium batteries are used for the following parts Radar Processing circuit CDC 1362 BT300 Maxell CR2032 Do not store used lithium batteries Dispose of them in accordance with regulations of local government e When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by taping th
307. ip and the pseudo target is 0 the target will disappear 5 24 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 1 Press the TX STBY key to stop the transmitting The equipment will enter the transmission standby state 2 Left click the item button of 2 Tr Simulator while the TT Test Menu is displayed The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed 3 Left click Off The TT Simulator display will be turned off 5 2 7 3 Status display Status The current Target Tracking status will appear Procedures 1 Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Left click the item button of 3 Status The setting items for Status will be displayed Constant Vector response VID Level TD Threshold value used for automatic acquisition VID Level HIGH Threshold value used for tracking VID Level LOW Unused Gate Size Size of gate used for tracking Tracking Number of targets currently acquired 5 25 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 7 4 Gate Display The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the Target Tracking function This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to target range and size User can check the gate size using the following functio
308. ips become higher along with the increase in traffic at sea If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any other vessel then not only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels in the vicinity port facilities inhabitants 1n the coastal area as well as marine resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles Collision accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in recent years To cope with these problems any effective measures are needed and some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requirements have been developed at rapid strides 5 1 1 3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance There are two aspects in collision avoidance collision prediction and avoidance Collision prediction 1s to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy the same point at the same time while collision avoidance 1s to maneuver vessels not to occupy the same point at the same time In practical operation of vessels a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single point but a closed zone This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA Closest Point of Approach In collision prediction the time to be taken until a ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA Time to CPA Fig 5 2 shows a diagram caked Collision Triangle Target Vessel True Vector TCPA Time to CPA gt Target vessel CPA Relative Vector Own Ship True Vector CPA ring Fig 5 2
309. is function switches the range Press to increase the observation range Press to reduce the observation range 3 2 2 on page 3 6 EBL 1 Electronic Bearing Line 1 key Use this function to display and select EBL I If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more the menu for setting is displayed 4 1 3 on page 4 3 49 EBL2 Electronic Bearing Line 2 key Use this function to display and select EBL2 If the key 1s pressed for 2 seconds or more the menu for setting EBL2 is displayed 4 1 3 on page 4 3 42 EBL Electronic Bearing Line dial This function rotates the azimuth of the EBL that is selected EBL 1 2 By pressing the dial the selected EBL can be switched to Center fixing Floating gt Center fixing 4 1 3 on page 4 3 43 IVRM1 Variable Range Marker 1 key This function selects VRMI The On Off and dial use right are switched on page 4 6 VRM2 Variable Range Marker 2 key This function selects VRM2 The On Off and dial use right are switched on page 4 6 2 13 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 49 VRM Variable Range Marker dial This function changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRMI 2 By pressing the dial the parallel line cursor function can be switched to Operation gt Fixed Off Operation on page 4
310. isplay area ON OFF of Waypoint number display Set whether not to display Waypoint number next to the WPT Number Display Waypoint mark Waypoint update Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been Waypoint Switch Mode eached 3 7 6 1 Color for the route alarm line Cross Track Limit Line Route alarm lines are displayed on both sides of the center line of the route For this item set which color is used to display each line Route alarm line Route alarm line Traveling direction Traveling direction lt Route Alarm Color Area Route Alarm Color Area B Area A IALA A The port side is red and the bow side is green along the traveling direction Area B IALA B The port side is green and the bow side is red along the traveling direction 1 Open the WPT Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode IALA A Area IALA B Area B Japan Radio Ltd 3 84 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 6 2 Display character size SEL NUM Comment Size Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on the radar display 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting m 9 Next 2 Left click the set value of the item
311. itched to On Off whenever the button 1 clicked Use this function to avoid confusion with the AIS symbol AIS target symbol display On Off The AIS target symbol display is switched to On Off whenever the button 1s clicked Use this function to avoid confusion with the tracked target symbol Association On Off The tracked target AIS target association is switched to On Off whenever the button is clicked AIS filter mode switching The AIS filter is switched whenever the button 1s clicked Range Sector Zone Range Radar trails display true relative switching Radar trails are switched to T true motion trail relative motion trail whenever this button is clicked This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode In relative motion display mode RM switching to T is possible In true motion display mode TM only T be set 2 25 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Radar trails display time switching The radar trails display time 1s switched whenever the button is clicked If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set the remaining time is displayed on the right hand side If the button is clicked for 2 seconds the RADAR Trails Setting menu is opened Numeric information AIS target information simple display ATS ID 1 Name JMA 9100 7100 S
312. items 3 8 3 1 PRF Fine Tuning Fine tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range 90 to 100 fradar s interference patterns are concentrically displayed increment or decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference rejection One of 32 levels 0 31 can be set 3 8 3 2 PRF Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter Normal Standard mode Appropriategain expectancy is maintained High Power High gain mode Gain improves when SP1 MP1 MP2 pulses are used When High Power is selected the target acquisition NOTE and tracking function becomes 24nm or less from 32nm or less 3 8 3 3 Ice Class Standby Mode In this mode the antenna is rotated when transmission is in the standby state This mode is effective to prevent the antenna s rotating shaft from freezing Off ice class standby mode is not used When transmission is in the standby state the antenna also stops rotating On ice class standby mode is used When transmission is in the standby state the antenna rotates 3 99 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 4 Set Cursor Cursor Setting This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and display Procedures 1 Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu ope
313. itted Band Rate of Category Output Power rotation JMA 9172 SA 12ft Slotted Antenna 250W CAT 1 The class of emission PON QON Table1 2 Radar Configuration and Ship s Mains Type of Radar Display Unit JMA 9172 SA NKE 1532 NCD 9170 100 to 115V or AC220 to 240V 50 60Hz 19 Notes 1 The drive motor for the scanner unit is available in AC100 115V AC220 240V type for NKE 1532 Please specify the motor type when ordering 2 The scanner unit can be equipped with a deicing heater as an option and D shall be suffixed to the type name e g NKE 1532 D 3 When using the ship s mains of AC440V as the radar power source a step down transformer shall be used 4 The desktop option is available for display NCD 9170 It has a separate structure consisting of the following Monitor Unit NWZ 178 Radar Process Unit NDC 1478 Operation Unit NCE 5322 Japan Radio Co Lid 1 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1 1 Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE 1532 Fig 1 2 Outline Drawing of Display Unit Type NCD 9170 Fig 1 3 Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit Type NWZ 178 Desktop type option Fig 1 4 Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit Type NDC 1478 Desktop type option Fig 1 5 Outline Drawing of Operation Unit Type NCE 5322 Desktop type option Fig 1 6 Outline Drawing of Inters
314. ity NAV1 NAV2 LOG ALM AIS HDG at TB4501 Port Navigation equipment IEC61162 1 2 COM DSub 9pin Longitude Latitude Waypoint COG SOG SPEED Day Time information Alarm acknowledge Rate of Turn Rudder GYRO SYNC GYRO STEP IEC61162 2 38400bps Bearing signal IEC61162 1 LOG SYNC LOG PULSE opeed signal GGA gt RMC gt RMA gt GNS gt GLL RMB gt BWC BWR gt gt VTG VBW ZDA ACK ROT RSA 360x 180x 90x 36x GYRO I F 360x 180x 90x 36x GYRO I F THS gt HDT over 40Hz HDG port at terminal board TB4501 HDT gt HDG gt HDM gt VHW HDG port at terminal board TB4501 360x 180x 90x 30x GYRO I F 800 400 200 100 GYRO I F External event mark Contact input EVENT port at terminal board TB4601 Radar buoy Depth IEC61162 1 JRC Water temperature IEC61162 1 JRC Tendency IEC61162 1 JRC Wind IEC61162 1 AIS IEC61162 2 Acknowledge Slave video Send capability Port MNT port at TB4601 COM at DSub 9pin Navigation information Radar system data IEC61162 1 2 Own ship data Tracking target data AIS target data Alarm Auto pilot Bearing of destination Latitude Longitude data Waypoint COG SOG Cross track error 11 4 Negative input RBVD port at terminal board TB4401 DPT gt DBS gt DBT gt DBK JRC format MTW JRC format CUR JRC format MWV gt MWD VDM VDO AIS port at terminal board 4601 Contact input SYSACK PWRACK port at terminal bo
315. ive greater than the value with which unnecessary signals are detected The quantization level 1s adjusted to an optimal value so do not change it carelessly CAUTION the level deviates from the proper value the target acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate Otherwise this may cause accidents S Do not change the set quantization level carelessly If Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the target tracking setting menu 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 2 3 To change the quantization level of the automatic acquisition area specify the item 2 Video TD Level in the menu To change the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition specify the item 3 video High Level 4 Input the value to be set Japan Radio Ltd 7 32 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 7 3 3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment MBS Main Bang Suppression 15 adjusted to suppress main bang a reflection signal from 3D circuit including wave guide tube that generally appears as a circular image focusing on the center of the radar display Optimum adjustment allows main bang image to remain lightly on the display AN CAUTION Do not change this adjusted level carelessly Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point blank range and cause collision resulting in death or serious injury 7 3 3 1 Adjust
316. l indications Lighting Memory See the Section 1 Memory Test Communications Lines See the Section 3 Check of Communication Lines Line Test Power Supply Backup Battery See the Section 4 Supply Voltage Monitor See the Section 8 3 1 2 Monitor Test Operation Unit See the Section 8 3 1 3 Operation Unit Test Keyboard Test oystem Alarm Log Display See the Section 8 3 1 5 System Alarm Log display oystem Information Display See the Section 8 3 1 6 System Information Target Tracking See the Section 5 2 7 Operation Test TT Test Menu Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section 2 TXRX Test Performance Monitor See the Section 8 3 1 4 Check of the Performance Monitor MON Display 8 3 1 Check Performance on Test Menu The radar operating state can be checked by opening the Test Menu 8 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 1 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test Menu Main 9 Test Menu 2 Select the items to be checked 1 Self Test 8 3 1 1Self diagnosis function Self Test 2 Monitor Test 8 3 1 2Monitor Test 3 Keyboard Test 8 3 1 3Operation Unit Test Keyboard Test 4 MON Display 8 3 1 4Check of the Performance Monitor MON Display 5 System Alarm Log 8 3 1 5System Alarm Log display 6 System Information 8 3 1 6System Information The list of check items wi
317. l is moved that caused by vibration If trackball move distance go over the threshold dot unit when reset signal 15 turned on 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Trackball Threshold menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System 1 Watch Alarm 2 Trackball Threshold 3 Input the value to be set For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 7 2 8 3 Setting the relay output Relay Output This function enables the control of ARPAALM terminal on the terminal board circuit 1 Open the Serviceman Menu Japan Radio Ltd 7 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Relay Output menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System 2 Relay Output 3 Left click the 1 Relay Output Mode button in the menu The Relay Output mode is switched Continuous he output is continuously controlled Intermittent The output is intermittenly controlled 4 Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed The item can be turned on off On he relay output is turned on when alarm have issued Off The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued 2 TT CPA TCPA There is a dangerous target tracked ta
318. lash memory card option is necessary Once route data files that have been saved on a flash NOTE memory card is erased the erased data cannot be resaved Note that important files should not be erased 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 4 File Operation 3 91 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 Left click the 4 Erase button Contents of the specified memory card file list will be displayed 4 Left click the button for the desired file name Confirmation Window will appear 5 Left click the 1 Yes button A route data file with the specified file name will be erased Japan Radio Ltd 3 92 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 0 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 1 Set Radar Signal Processing Process Setting This function enables the setting of detail information about radar signal processing Procedures 1 Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 3 RADAR Menu 1 Process Setting The Process Setting menu will appear Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the menu items After the settings for radar signal processing are NOTE changed small targets
319. layed in a light blue circle Route A route line that connects Waypoints Planned Courese Scheduled route between Waypoints automatically calculated Planned Speed Scheduled sailing speed between Waypoints entered by user Waypoint alarm circle The circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint Route alarm line The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm Waypoint bearing vector A vector line that shows next destination from own ship s CCRP 3 7 2 Edit Route Set Route Sequence In this radar system it 1s possible to easily create and correct route by performing operation on the radar display 3 7 2 1 Initializing route data New Monitor Route Route data saved in the radar system is initialized Once route data is initialized route data saved in the NOTE radar system s storage section is deleted If there is necessary route data save the route data on the flash memory card before initializing it 3 69 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence 2 Left click the 7 New Monitor Route button Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click the 1 Yes button The saved route data will be deleted 3 7 2 2 Adding a Waypoint Add Waypoint New Waypoint data is added to the
320. lines pressing the EBL1 EBL2 key disables operation for rotation directions Pressing the VRM1 or VRM2 key disables operation for parallel index line intervals 4 1 4 3 Settings in PI Menu PI Menu The operation of parallel index lines can be set in the PI Menu 1 Left click the PI button to open the Pl menu 1 Display for All Lines sets the parallel index line display to on or off On Parallel index lines are displayed Off Parallel index lines are not displayed 4 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 2 Operation Mode Sets an operation mode for parallel index lines At S NI Individual 2 95 Track Equiangular AII All the parallel lines are operated at the same time Individual The bearing of each line is operated individually Track Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides Equiangular Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed a Operation if Individual 5 selected A line perpendicular to the own ship and the intersection marker are displayed on an operable line Turning the EBL dial changes the direction Pressing the dial changes the range end point 1 or end point 2 to be operated An operable point is displayed with e and can be operated by turning the VRM dial If Sequential is selected for 3 Co
321. ll appear 8 3 1 1 Self diagnosis function Self Test Check of memory scanner unit and communications Lines 1 Memory Test 1 Memory Test 2 TXRX Test 2 XRX Test 3 Line Test 3 Check of Communication Lines Line Test 4 Supply Voltage 4 Supply Voltage 1 Memory Test Checks for the performance of built in memory 1 SDRAM SDRAM Check 2 SRAM SRAM Check 3 FLASH ROM FLASH ROM Check 4 GRAPHIC GRAPHIC Check When no abnormality is found OK 15 displayed When an abnormality is found NG is displayed 2 TXRX Test Checks for signals from the scanner ocanner s safety switch check Japan Radio Ltd 8 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK AZI Pulse scanner rotation signal check HL Pulse Heading line signal check MH Current Check on the load current of high voltage in the modulator Trigger Radar trigger signal check Video Radar video check When no abnormality is found OK 15 displayed When an abnormality is found NG is displayed In standby will appear 3 Check of Communication Lines Line Test Check the status of communications with options TXRX Check on connection with the transmitter receiver SIG PROC Check on connection with the signal processing circuit Check on connection with the target tracking unit GYRO I F Check on connection with the GYRO I F unit ISW Check on connection with the interswitch When no
322. ll appear In that case enter a numeric value according to the following operation method Japan Radio Co Ltd 3 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 4 1 Numeric value input screen GYRO Setting 123 42 00 3599 Entered value Numeric button button button Clear button Enter button 3 3 4 2 Directly entering a numeric value 1 On the numeric value input screen sequentially left click the software number keys located on the radar screen and enter a desired numeric value For example when entering 1 2 3 4 for a bearing value sequentially left click the software number keys as shown below 2 Make sure that the entered value is correct and left click the ENT button The set value is reflected to the operating state 3 To stop entering a value right click the ENT button Alternatively left click the CLR button The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state 3 19 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 4 3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value Procedures 1 2 3 On the numeric value input screen sequentially left click the software button located on the radar screen and enter a desired numeric value For example when adjusting 123 0 to 123 4 for a bearing
323. lowing menu open procedure to open the Clear Motor Time menu 3 Maintenance Menu 5 TXRX Time 2 Clear Motor Time 3 Select 1 the Confirmation Menu The motor run time in the TXRX s internal control circuit is cleared to O 7 41 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7 4 4 3 Save of Scanner Unit Time TXRX To Display Unit Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit Perform the following procedure of 7 4 4 4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX s internal control circuit 1s replaced During performance monitor adjustment all acquisitions by the o target tracking function are released The released target acquisitions are not recovered 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TXRX to Display Unit menu 3 Maintenance Menu TXRX Time 3 TXRX To Display Unit 3 Select 1 the Confirmation Menu The scanner unit time data in the TXRX s internal control circuit is saved transferred to the display unit 7 4 44 Restoration of Antenna Time Display Unit To TXRX Restore the antenna time data from the display unit into the antenna s internal control circuit Perform the above procedure of 7 4 4 3 to inherit the antenna time data when the antenna s internal control circuit 1s replaced
324. ls Trails Mode Procedures 1 Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar display Trais 15min 0732 RADAR trails true relative The trails motion modes are switched gt m 3 33 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 9 Zoom x2 This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position NOTE If the range is 0 125 NM this function is not available Procedures 1 2 Left click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display The zoom mode is selected Subsequently put the cross cursor mark on a location you want to zoom into and press the left key of the trackball The zoom is set Using the cross cursor mark as reference the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ship s position being set to the center of radar display HL HL Cursor mark Own ship s Center of position radar display Own Ship s Position before Own Ship s Position after Zooming position Zooming position Left click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display The zoom mode 15 cancelled Japan Radio Ltd 3 34 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 10 Hide Display Range Rings HL OFF B 1 Press the HL OFF key Alternatively Left click the off butt
325. lure Operation of a menu for the scanner unit when the slave mode is active Card Write failure i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence Japan Radio Co Ltd ALR JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING Table9 7 List of Conditions Messages Message Class Description ALR No Battery Dead Warning The battery is dead Battery Low Warning battery is weakening ini HDOP Warning The HDOP level is increased Decrease in the GPS MON Test Warning Performance monitor is active Scanner Rotating Warning The scanner is rotating When transmitter is standby state i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence Table9 8 List of Interswitch Alarms and Messages Message Class Description ALR No Master Range INFO The range of the own display unit has changed due to change in the range of the master display unit Connection INFO Inhibition of control connection is set Masked ISW Data Alarm No communication data mismatched or checksum error 327 ISW Busy INFO Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching ISW Complete INFO The switchover of the Interswitch ended normally ISW Error INFO The interswitch is disabled ISW Standby INFO The Interswitch recovered normally ISW Straight INFO The interswitch is forced to change the connec
326. ly Line7 lt Group4 4 13 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function EBL Maneuver Setting 4 1 5 1 Initial Setting EBL Maneuver Setting 1 Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the following menu operation Main 1 EBL Maneuver Setting 2 Setthe following parameters Reach Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when the ship beings to turn Select a turn mode Radius Turning radius NM Rate Rate of turn deg min Select the setting for turning If Radius is selected Turning radius NM If Rate is selected Rate of turn deg min For inputs to the value input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu A wrong initial setting affects the maneuver curve function G explained below Japan Radio Ltd 4 14 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 5 2 Creation of Maneuver Curve EBL Maneuver 1 Left click the item button of _ 1 EBL Maneuver while the EBL Maneuver Setting menu is open The EBL maneuver function will be set to on or off A auxiliary line for maneuver curve creation a maneuver curve and a WOL will appear on the radar display 2 Put the cursor the starting point of the au
327. m H 7ZCRD1338 CMD 1031 RT NCE 5322 RT Operation Unit Interconnection Fig B 6 Interconnection Diagram of NCE 5322 RT Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS B 2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit 2 Power System Diagram of Display Uni MONITOR UNIT NWZ 178 R RT OPTION USER SUPPLY PS 2 MOUSE TRKBALL USER SUPPLY LCD PANEL CML 1799 PS 2 EXTENSION CAB o N m e M x 5 USER SUPPLY AMEN 2 U AC100 115V AC220 240V 50 60Hz 1 H 7ZCRD1328 2m H 7ZCRD1329A NWZ 178 R 9P 5m H 7ZCRD1330A NWZ 178 RT NX RADAR PROCESS UNIT NDC 1478 AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1363 PC460 OPERATION UNIT NCE 5322 R RT OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK 1006 OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK 1005 PC610 620 15 16102 4 14 15 16408 16406 26405 264044 216403 26402 OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK 1007 2m H 7ZCRD1337 NCE 5163 R self stand 5m H 7ZCRD1338 NCE 5322 RT desktop JRC SUPPLY DVI 5m H 7ZCRD1346 NWZ 178 RT DVI 2m H 7ZCRD1345 NWZ 178 R AC 2m VM0301 VM0303B2M NWZ 178 R AC 5m VM0301 VM0303B5M NWZ 178 RT ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC 1364 PC450 OPTION B101 RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ 523 CDC 13
328. may make some targets invisible particularly targets with higher speeds Japan Radio Ltd 6 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 4 FALSE ECHOES 6 4 FALSE ECHOES The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known a Shadow When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast the echo of a target that exists the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns in which there may be a part of weak or no returns Such shadows appear always in the same directions which the operator should have in mind in radar operation b Side Lobe Effect A broken line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on the radar display This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo appears isolated see Fig 6 6 HL Fig 6 6 False echo 6 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 4 FALSE ECHOES c False Echo by Secondary Reflection When a target exists near own ship two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar display One of those echoes is
329. may not be displayed or unwanted waves may not be suppressed Thus do not make a significant change in the settings 3 8 1 1 Video Latitude e Select the dynamic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the radar display e Select Normal in standard and Wide rainy weather e Narrow clearly displays short range videos when STC is used in manual mode Narrow Narrows the dynamic range at short range Normal Standard setting The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range Short distance wide Long distance narrow Wide Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted waves The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when Normal is selected Super Wide Use this mode when rain cloud remain at Wide 3 93 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 1 2 Video Noise Rejection This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos e Select Off to display radar videos like analog signals e Select Leveli Level2 to suppress noise and clutter Off Turns off the noise rejection function and displays all signals Targets are popped up from noise and displayed like analog signals Leveli Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves noise and clutter When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite the signals are displayed Level2 Rejects the
330. ment of Main Bang Suppression Level MBS Level Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS level adjustment menu 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 3 MBS 1 MBS Level 3 Set the radar as follows Set the radar range to 0 125 NM Set the radar video enhance function ENH to OFF Set the image processing PROC to OFF Turn the RAIN control to the minimum position fully to the left Turn the GAIN control to the maximum position fully to the right Turn the SEA control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged 4 Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased 7 33 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 7 3 3 2 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Area MBS Area 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS Area adjustment menu 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 3 MBS 2 MBS Area 3 Set the radar as follows Set the radar range to 0 125 NM Set the radar video enhance function ENH to OFF Set the image processing PROC to OFF e Turn the RAIN control to the minimum position fully to the left Turn the GAIN control to the maximum position fully to the right Turn the SEA control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged 4 Adju
331. n 1 Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu operation TT 9 TT Test Menu 2 Left click the item button of 4 Gate Display The gate display mode is switched On Gate is displayed Off Gate is not displayed 3 Display the numeric value of a target according to Section 5 2 3 Tracked Target Data Display TGT DATAJ The numeric value of the target will be displayed and the tracked target symbol will be enclosed in a green gate The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets G simultaneously Tracked Target symbol Vector Echo Gate displayed in green Japan Radio Ltd 5 26 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION a AIS OPERATION 5 3 1 5 3 2 Restrictions The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function The AIS function is unavailable in the following cases e or REF is selected for the speed sensor The current offset Set Drift Setting is set while LOG or 2AXW 15 selected for the speed sensor e The GPS geodetic system is used except WGS 84 LOG 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case The AIS function is turned on and the current offset Set Drift Setting 1s selected MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case The AIS function 15 On Current offset Set Drift Setting
332. n Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the installation setting menu 2 Installation Menu 3 Select Slave for the item in the menu Master The system operates as radar equipment while the own antenna is connected Slave The system operates as a sub display while the signal cable of other radar equipment is connected 7 2 4 2 Setting of Input Bearing Pulse Input BP Pulse 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the second page of the installation setting menu 2 Installation Menu 9 Next 3 Set the number of pulses for the item in the menu 2048 2048 pulses per antenna rotation 4096 4096 pulses per antenna rotation 7 2 5 Language Setting Language The system is designed to switch between display languages Japanese and English Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu pe Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the language setting menu 2 Installation Menu c 8 Language 3 Select the language to be used 1 English 2 Japanese 3 Other i Other is an option to display character strings created by our overseas agents Ask the overseas agent or our sales department if your language is supported To determine the selected language turn the power off and then turn it on 7 2 6 Date Time Setting T
333. n Radio Co Ltd V LU ee s n aiii ee 17 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 1 Main 1 Main 1 EBL Maneuver Setting section 4 1 5 on page 4 14 1 EBL Maneuver 2 Reach 3 Turn Mode 4 Turn Set 2 File Manager section 3 11 1 on page 3 122 3 RADAR Menu HE1 Process Setting section 3 8 1 on page 3 93 E Video balif de s cos 5 ei E section 3 8 1 1 on page 3 93 2 Video Noise Rejection section 3 8 1 2 on page 3 94 H 3 AUTO Dynamic Range section 3 8 1 3 on page 3 94 4 Process Switch section 3 8 1 4 on page 3 95 5 2ndProcess section 3 8 1 5 on page 3 95 H 6 Process Switch Range section 3 8 1 6 on page 3 95 7 FastTarget Detection section 3 8 1 7 on page 3 96 HE8 User Function Setting section 3 9 3 on page 3 115 HE1 Function1 Setting F tMode page 3 115 2 18 3 Process H 4 Target Enhance H 5 AUTO Sea Rain 6 Save Present State 9 Next
334. n functions include sensitivity adjustment sea clutter and rain snow clutter suppression e interference rejection bearing and range measurement using a cursor fixed variable range markers and electronic bearing line colored own track display 7 colors NAV line and marker displays TM True Motion presentation self diagnostic facilities radar performance monitoring Performance Monitor Target Tracking functions manual automatic target acquisition and tracking vector and trail displays Trial maneuver and alarm displays 8 unit switchover Interswitch function option 1 1 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 2 FEATURES 1 2 FEATURES Realization of Large Easy to see Screen with High Resolution The 23 1 inch color LCD with high resolution can display radar images of 320 mm or more in diameter Even short range targets can also be displayed as high resolution images Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver with a wide dynamic range thus improving the target detection Target Tracking TT Function based on Advanced Technology The target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the fastest DSP and t
335. n the 3 Maintenance Menu 3 Select Slot2 the 4 1 2 To Internal 4 Select 1 Yes in the Confirmation Menu The memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory After the internal memory area is updated the system is restarted Japan Radio Ltd 7 40 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7 4 4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time TXRX Time The system adds up the following operation time and contains it in the scanner unit e Transmission time e Motor run time Clear the above total time when scanner unit motor 1s replaced 7 4 4 1 Clear of Motor Run Time Clear TX Time Clear the scanner s motor run time Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor 1 replaced 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear Motor Time menu 3 Maintenance Menu 5 TXRX Time 1 Clear TX Time 3 Select 1 5 the Confirmation Menu The motor run time in the TXRX s internal control circuit is cleared to O 7 4 4 2 Save of Antenna Time Clear Motor Time save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit Perform the following procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX s internal control circuit 1s replaced 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the fol
336. n the human body When it is necessary to get close to the scanner for maintenance or inspection purposes make sure to turn the indicator power switch to OFF or STBY Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body When conducting maintenance work make sure to turn off the power so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution equipment failure or accidents Japan Radio Ltd AN WARNING When cleaning the display screen do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth Also do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen Failure to comply will result in damage to the screen surface Do not change MBS Level Area unless absolutely necessary Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive tape on the and terminals Failure to comply may cause heat generation explosion or fire when the batteries get shorted out AN CAUTION Use the radar only as a navigation aid The final navigation decision must always be made by the o
337. nd gain slightly lowers Bird Use this mode to detect flocks of sea birds Long Use this mode to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean Buoy Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside the sea clutter area This mode displays targets of which detection probability is low User1 General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable User2 General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable 3 115 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER page 1 2 IR Radar interference rejection same function as IR Setting described in Section 3 4 1 Interference Rejection IR page 1 3 Process Video process same function as PROCESS Setting described in Section 3 4 4 Use Video Processing PROC page 1 4 Target Enhance same function as TARGET ENHANCE Setting described in Section 3 4 3 Target Enhance ENH page 1 5 Auto STC FTC Auto Sea Rain Detects unwanted waves such as rain snow clutter and sea clutter and automatically suppresses them When the sea state or weather changes this function automatically performs suppression processing in accordance with the situation Suppression processing 1s not full automatic and requires the operator to adjust the afterimages of unwanted waves To adjust the afterimage of sea clutter use the SEA dial To adjust the afterimage of rain snow
338. ng The User Function Setting menu will appear Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item page 1 1 Mode e Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar display when the function is selected When the setting is changed back to the factory setting the initial value of the selected mode 1 called The following 11 modes are provided Coast Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range for example bays and coasts where many boats and ships are running Importance is attached to resolution DeepSea Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range for example the open sea Importance is attached to long range gain Fish Net Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul netters hidden by sea clutter returns Importance is attached to sea clutter suppression and gain to moving targets lowers Storm Use this mode when many rain snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected in stormy weather Importance is attached to rain snow clutter and sea clutter suppression and gain slightly lowers Calm Use this mode when only a few rain snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected Rain Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain snow clutter is strong Importance is attached to rain snow clutter suppression a
339. ng at Installation Setting of the interswitch circuit CCL 304 The settings of the DIP switches SW11 to SWI3 are shown below SW 11 SW13 SW 12 L 1 1 a Interswitch circuit PCB CCL 304 1 Unused esse o Description Set the switch to OFF in Unused normal state Unused OFF Master slave setting Description Set the switch to ON if the slave ISW PCB is selected in Slave extension mode Master OFF BB Extension mode setting Description Set the switch to OFF if the number of connected display Extension mode units is four or less O Normal mode OFF BB A 11 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3144 Interswitch Unit gt A 3 REFERENCE 2 SW12 setting radar connection settings Radar connection settings No 1 display unit connected mp 1 No 1 display unit NOT connected No 1 scannerunit connected No 1 scannerunit NOT connected i No 2 display unit connected No 2 display unit NOT connected No 2 scannerunit connected No 2 scannerunit NOT connected No 3 display unit connected No 3 display unit NOT connected No 3 scannerunit connected No 3 scannerunit NOT connected No 4 display unit connected No 4 scannerunit connected No 4 scanner unit NOT connected 3 SW13 unused N Unused All OFF 1 2 3 4 Before the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit can be set the interswitch breaker must be turned of
340. nk by operating the EBL dial and left click the ENT button The start angle of the sector blank will be set 5 Setthe ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the EBL dial and left click the ENT button The end angle of the sector blank will be set 7 2 3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit Output Pulse set the output value of bearing pulses from the scanner unit The system can set 2048 pulses or 4096 pulses This setting 1s enabled only when the scanner unit of 25 or 30 kW is used 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Output Pulse setting menu 1 Adjust Menu 4 TXRX Adjustment 6 Output Pulse 3 Set the number of pulses to be output by the scanner unit 2048 2048 pulses per antenna rotation Recommended value 4096 4096 pulses per antenna rotation i If a 10 kW antenna or S band Solid State antenna is used 2048 is always set 7 2 4 Slave Mode Setting Master Slave Place the system in the Slave mode when it 1s to be operated as the sub display that displays radar echoes by using radar signals from other radar equipment The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set The system can set 2048 pulses or 4096 pulses Japan Radio Ltd 7 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 4 1 Slave Mode Setting Master Slave Procedures 1 Open the Servicema
341. nly echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited When using the AUTO RAIN function make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level Japan Radio Ltd N CAUTION When setting a guard zone make sure to properly adjust gain sea surface reflection suppression level and rain snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal target images are always on the radar screen The guard zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by the radar and it may result in accidents such as collisions whether or not target tracking is properly operating Therefore never use this function unless you wish to check target tracking operations G The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding Note especially that if this function is used during actual navigation simulated targets are displayed and may become confused with other actual targets Therefore never use this function during actual navigation Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and CONSTANT therefore never change their values unless absolutely necessary Failure to comply may result in accidents that would lower target tracking performance Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing parts Failure to comply may result in electrocution or equipment failure Japan Radio Ltd xii ooooo oe N CAUTION Make sure that
342. nna transmits pulses of radio waves The object returns the wave radar echo to the antenna So the RADAR screen the leading edge of echo 15 the actual target position The length of echo is dependent on the transmitted pulse length Point the cursor to the leading edge of echo to measure the target range or to make a mark on the target Pulse of radio wave 101 RADAR echo Fig 4 1 Transmitting Receiving of RADAR 0 Pulse length Target range 270 90 Own ship s position Fig 4 2 Relation of echo target range and pulse length 4 19 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND 4 2 1 Measurement with Cursor Position Cursor Procedures 1 Make sure of the target echoes on the radar display 2 Move the cursor to the target The bearing and range of the target will be shown in the Cursor bearing range located at the upper right of the display The range is a distance from the own ship s position Cursor 270 Own ship s position Bearing and range from the own ship s position to target in this figure True bearing 45 0 Range 6 00 NM 180 4 2 1 1 set a cursor bearing numeric value mode Determine whether to display a cursor bearing in true or relative bearing mode Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication true relative switching located at
343. nner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment 1 15 Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS Japan Radio Ltd 1 16 Sa Se a oe a ene AL enn fi 1 I k IN I IE E I 4 I I I n 4 L 1 4 1 1 I 1 ee eee m mix nene eee ee eee Soe ee mem rra p eee eee ee ee m 02 LEER io cmo an mmn cmn am mem pun ae B I I E 1 EE a 1 1 1 ah 1 1 ee es eS Sa a as alia an IL i 2 2 2 MON NUM MSN Se Me ee PU aga Dr
344. nse to ISW operation GPS Up to four locations can be input One location selected when used Procedures 1 Measure the CCRP location radar antenna location and GPS antenna location in advance 2 Open the Serviceman Menu 3 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the CCRP Setting menu 2 Installation Menu 4 CCRP Setting 4 Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP Setting Menu and the ship width for Beam 5 Move the cursor onto the CRP X Y value and left click to input the CCRP1 location When X gt 0 the CCRP is on the starboard side of the ship When X 0 it is on the port side 6 To input the second CCRP click the 2 button to display the CCRP2 X Y value and input the value in the same manner for step 5 similarly input the third and subsequent CCRPs 7 Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location s and radar antenna location s Japan Radio Ltd 7 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 8 If multiple CCRP locations and GPS locations are input select the CCRP location and GPS location to be used by pressing the buttons at the upper left of the menu 9 Click the o Eit to close the CCRP Setting menu 7 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION Example 1 Select CCR
345. nstruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 1 Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu operation TT 3 Trial Maneuver 2 Left click the item button of 1 Trial Function The Trial Function will be set to on or off Off The Trial Function will be set to off Japan Radio Ltd 5 58 SECTION 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY 1 D L Li IN 4 IH I i i i 4 I E B IE ITE i IE B IBI a 1 I 1 7 1 jel E a I E B E m I I I I I E 1 I 1 1 f 1 I 1 I I I 1 I 1 a I I LI L 1 ar 1 I 1 4 PI I i I I 1 i I I LI 1 1 II
346. ntenna will stop rotating Transmit at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a relatively short time Only pressing the TX STBY key starts observation 2 Press POWER key The system will be turned off AN WARNING e When conducting maintenance work make sure to turn o off the power and make the main breaker OFF so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution equipment failure or accidents 3 5 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3 2 1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance BRILL 1 Obtain the best to see display with optimum brilliance by turning the BRILL dial at the lower right of the monitor unit Turning the BRILL dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display Conversely turning the BRILL dial counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire display In consideration of the ambient brightness adjust display brilliance that is high enough to easily observe the radar display but does not glare 3 2 2 Change Observation Range RANGE 1 Pressing the RANG
347. ntervals of 0 1 0 2 0 5 or 1 nm The specified interval 1s displayed in the past position display interval switching in Target Information located at the upper right of the display When _ Off is displayed the track display function 15 turned off The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode and a true or relative track 1s displayed In relative vector mode the relative tracks of the target are displayed In true vector mode true tracks that are calculated from the relative bearing range own ship s course and speed are displayed The target 1 acquisition past position of traced target 1s start plot The AIS target is displayed past position of AIS target 15 start plot If the past position plotted time 1 short the indicated past position duration may not have achieved the specified time or range Japan Radio Ltd 5 44 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 5 6 2 Target Ship s Tracks Target Track This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets The system can display the tracks of up to 20 target ships 5 6 2 1 Track Color Setting Target Track Color 1 Put the cursor on the tracked target or activated AIS target and right click The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed 2 Left click Property The Property will appear 3 Left click the item button of 2 Track Color
348. ntrol the parallel index lines of the next number can be displayed by pressing the EBL dial To close the menu left click 0 Exit software button b Operation if Equiangular is selected e Select a group of lines to be operated according to the setting of 3 Control Pressing the EBL dial switches between the direction change mode and elevation angle change mode Turning the EBL dial changes the direction or elevation angle Japan Radio Ltd 4 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 3 Control Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time The setting items are determined by the setting of Section 2 Operation Mode a If All is selected The setting cannot be changed All All the lines are operated at the same time b If Individual is selected Determine whether to set consecutive lines or individual lines Sequential Lines are operated sequentially Index Line1 to Line8 A specified line is operated c Track or is selected Select a group of lines to be operated Groupi to Group4 specified group is operated 4 Floating Moves the center point of parallel index lines Off starting point of parallel index lines is defined as the own ship s position Screen Fix The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed on the radar display L L Fix
349. nual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 5 AIS menu If the button is clicked the AIS Menu 15 opened Route menu If this button is clicked the Route Menu is opened 7 Parallel index line menu If this button is clicked the PI Menu is opened Automatic acquisition activation zone menu If this button is clicked the AZ Menu is opened 9 User map menu If the button is clicked the User Map Menu 15 opened Brilliance D Display item switching 2 Panel lighting brilliance switching 5 Day night mode lt switching Panel VID TT Lis 3 Radar video brilliance 4 Tracked target AIS target symbol switching brilliance switching Display information D Display item switching 6 User map load Display INFO gt User JRC RADAR Setting 2 7 User setting load 2 29 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS D Display item switching The brilliance adjustment screen and display information setting screen interchange whenever this button 1s clicked Brilliance gt lt Display INFO gt Panel VID lt gt c e ue U Settins 9100 2 Panel lighting brilliance switching This function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of t
350. nual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 2 Sector Blank Setting Sector Blank In order not to display radar echoes set a sector range and stop transmission in the bearing range Three types of sectors can be created The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the benchmark 7 2 2 1 Sector Blank Function On Off Sector1 2 and 3 Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector Blank setting menu 2 Installation Menu 3 Sector Blank 3 Set the sector blank number Sector Sector2 or Sector3 with which the sector blank function operates The system allows the use of up to three sector blank areas Set each sector blank area to on or off On The sector blank function of the number is operated Off The sector blank function of the number is stopped 7 2 2 2 Sector Blank Area Creation Make Sector 1 2 3 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector Blank setting menu 2 Installation Menu 3 Sector Blank 3 Select the sector blank number Sector 1 to MakeSector3 for sector creation and click the Make Sector button in the menu The selected sector blank will be made 7 15 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 4 Setthe starting azimuth of the sector bla
351. o arm uaible Safe Target A wht OFF OFF Danger Target A red CPA TCPA ON Lost Target Symbol on Display Visible Audible Alarm Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 2 Targets simple display Ship s Name Call Sign MMSI Course Speed CPA and TCPA detail display Ship s Name Call Sign MMSI Course Speed CPA TCPA Bearing Range Ship s Heading Bearing Rate of Turn Latitude Longitude Destination and Navigation Status Own Ship s Data ship s name call sign MMSI course speed ship s heading bearing rate of turn latitude longitude destination and navigation status of own ship Trial Maneuver Manual Setting 11 7 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION gt 11 5 AIS FUNCTION Trial Course 0 to 360 Trial Speed O to 100 kn Accuracy of Display Complied with IMO Requirement System Failure Alarm Visible Audible Alarm opeed Input Auto LOG Japan Radio Lid 11 8 Appendix A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit NQE 31441 Interswitch Unit A 1 ER mg A 1 ALI er A 1 A12 Interswitch Setup E UR UERSUM D A 1 A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION 2 A 3 A 2 1 Operation Flow A 3 A22 Inter Switch Menu IRE A 4 A 2 3 Change of Connection Pattern with 2 Display Units A 6 A 2 4 Change of Connection Pattern with or Mor
352. o display time the local time local date and time zone difference must be set However if the ZDA sentence of NMEAO0183 is received time can be automatically displayed 1 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Date Time setting menu Main 7 Sub Menu 6 Date Time Setting The Date Time Setting menu will open 2 Setinformation about date and time 2 1 UTC LMT Time display system Universal Time Coordinate UTC System Time wr Local Mean Time 6 LMT System Time 2 2 LMT Date Input the date in local time 2 3 LMT Time Input the date in local time 2 4 Time Zone Input the time zone difference between the universal time and local time Japan Radio Ltd 7 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 2 5 Display Style oet one of the following date display formats vvvvww D ex 2007 12 31 YYYY ex DEC 31 2007 YYYY ex 31 DEC 2007 2 6 Synchronize with GPS A ZDA sentence sent by the GPS is used thereby displaying time synchronized with the GPS time On Time synchronized with the GPS time Off lime not synchronized with the GPS time i If On is selected for this item but a ZDA sentence is not input the system internal clock function is used to display the date and time 7 2 7 Input Installation Information The system can input installation inf
353. o ine tune the transmitting repetition frequency See Section 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting An interference suppressing effect can be heightened by applying a different transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this radar 6 11 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART A AIS SART is an equipment to display the position of distress ship on the AIS indicator in ship station or coast station when the distress occurs It is usable as an alternate equipment of SART Search And Rescue Transponder When connecting AIS indicator to RADAR it is possible to display AIS SART symbol on the RADAR screen 6 5 1 Display When receiving AIS SART signal AIS SART symbol is displayed on the RADAR screen HDG 030 6 AUTO e dus 1475529 50 58 461 350 1212NM 1540205 N Up GND Off Center Transmit ecd Land Area AIS SART Symbol Mark 450 Track 30 sec Map Map att Data HL Tune wai MAN Multi T Off Off Rie Fig 6 10 Example of AIS SART Symbol display For details of AIS SART Symbol refer to Section 5 1 2 2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols Japan Radio Ltd 6 12 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 5 DISPLAY AIS SART 6 5 2 N
354. oad Mode is switched between Add and Ove When Add is selected new data 1s added to the current data on the card When is selected new data is saved over the current data on the card 5 Left click 3 Load Currently saved target ship s track data will be listed 6 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded The Confirmation Window will appear 7 Left click 1 Yes to load the file The selected target track data will be loaded and shown on the radar display Japan Radio Ltd 5 50 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 2 Saving File Save Procedures 1 2 3 4 5 6 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 7 File Operations Left click the item button of to select a card slot The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slotl and Slot2 Left click 4 Save The Input File Name menu will appear Input the file name to be saved Up to ten characters can be input as a file name For inputs to the characters input screen refer to Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character After the input the Confirmation Window will appear Left click 1 Yes to save the file The currently displayed target track data will be s
355. ocal PLL error TXRX PROC Alarm Radar Processor error TXRX PS Alarm Power Supply error Japan Radio Ltd 6 9 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING Table9 2 List of System Error Message Message Class TXRX Reverse Alarm TXRX SSW Off Alarm TXRX Trigger Alarm TXRX Video Alarm Wind Data Alarm Description ALR Scanner Reverse rotation Scanner Safety switch OFF Scanner TRIGGER error Scanner VIDEO error Wind direction velocity No communication or data 118 error i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence Table9 3 List of Notification Over 95 of the maximum number of targets to be tracked Message Class Description ALR No CCRP Changed INFO is automatically changed Copying INFO Displayed image is capturing to file POSN Reset INFO Change the latitude and longitude sentence Set GYRO INFO J Requires setting of true bearing TM Reset INFO Resetting TM in a short time i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence Table9 4 List of Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms Message Class Description ALR No AIS Data Alarm AIS No communication or communication error 116 AIS 95 Capacity INFO Over 95 of the maximum number of AIS targets be ACT 95 INFO Over 95 of the maximum number of AIS targets to Capacity be
356. od on the character input menu see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character The selected display unit or antenna unit will be renamed when the new name is input A 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3144 Interswitch Unit gt A 3 REFERENCE A 3 1 A 3 2 A 3 3 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern After the current interswitch connection pattern has been changed operation needs to wait until the system 1s ready This 1s because the preheat time varies depending on the previous connection of the scanner unit and display unit The wait time is necessary for protecting the electronic tubes that emit radio Waves a When not changed to a new connection pattern Preheating not required b When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating not scanner unit had been used before the change required c When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating scanner unit had not been used before the change required Notes on Changing Connection Pattern An attempt to change to another connection pattern immediately after the completion of connection pattern change may fail This 1s because internal processing still needs some preparation time upon completion of connection pattern change Let several seconds pass between connection pattern change operations Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit Before a slave display unit can
357. ode between the inside and outside of the area n Section 3 8 1 5 2nd Process Mode 2nd Process Mode set the second video process mode for the area outside the boundary In 2 PROCESS of Main Menu set the first video process mode for the area inside the boundary e Gain at a distance can be improved by suppressing near sea clutter through the correlative process There are two methods for setting an area Off Disables the Process Switching function Standard setting Range Fix Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center Set the boundary range in Section 3 8 1 6 Process Switch Range The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship s position as the center AUTO Automatically sets a specific area The area subject to many clutter returns is inside the boundary and the area less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary 3 8 1 5 2nd Process Mode e Set the second video process mode for the outside of a specific area This function is enabled when RangeFix or AUTO is selected in Section 3 8 1 4 Process Switch Video process modes PROC Off Select this mode in general 3Scan CORREL Select this mode when many rain snow clutter returns are detected 4Scan CORREL Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns 5 Scan CORREL Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns Remain Select this mode when own ship yaws
358. of Using Route The method of using the route will be described Displaying the route The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in Route Alarm Color Section 3 7 1 Display Route Destination Mark Select Route Selecting the forward or Whether to use Waypoints forward or backward is selected backward of the route Route Sequence Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint Skip Waypoint Skipping back of the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint Waypoint Back Skip 3 7 5 1 Selecting the forward or backward of the route Route Sequence Select whether Waypoints in route data are used in the forward direction or backward direction a Foward a OSL N gt Backward 1 Open the WPT Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 3 WPT Route Operations 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode Forward Waypoints are used in the forward direction ascending order Reverse Waypoints are used in the reverse direction descending order Japan Radio Ltd 3 82 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 5 2 Skipping Back skipping of the route Waypoint Skip Waypoint Back Skip Next Waypoint of the route can be changed by user manually i gt lt gt Forward
359. ollowing menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear 2 Left click the 5 Insert Move Vertex button The user map insert correction mode is selected Insert Move is displayed in the cursor mode located the upper right of the display 3 Putthe cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted and left click A vertex is inserted into the selected line and the 47 cursor mark will be displayed 4 Move the 47 cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex and left click To insert another vertex repeat procedures 3 and 4 5 When finished with the correction of all items left click the 0 Exit button The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode terminating the user map insertion correction mode 3 57 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP Example The side line into which a vertex is inserted Inserted vertex 3 6 3 5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line Insert Move Vertex With regard to the created user map a mark or line is corrected Procedures 1 2 3 4 5 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear Left click the 5 Insert Move Vertex button The user map insertion correction mode is selected Insert Move is displayed in the curso
360. olor section 5 6 2 1 on page 5 45 1 All Target Track No 1 Target Track No 2 Target Track No 3 Target Track No 4 Target Track No 5 Target Track No 6 Target Track No 7 Next Target Track No 8 Target Track No 9 Target Track No 10 Other Track Display section 5 6 2 4 on page 5 47 All Target Track No 1 Target Track No 2 Target Track No 3 Target Track No 4 Target Track No 5 Target Track No 6 Target Track No 7 Next Target Track No 8 Target Track No 9 Target Track No 10 Other Track Memory Interval section 5 6 2 5 on page 5 48 Clear Track Color section 5 6 2 6 on page 5 48 Clear Track Number File Operations section 5 6 2 7 on page 5 49 1 Select Card Slot 2 Load Mode 3 Load page 5 50 4 5 55 J H r L NOOR WD 2 Targe m d EE Dopo serais ae shee subs up see O1 ON s 3 ge poo I d bep EE BRONOQO OO0 amp ROoONA Ei ios page 5 51 Erase 5 52 6 T TRK Display page 5 53 1 13 Trial Maneuver section 5 7 on page 5 54 1 Trial Function 2 C
361. on located at the lower right of the display The ship s heading line HL is hidden while the HL OFF key is held down The ship s heading line that indicates the course of own ship is always shown on the radar display The heading line is hidden while the HL OFF key is held down so the targets on the heading line can be easily observed 3 4 11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display DATA OFF Various graphics information such as target tracking TT AIS symbols NAV lines and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system and may make it difficult to view the radar video In that case use this function to temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information Procedures Data 1 Press the DATA OFF key Alternatively Left click the Off button located at the lower right of the display While the key is pressed graphics data other than VRM EBL HL cross cursor mark and range rings on the radar display 1s temporarily hidden 3 35 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3 4 12 Switch Day Night Mode DAY NIGHT Several combinations of the display color and brilliance according to the ambient lighting conditions are provided The display color setting 1s easily changed Procedures 1 Press the DAY NIGHT key Alternatively left click the Day Night button located at the lower right of the radar display The DAY NIGHT modes ar
362. on such as changing of the display range is performed for the radar display own ship s track display is erased and the track will not be plotted again If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship track is in storage own ship s tracks are not shown on the radar display but own ship s track is still saved The own ship s track function is available between latitudes of 85 Nand 85 S 3 5 1 Display Own Ship s Track Display Own Track Procedures 1 Left click the Own Track Color Track button located at the lower right of the display Own Track Interval Own Track Interval Unit Mark Own Track Color Track 30 sec Map Map Shift Map On Off The color of the own ship s track are switched Off White Gray Blue 4 Red lt Pink lt Yellow lt Green 2 Left click the Map button located at the lower right of the display The map display function is turned on Map or off E When Color is selected the own ship s track is displayed Japan Radio Ltd 3 40 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 2 Set Display Color of Own Ship s Track Display Own Track Color Own ship s track can be saved in seven different colors Own ship s track can be displayed or not displayed individually by color Procedures 1 Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by perform
363. onditions as in the True Vector mode in the previous page it 1s seen that the acquired target 1s a dangerous one because its vector 1s crossing the CPA RING NORMAL HL Dangerous target S CPA Ring TRIAL HL Change of symbol as a result of trial maneuver S CPA Ring Fig 5 8 Relative Vector Mode The above Fig 5 8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the figure as a result of simulation course and speed so that the symbol color is changed into White a safe target Irrespective of the simulation results the current CPA and TCPA values are shown in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted line Better information 1s provided by using relative motion and sea stabilization Japan Radio Ltd 5 56 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 5 7 3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function 1 Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu operation TT 3 Trial Maneuver 2 Left click the item button of 1 Trial Function The Trial Function will be set to on or off On The trial maneuvering function is turned on Off The trial maneuvering function is turned off When the Trial Function is active the character T will display at the bottom of the radar display 3 Set
364. onnection pattern will be changed A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a G slave connection 7 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION A 2 5 Operating Connection Pattern Files File Operations Frequently used connection patterns can be read easily by saving interswitch connection patterns 1 Loading connection patterns Load 1 Open the Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units 2 Left click the 2 File Operation button The File Operations menu will appear 3 Left click the 3 Load button Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed 4 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded Confirmation Window will appear 5 Left click the 1 Yes to load The connection pattern will be changed 2 Saving connection patterns Save 1 Open the Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units 2 Left click the 2 File Operation button The File Operations window will appear 3 Left click the 2 Save button The Save menu will appear Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed 4 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be saved The Input File Name window will appear 5 Enter the file name to be saved Up to 8 characters can be entered For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7
365. onstant Adjust the vector follow up performance of the target tracking function The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value so do not change it carelessly Attention Do not change the set value carelessly The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally If the vector constant value is higher a target s vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship change their course or speed but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Vector Constant adjustment menu 7 31 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 9 RADAR TT Initial Setup 2 TT 1 Vector Constant The window for setting vector constants will appear 3 Input the value to be set For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 7 3 2 2 Quantization Level Adjustment Video TD Level Use the target tracking function TT to adjust the level of the signal to be recognized as a target If a small value is set even weak target signals will be input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function However many unnecessary signals are also input which may cause unstable target acquisition or tracking It 1s important to set a value four or f
366. or length of a target for 6 minutes and the tip of the vector represents the target s position expected to reach 6 minutes later A Future predicted position 6 min later in this example Current position Fig 5 6 Vector Length Refer to Section 5 1 6 Setting Vectors Vector Time Japan Radio Ltd 5 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 5 1 4 Cursor Modes Cursor 5 1 4 1 Types and Functions of Cursor Modes The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below To use the function of a cursor mode move the cursor onto the PPI object and left click Mode Function ACQ TT Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual mode ACT AIS Activates AIS targets and sets a point filter TGT Data Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target CNCL TT Cancels a tracking target DEACT AIS Deactivates AIS target Data CNCL Hides the displayed numeric data of a tracked target or AIS target Mark Puts a temporary mark Property Displays the information of tracked targets AIS targets and marks AUTO Changes operation in accordance with the object at the cursor position 5 1 4 2 Change of Cursor Mode Procedures 1 Left click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the display Alternatively on the PPI right click and select a desired cursor mode from the list The selected cursor mode will
367. ormation Procedures 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Installation Information setting menu Main 1 Installation Information 3 Input the installation information For the input method on the numeric value and character input screens see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu Date Input the date of installed system Name Input the name of installation personel Company Input the name of radar installer 7 2 8 Setting the Alarm System 7 2 8 1 Setting the reset interval Reset Interval This function enables the control of WMRST terminal on the terminal board circuit The reset signal 1s turned on when operation in a set period of time 7 19 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Reset Interval menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System 1 Watch Alarm 1 Reset Interval 3 Input the value to be set For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 7 2 8 2 Setting the Trackball Threshold This function enables the control of WMRST terminal on the terminal board circuit The reset signal is turned off when trackbal
368. ormation Water temperature indication TEMP 2 0 Water temperature Water temperature range Water temperature graph Time range Graph information Wind direction speed Wind 2251 1 3m s Wind direction speed true relative Wind direction Wind speed Auto pilot course Ship s heading bearing Rudder NS y T dues 2 OO Japan Radio Ltd 2 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Numeric information Marker MOB 51702 384 N 1706 1 78 75 3 Marker bearing Marker latitude Marker range 0 430 Marker longitude 00 02 Arrival time Menu Main menu Digital information Parallel index linemenu Target Main PI P Target Tracking TT men Automatic acquisition 9 9 5 TT AIS AZ activation zone AZ menu Track Route Map Own Track menu User map menu AIS menu Route menu Brilliance Main menu Digital information Parallel index linemenu Target Main PI Target Tracking men Automatic acquisition 9 9 AIS 2 activation zone AZ menu Track Route U Map Own Track menu User map menu AIS menu Route menu Display information Panel lighting brilliance lt Brilliance E Day night mode Panel VID 742 Radar video brilliance Tracked target AIS target symbol brilliance 2 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFT
369. ourse EBL 3 Speed VRM 4 Vector Time 5 6 12 541 ap Time to Maneuver Own Ship s Dynamic Trait 1 Reach 2 Turn Radius 3 Acceleration 4 Deceleration El4 AIS Filter Setting section 5 3 7 on page 5 33 H 1 Filter Type section 5 3 7 2 on page 5 33 H 2 Make AIS Filler section 5 3 7 3 on page 5 34 Japan Radio Ltd C 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 5 AZ 3 Filter Display section 5 3 7 4 on page 5 35 4 ENT 26 Filter Mode mmm section 5 3 7 5 on page 5 35 F 5 Target Number Display section 5 3 6 on page 5 32 6 AIS Alarm Setting section 5 3 9 on page 5 37 L 7 ost Alans 2s Soo ee ee section 5 3 9 1 on page 5 37 e c2 CPALICPA Ss Sr See e eut ee section 5 3 9 2 on page 5 37 HE7 Message section 5 3 5 5 on page 5 30 H 1 Addressed Message 2 Broadcast Message 8 Display Lost Data section 5 3 5 6 on page 5 32 L 9 Own Ship s AIS Data section 5 3 5 7 on page 5 32 5 az F TAZ1 section 5 2 1 1 on page 5 15 F 2 72
370. ous Waypoint to next Waypoint is displayed 3 6 5 ON OFF of Waypoint number display WPT Number Display Set whether to display a Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 9 Next 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode Off The Waypoint number is not displayed On The Waypoint number is displayed Japan Radio Ltd 3 86 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 6 6 Route Information Display Display the planned couse and the planned speed onto the route 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 9 Next Left click the set value of the 6 Route Information Display item and select an operation mode Off The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are not displayed On The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are displayed 3 7 6 7 Draw AZI Mode Set the azimuth direction of the route and user map Procedures 1 Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 9 Next Left click the set value of the item and select an operation mode N Up The azimuth direction is set North Up mode C Up The azimuth direction is set Couse Up mode 3 7 6 8 Updating Waypoint data Waypoint Switc
371. pan Radio Co Ltd 10 2 SECTION 11 SPECIFICATION SPECIFICATION 11 1 JMA 9172 59A TYPE ne ctu cun 11 1 11 2 SCANNER UNIT NKE 1532 eere eene nee enne nnn nnn 11 2 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 eere eere eene 11 3 11 4 Target Tracking Function 11 6 11 5 IS FUNGTIODN 11 7 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION gt 11 1 JMA 9172 SA TYPE RADAR 1 1 JMA 9172 SA TYPE RADAR GENERAL SPECIFICATION Class of emission PON QON Display Color Raster Scan screen 23 1inch LCD Effective diameter of Radar more than 320mm Range Scale 0 125 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 5 3 6 12 24 48 96NM Range Resolution less than 30m Minimum Detection Range less than 40m Bearing Accuracy less than 1 Bearing Indication Relative motion mode N UP C UP and H UP True motion mode N UP and C UP Ambient Condition Temperature SCANNER UNIT 25 to 55 C Storage 25 to 70 Other Unit 15 to 55 C Relative humidity 93 at 40 C Vibration 2 to 13 2Hz Amplitude 1mm 10 13 2 to 100Hz Acceleration 7m s Power Supply Input AC100 to 115V 50 60Hz 1 or AC220 to 240V 50 60Hz 10 Power Consumpt
372. pear Thus set a gain correction value to the side page 5 2 PRF same function as in the TXRX Setting described in Section 3 8 3 Set Scanner Unit TXRX Setting 3 117 Japan Radio Co Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER page 5 3 Small Buoy Detection Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets Off Activates the general signal processing mode On Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss of signal processing page 5 4 FishNet Detection Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter suppression function is used together Off Activates the general signal processing mode On Activates the fishnet detection mode page 5 5 Antenna Height e Set the height of radar antenna above sea level The STC FTC curve is changed Default Set default 5m Set the antenna height under 5m 5m 10m Set the antenna height 5m to 10m 10me20m Set the antenna height 10m to 20m 20m Set the antenna height over 20m Japan Radio Ltd 3 118 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 3 9 4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data The overview of saved function setting data 1s as follows Factory set data Saved data that general operation cannot chan
373. pecified mark will be displayed in the specified color To create another mark repeat the above procedures 3 6 1 2 Plotting a line Procedures 1 Left click the button located at the upper right of the display to select the line mode The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the button 2 Left click the m z button located at the upper right of the display to select the line pattern The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the button 3 Left click the c button located to the right of the line pattern to select a color for the line The color for the line pattern located to the right of the button will change 4 Left click at a desired location on the radar display Line colors are switched 3 49 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5 Move the cursor to a desired location on the radar display and left click A line is plotted between the previous point and the end point Repeat this procedure so that sequential lines can be plotted 6 When you want to finish plotting the line left click at the previous point Line plotting will be terminated To plot another line repeat procedures 3 3 6 1 3 Plotting a mark line make with latitude and longitude 1 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map 2 Make with L L 2 Left click the 9 New Mark
374. perator him herself Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground Japan Radio Ltd x N CAUTION Use Target Tracking TT function only as a navigation aid The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him herself Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target information may cause accidents Tracking target information such as vector target numerical data and alarms may contain some errors Also targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar In this case the power should be turned on again When using the AUTO SEA function never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited When using the AUTO SEA function make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level When using the AUTO RAIN function never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range Detection of not o
375. ppear 2 Setthe item The following route destination mark display modes can be selected Off Route and destination marks are not displayed Internal Route saved in the system are displayed NMEA Destination marks are displayed by using WPT data sent from outside navigation equipment ECDIS GPS Route created in the ECDIS and GPS are displayed i To display the mark on the radar display NMEA select The destination mark is displayed only when the Waypoint data is received from outside by using the NMEA sentence RMB BWC BWR When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS following items are not displayed XTL Arrival Radius ROT Turn Radius Time Zone Sail Japan Radio Ltd 3 68 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 1 1 Displaying route created by the radar system Internal In this radar system route created by the radar system are displayed as shown below Planned Course Qo Route alarm line 074T 004 Waypoint 12 5kn Waypoint bearing vector 3 OPQRS 062T N Comments 10 0kn Waypoint number Route 2 FGJK Waypoint alarm circle 0701 Crm 50kn ABCDE Planned Speed Route alarm line To Waypoint The following rout data is displayed Waypoint Up to 512 points number 000 to 511 comments can be entered To Waypoint Next Waypoint is disp
376. r Display A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a target 1s acquired A target ID number to 100 1s assigned to each target in acquisition order Once a target ID number is assigned it identifies the target until the target 1s lost or the target acquisition is canceled Procedures 1 Open the TT Menu by following menu operation TT 2 Left click the item button of 4 Target Number Display Target Number Display will appear 3 Press the numeric key corresponding to the display method to be set On Displays target ID numbers Off Hides target ID numbers Target Track Displays target ID number with target track If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing set Target Number Display to off to view the radar display easily An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed 5 19 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name Name The system can enter a name for each of tracking targets that have been acquired 1 Putthe cursor on the tracked target and right click The cursor mode list will appear 2 Left click property The Property will appear 3 Left click the item button of 1 Name The setting items for ship name Name will be displayed 4 Sel
377. r Receiver System ATT Value down gt 3 0dB Please consult the purchased distributor or nearest branch office or our sales department Note Features of Performance monitor of JMA 9172 SA radar The performance of the receiver and the transmitter is automatically calculated and indicated on the radar screen like XX X dB in two or three digit value Receiver check is performed within the PM sector in direction of stern of ship Therefore even if the performance monitor is activated the performance monitor pattern echo like the performance monitor of the magnetron radar 15 not displayed at all As aresult the radar operator can clearly observe the echo around ships other than the direction of the stern 8 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8 3 1 5 8 3 1 6 System Alarm Log display Displays previously occurred system alarms with the dates and times when they occurred The current alarm is displayed at the lower right of the radar display For details refer to Section 9 1 1 List of Alarms and other Indications Mo Alarm The Alarm log display button page2 31 Alarm is clicked in the same way as that one To erase the alarm logs press the All Clear button in the log display window System Information Displays the current system information Processor software version information scanner software version information
378. r gyro on the numeric value input screen For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 3 4 15 Set Own Ship Speed 3 4 15 1 Switch the own ship speed device Procedures 1 Left click the own ship speed device button the Own Ship Information area located at the upper right of the display Own ShiP Information 95 HDG cvs 000 0 SPowm 00 kn The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked MAN Manual 106 Single axis water log 2AXW Dual axis water log m GPS GPS lt 2AXG Dual axis ground log 3 37 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION NOTE f the single axis water log display can present the speed of the ship in other than the forward direction the direction of movement should be indicated unambiguously Therefore single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway elf you selected the 2AXW the value of forward backward direction is indicated elf ships in shallow water when the accuracy of the dual axis log may be decreased If ships in deep sea area when the accuracy of the dual axis log error may be occurred accuracy of GPS s COG is 3 when own ships speed no fewer than 1kn no more than 17kn The accuracy of GPS s COG is 1 when own ships speed over 17kn
379. r mode located at the upper right of the display Put the cursor on the mark or vertex of a line and left click When the mark or vertex of a line to be corrected 1s selected the 47 cursor mark will appear Move the 47 cursor mark to the destination and left click The selected mark or vertex of the line is moved to the destination To correct another mark or vertex of a line repeat procedures 3 and 4 When finished with the correction of all items left click the 0 Exit button Japan Radio Ltd 2 58 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode terminating the user map insertion correction mode Example Original vertex New vertex 3 6 3 6 Deleting a mark or vertex from a line Delete Vertex With regard to the created user map a vertex is deleted individually from a mark or line 1 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear 2 Left click the 6 Delete Vertex button The user map delete mode is selected is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the radar display 3 Putthe cursor on the vertex of a mark or line and left click The selected mark or vertex of the line 1s deleted All of the lines drawn by joining two points are deleted To delete another mark or vertex of
380. racking algorithm So stable operation in target tracking under clutter 1s ensured e Acquisition and tracking of 100 targets Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well as sounds Trial maneuvering functions provided Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maximum of 1 500 points for each of them and displayed distinguished by using seven different colors Overlay of Radar Images Coastlines and Own Ship s Track As well as operator created NAV lines and own ship s tracks ARPA tracks which is stored on the memory card can be superimpose displayed with radar images and radar trails in all display modes including the head up mode Easy Operation with GUI All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display 1 The displayed resolution corresponds to 5 5 1280 1024 Japan Radio Co Lid 1 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 2 FEATURES Improved Day Night Mode Five types of background colors are available in Day Dusk Night mode total 5 background colors Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the user s operating environment by simple key operation The radar echoes and a variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors ensuring easy to see displays Compact Design and Low Power Consumption
381. rating state switches as follows IR Off IRMedde IR High IR Off Japan Radio Ltd 3 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 6 Basic Menu Operation To open the menu By left clicking the _ Main button located at the lower right of the radar display the main menu will open By left clicking the buttons IT AIS and AZ adjacent to Main each function s exclusive menu will open For the arrangement of software buttons see Section 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS To close the menu By left clicking the Target button the menu will close and the target data display screen will appear Alternatively left click O Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the menu will close To move to a lower level of the menu The menu 1 in hierarchical structure By left clicking the software button for a desired menu item it is possible to move to the lower level of the menu Alternatively Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number and the gt mark will appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level To move to a higher level of the menu By left clicking O Exit at the bottom of the menu while the menu is open it is possible to return to the upper level of the menu To determine an item By left clicking the software button
382. ration below Main 7 Sub Menu 9 EBL Cursor Setting gt 3 Cursor Setting The Cursor Setting menu will appear Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items 3 8 4 1 EBL VRM Control Cursor The EBL VRM Control Cursor is switched between Valid and Invalid The trackball is provided as a standard device If the trackball malfunctions the cursor can be moved by using the EBL dial and VRM dial The cursor moves horizontally when EBL is operated and moves vertically when VRM is operated To switch between EBL VRM operation and cursor operation while ON 15 selected hold down the EBL dial for 2 seconds On Cursor is operated using a EBL VRM dial Off Cursor is operated using a trackball 3 8 4 2 Cursor Length Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display Short Cuts the cross cursor mark in length Long Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when Short is selected Japan Radio Ltd 3 100 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 4 3 Cursor Pattern The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display Type 2 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display Type 3 is selected for the cross cursor mark 3 displayed in t
383. ration of VRM beforehand The system is equipped with two VRM The VRM can be operated separately from each other An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL of the same number When the starting point of an EBL is offset the center of the VRM is defined as the offset EBL starting point Intersection markers shown on VRM O EBL1 VRM1 e EBL2 VRM2 Japan Radio Ltd 4 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS EBL2 VRM2 EBL1 VRM1 VRM Operation The range value of the current or VRM2 on the PPI display is shown in the VRMI 2 range located at the upper right of the display The currently operable VRM1 or 2 is highlighted in the VRM1 VRM2 button located at the upper right of the display 4 1 3 4 To operate VRM VRM 1 Press the VRM1 or VRM2 key The _ VRMi and VRM2 buttons located at the upper right of the display will be highlighted and the selected VRM becomes operable 2 Turn the dial To turn the dial to the right the control wide to turn the dial to the left the VRM control narrow 1 Press the VRM1 or VRM2 key again The selected EBL display will disappear 4 7 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 4 Using Parallel Inde
384. revent danger Apply paint to them once a half year because painting 1s the best measure against corrosion 8 2 2 Display Unit NCD 9170 AN WARNING When cleaning the screen do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth Also do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen Otherwise the screen surface may be damaged Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video For cleaning it wipe it with a piece of soft cloth flannel or cotton Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner Japan Radio Ltd 8 4 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem 1 found investigate it immediately Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement Take note of the results of checking which can be used effectively 1n the next check work Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8 1 Function Check List 1n the order as specified in it Table8 1 Performance Check List Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Remarks Display Unit Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity be correctly controlled LCD brilliance can be controlled correctly Various markers Various numerica
385. rforming the following menu operation TT gt 2 Target Track Setting 6 Clear Track Number The setting items for Clear Track Number will be displayed 2 Left click the button corresponding to the number of the tracks to be cleared The Confirmation Window will appear 3 Left click 1 Yes to clear the track line The tracks of the selected number will be cleared 5 6 2 7 Operation of Target Ship s Track Data Saved on Card File Operations Target ship s track data can be saved on a flash memory card and read from the card Data can be saved to a flash memory card until the card G becomes full but the number of files that can be read and displayed is limited to 64 in alphanumeric order When the number of files has reached 64 delete unnecessary files 5 49 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION 1 Loading File Load Procedures 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card option is necessary 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation TT 2 Target Track Setting 7 File Operations 3 Left click the item button of 1 Select Card Slot to select a card slot The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slotl and Slot2 4 Left click the item button of 2 Load Mode to select Add or Overwrite The setting item for L
386. rget 3 AIS CPA TCPA There is a dangerous target AIS target 4 New Target A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone 5 Lost There is a lost target Target Tracking AIS 7 2 8 4 Setting the ALR output ALR Output This function enables the control of ALR port See Section 7 2 1 Communication Port Setting COM Port Setting 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the ALR Output menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System 2 Relay Output 7 21 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION gt 7 2 SETTINGS 3 Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed The item is turned on off On he ALR sentence is output when alarm have issued Off The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued 1 System Alarm internal alarm 2 TT AIS Alarm Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms 7 2 8 5 Setting the External Acknowledgement External ACK Setting This function enables the control of system when ACK sentence have received 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External ACK Setting menu 2 Installation Menu 6 Alarm System b External ACK Setting 3 Click the item button corresponding to the menu to be changed Critical Alarm CPA TCPA alarm Normal Alarm Exept Criti
387. rget and an AIS target are decided as identical it 1s displayed with either of the following symbols Vector Definition Remarks oymbol Association target Priority for AIS target Association target a Setting of Tracked Target Symbol Display Priority for tracked target This function switches the tracking target symbol display between on and off Even if the tracking target symbol display is turned off the data 15 retained 1 Left click the button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display The tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off Japan Radio Ltd 5 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION b Setting of AIS Target Symbol Display This function switches the AIS target symbol display between on and off 1 Left click the lt button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display The AIS target symbol display will be set to on or off 5 1 3 Radar Display 5 1 3 1 Vector Display A vector to represent a target s predicted position can be presented in the True vector or Relative vector mode In each mode a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60 minutes To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode press the T R VECT key 5 1 3 2 Vector Mode Selection 1 True Vector Mode In the true vector mode the direction of a ta
388. rget vector indicates the true course of the target and its vector length 1s proportional to its speed In this mode own ship s vector is displayed as shown Fig 5 4 In this mode the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily monitored However CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode Own ship s position True vector The relative vector is not displayed Fig 5 4 True Vector 5 9 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 1 PREPARATION 2 Relative Vector Mode The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target but its relative relation with own ship This means that a target with its relative vector directed to own ship passing through the CPA Limit ring will be a dangerous target In the Relative Vector mode it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the dangerous target 15 Therefore the True Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of observation the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target and the Relative vector mode for grasping a target s closest point of approach CPA The true vector is not displayed Relative vector Fig 5 5 Relative Vector 5 1 33 Vector Length Vector Time The vector length of a target 1s proportional to its speed and the vector time can be switched in a range of to 60 minutes The diagram below illustrates a vect
389. ring BRG 0 1 unit Range 0 01NM unit Cource 0 1 unit opeed 0 1knot unit Closest point of approach 0 01NM unit CPA Time to CPA TCPA 0 1min unit Bow crossing range BCR 0 01NM unit Bow crossing time BCT 0 1min unit The target for which its numeric data is displayed 1s marked with a symbol E to distinguish from other targets If a target s data 1s displayed but without the symbol such a target exists outside the currently displayed radar display 5 2 3 2 Method of Displaying Numeric Data DATA 1 Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to be displayed and press the TGT DATA key Then the data of the designated target will appear it will be marked with a symbol E The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector disappears or until another target is designated If a target with the mark Cu is designated only its true bearing and range will appear until its vector appears Japan Radio Ltd 5 18 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 3 3 Cancellation of Numeric Data Display CNCL Data Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the tracked target with which numeric data is displayed and right click The cursor mode list will appear 2 Left click 9 CNC Data button The numeric value will disappear 5 2 4 Displaying Target ID No Target Numbe
390. rm circle Japan Radio Ltd 3 80 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Arrival Break Set the operation mode 0 00nm Set the radius of the Waypoint alarm circle If 0 00nm is set alarm operation will be turned off 3 7 4 2 Route Alarm The route alarm is activated when own ship deviates from the specified width of the route The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided Route alarm line Break Off alarm is activated when own ship is outside the specified range a To Waypoint P d 7 N 2 2 Own ship Route alarm line position Route Alarm has the following two types of operations Approach An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from outside XTE Cross An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range Track Error 1 Open the WPT Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 2 Left click the set value of the item and select an 2 Route Alarm Approach 0 00nm operation mode Operation mode Width of the route one side Approach XTE Set the operation mode 0 00nm Set the width of the route one side If 0 00nm is set an alarm operation will be turned off 3 81 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 7 5 Method
391. rned off If Relay Output menu is turned off when Alam Buzzer is turned on For how to setting Buzzer Volume menu see Section 3 8 6 Adjust Sound Volume Buzzer Volume 7 23 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 2 SETTINGS 7 2 9 Network Setting Network The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN The purpose of JRC LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems The JRC systems are synchronized with datum in JRC LAN network To connect JRC LAN LAN cable and HUB option is G necessary For details contact the JRC offices NOTE If the connection is not suggested from JRC office don t connect PC or other maker s system to JRC LAN Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower radar system performance Connecting PC or other maker s system may cause a lower that performance Accepted Devices RADAR JMA 7100 9100 5300MK2 Series ECDIS JMA 901B 701B Chart RADAR JMA 900B Series Conning Display JMA 901B CON 701B CON Route planning system JAN 1186 Navigation workstation NDC 1186 GPS DGPS JLR 7500 7800 Receivable Data 1 Route Data The system can display the route created by other JRC navigation equipements Refer to Section 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS G following items are not displayed e XTL e Arrival Radius e ROT Turn Radius Time Zone
392. rrent direction for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2 axis log 1s displayed A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS a certain location Speed Over the Ground The speed of the ship relative to the earth measured on board of the ship Short Pulse STABilization Speed Through Water The speed of the ship relative to the water surface T Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement True Motion A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an afterglow A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision avoidance purposes The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea of a target expressed as an angular displacement from north The speed of a target relative to ground or to sea XXIV True vector TT TTG TXRX UTC VRM Waypoint A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target showing course and speed with reference to the ground or sea Target Tracking A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the position of a radar target order to establish its motion Such a target 1s a Tracked Target Time To Go Time to next waypoint Transmitter Receiver Unit U Universal
393. rror Out of Bounds Alarm Own ship s latitude is over 85 85 S 123 Position Data Alarm Latitude longitude data No communication or data 102 error PROC AZI Alarm Process unit AZI error 305 PROC HL Alarm Process unit HL error 306 PROC Interrupt Alarm Process unit Interrupt error 962 PROC Trigger Alarm Process unit Trigger error 304 PROC Video Alarm Process unit VIDEO error 303 ROT Data Alarm Rate of Turn No communication or data error 120 RSA Data Alarm Rudder Sensor Angle No communication or data 121 error m 2AXG Alarm 2 log speed over ground No communication 114 or data error Speed 2AXW Alarm 2 log speed over water No communication or 114 data error Speed GPS Alarm 5 speed No communication or data error 114 Speed Log Alarm 1 axis log No communication or data error 114 SRB Data Alarm SRB No communication or data error 960 TEMP Data Alarm Water temperature No communication or data error 117 TXRX AZI Alarm Scanner BP error 311 TXRX Data Alarm Scanner No communication communication 326 mismatched checksum error or collision TXRX Fan 1 Alarm Scanner FAN 1 error Fan B103 is stopped TXRX Fan 2 Alarm Scanner FAN 2 error Fan B105 is stopped TXRX Fan 3 Alarm Scanner FAN 3 error Fan B106 is stopped TXRX HL Alarm Scanner HL error TXRX Lo PLL Alarm Scanner L
394. rsor Setting section 3 8 4 on page 3 100 1 EBL VRM Control Cursor 2 Cursor Length 4 Cursor Pattern NO BW TTE E RET T ERAS TREE FERES Se EF ue pe at ee ge re E6 D HE me 8 Plot Setting L 6 AUTOBackup section 3 8 9 on page 3 111 HE9 Test Menu section 8 3 1 on page 8 5 Self Test section 8 3 1 1 on page 8 6 C 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt C Menu Index gt C 1 Main 1 SDRAM 2 SRAM 3 FLASH ROM 4 GRAPHIC 2 TXRX Test 3 Line Test 4 Supply Voltage 2 Monitor lest u ue di eit diei ee 1 Pattern 1 2 Pattern 2 3 Pattern 3 4 Pattern 4 5 Pattern 5 6 7 8 1 Memory Test Pattern 6 Pattern 7 L 8 Pattern 8 2 Keyboard Test co ono mom omo nom mom edt ee 1 Test 2 Buzzer Test L 3 Light Test 4 Display
395. rting point mode switching The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button 15 clicked gt B5 m Center The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position C Screen Fix The starting point is set to the cursor position If left clicked subsequently the starting position is fixed to the cursor position DJ L L Fix The starting point is set to the cursor position If left clicked subsequently the starting position is fixed to the latitude longitude of the cursor Connection of a navigator is necessary If the starting point is moved outside of the screen the operation is reset automatically and the starting point returns to the CCRP position i is enabled only when a navigator is connected 43 Parallel index line setting This function sets the parallel index line display to On Off and acquires the operation right If this button is clicked the operation right is acquired and the menu is opened After setting determine the setting by left clicking 2 21 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Parallel index line starting point mode switching The parallel index line starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button is clicked In the same way as for the EBL starting point three options are available Center
396. s at sea using an automated transponder Rain snow clutter suppression Sea clutter suppression A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported AIS target having similar parameters position course speed which comply with an association algorithm AZImuth stabilization mode B Bow Crossing Range Bow Crossing Time C Course up Own ship s course is pointed to the top center of the radar display Consistent Common Reference Point A location on own ship to which all horizontal measurements such as target range bearing relative course relative speed CPA or TCPA are referenced typically the conning position of the bridge Unwanted reflections on a radar screen from sea surface rain or snow Course Over Ground The direction of the ship s movement relative to the earth measured on board the ship expressed in angular units from true north CORRELation Japan Radic Co Ltd CPA TCPA CTW DRIFT EBL ETA Ground stabilization HDG HL HSC H up IMO ISW The distance to the Closest Point of Approach Time to the Closest Point of Approach Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship Course Through Water The direction of the ship s movement through the water D The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2 axis log 1s displayed E Electronic Bearing Line An electronic bearing line originated
397. s heart c Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face d Check the size of the pupils of his eyes Open the victim s mouth and take out artificial teeth cigarette or chewing gum if any Keep his mouth open stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating If it 1s hard to open his mouth due to set teeth open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth Then wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside Japan Radio Ltd i x When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped Mouth to mouth respiration Fig 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tilt the victim s head back as far as this face looks back A pillow may be inserted his neck Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide to spread his airway Pinch the victim s nostrils and take a deep breath block his mouth completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes blocking his nostrils Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop practicing artificial respiration If it is difficult to open the victim s mouth insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely When the victim recovers consciousness he may try to stand up suddenly but
398. s to be performed by service engineers during system installation The bearing adjustment value is saved to non volatile memory in the scanner Other settings are saviedto non volatile memory in the radar process unit AN CAUTION Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons If wrong setting is carried out this may cause unstable operation Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation Otherwise the radar performance may be affected resulting in an accident or trouble 7 1 1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu Service Man Menu Procedures 1 Hold down the Main button at the lower right of the display together with the left key Code Input Only for Service Engineer Press and ENT to Serviceman Menu The Code Input menu will appear j 2 Left click the 0 button 3 Left click the ENT button The Serviceman Menu will appear Fig 7 1 Code Input 7 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7 1 2 GYRO I F Setting a Gyro Settings STEP or SYNC The GYRO I F circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types of gyro compasses by simply setting the switches Step motor type DC24V to DC100V Synchro motor type Primary excitation voltage 50 to 115 VAC Before power on operation can be performed the switches S1 52 55 56 57 and jumper TB
399. sappear from the list 5 31 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 3 5 6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target Display Lost TGT Data The data of the last lost AIS target can be displayed The data of only one target that has been lost most recently can be displayed Procedures 1 Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 8 Display Lost Target Data The data of the last lost AIS target will be displayed 5 3 5 7 Displaying Own Ship s AIS Data Own Ship s AIS Data The AIS data of own ship can be displayed Procedures 1 Open the Own Ship s AIS Data menu by performing the following menu operation AIS 9 Own Ship s AIS Data The own ship s AIS data will be displayed 5 3 6 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display When an AIS target is activated a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS target symbol A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in activation order Once a target ID number is assigned it identifies the target until the target 1s lost or deactivated Procedures 1 Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the following menu operation Japan Radio Ltd 5 32 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION AIS 4 AIS Filter Setting 2 Le
400. so Section 9 1 1 List of Alarms and other Indications 5 40 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY 5 5 1 CPA TCPA Alarm AN CAUTION Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions the 69 navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents such as collisions In the system targets are categorized into two types tracked activate AIS targets and dangerous targets The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance So the officer can easily decide which target he should pay attention to It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm unless tracking is ceased or the alarm condition no longer applies The types of target and alarm are shown below CPA TCPA Alarm otatus oymbol larm Ala r Conditions display characters sound Tracked target Q Off Off CPA gt CPA LIMIT 12 gt Activated AIS TCPA gt TCPA LIMIT target The symbol is displayed when one of the above AIS12 conditions is met Dangerous CPA TCPA Beep CPA S CPA LIMIT target 3 sound 12 pee poh 0X TCPA lt TCPA LIMIT ewm An alarm is issued when all Red blinking Alarm the conditions are met acknowle dgeable The AIS tar
401. spection and repair e Turn off the main power before maintenance work Otherwise an electric shock may result e Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment Especially make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier is used Otherwise equipment failure or death or serious injury due to electric shock may result because voltage is outputted from the rectifier even when the radar is not operating For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions it is necessary to make the maintenance work as described below If maintenance 1s made properly troubles will reduce It is recommended to make regular maintenance work Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow Clean the equipment Remove the dust dirt and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry cloth Especially clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation 8 1 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8 2 1 Scanner Unit NKE 1532 AN WARNING Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance Otherwise an electric shock or injury may be caused Turn the safety switch to stop the scanner unit Refer to Section 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Otherwise you may be injured if touching the rotating scanner unit by accident Do not
402. st and west for longitude For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 3 4 16 1 Set Drift Correction The direction and speed of the drift are set This function can be used only when or LOG is selected for ship speed data 1 Open the Set Drift Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 6 NAV Equipment Setting 3 Set Drift Setting 2 Set whether to make corrections or not Off lt gt For menu operation see Section 3 3 3 Basic Menu Operation 3 Enter the correction value for tidal current 2 Set Direction of tidal current true bearing 3 Drift Speed of tidal current For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen see Section 3 3 4 Operation on Numeric Value Latitude Longitude and Character Input menu 3 39 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK 3 5 USE OWN SHIP S TRACK The own ship s track function saves and displays own ship s track If navigation equipment is connected this radar system records latitude longitude data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship s track NOTE Even when own ships track storage interval is turned off own ship s track be displayed However in this case if rewrite operati
403. st the value so that the main bang can be erased Japan Radio Co Lid 7 34 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT 7 3 4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor SSR MON Attension Replace the Antenna unit TRX Module CMN 750 performance monitor circuit CAY 71 and radar process circuits CHA 396 CDC 1349 CMH 2246 adjust the perfomance monitor according to the procedures in this section i Transmission Monitor Adjustment Tx MON Adjustment The radar system is equipped with an interswitch For adjusting the performance unit set the interswitch connection to straight i e No 1 scanner is connected to No 1 display unit as the Master 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tx Monitor Adjustment menu 1 Adjust Menu gt 4 Adjustment 7 SSR MON Setting 2 Tx MON Adjustment 3 Adjustthe Tx MON Adjustment value to 0 0 1 0dB by operating the button 4 Left click the ENT button 4 SSR MON Setting Adjust to 0 0 1 0dB Tx MON Adjustment Tx ATT Value 2 TX MON Adsustment 4 Rx MON Adjustment 5 Monitor Sector 6 Monitor Range 7 Rx MON Gain CLR ENT EXIT 7 35 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 3 ADJUSTMENT Receiver Monitor Adjustment Rx MON Adjustment Attension Do not change
404. started 7 39 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7 4 3 Save of Internal Memory Data Card1 2 The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in all menus onto a flash memory card If the radar processing circuit in the system has been replaced the set values before the circuit replacement can be restored by reading the set values you saved before the replacement To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card option the card must be inserted in card slot beforehand 7 4 3 1 Copying of Internal Settings onto Card Internal To Card1 2 Save the internal memory data such as item settings in menus onto a flash memory card The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting and the operation condition should be saved periodically 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Open the 3 Maintenance Menu 3 Select Siot2 in the 3 Internal To 1 2 4 Select 1 Yes in the Confirmation Menu The internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card 7 4 3 2 Reading of Internal Settings from Card Card1 2 To Internal Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into the system memory Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system 1 Open the Serviceman Menu 2 Ope
405. struction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 9 Inter Switch Unit 9 Inter Switch Unit B 9 1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 NCD 9170 NCD 4990 TB4201 TB4201 ISW IN OUT ISW IN OUT TRIGIN 1 3 TRIGIN 1 TRIGIN 1E 4 TRIGIN 1E YELLOW WHITE BLUE MTRIN 14 EX 8 MTRIN 1 WHITE WHITE MTRIN 1 10 MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1E ORANGE PWRIN 1 BLACK PWRIN 1E PINK m m MTRIN 1E m PWRIN 1 m PWRIN 1E m PWROUT 1 PWROUT 1E 3 PWROUT 1 BROWN 2 E 2 m E VDOUT 1 m VDOUT 1E VDOUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 TRIGOUT 1E PURPLE BPOUT 1E BZOUT 1E WHITE YELLOW MTROUT 14 WHITE WHITE MTROUT 1 MTORUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 m TRIGOUT 1E N eo BPOUT 1 N m BPOUT 1E N N m m BZOUT 1 N Ww BZOUT 1E N MTROUT 1 MTROUT 1 N N ao ut a MTORUT 1E H 2695111153 JRC SUPPLY Fig B 16 Terminal Board Connetion Diagram of NQE 3141 2A B 21 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt B DRAWINGS gt B 9 Inter Switch Unit LO Jo c i m UU MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1 MTRIN 1E PWRIN 1 PWRIN 1E PWROUT 1 PWROUT 1E VDOUT 1 VDOUT 1E TRIGOUT 1 TRIGOUT 1E BPOUT 1 BPOUT 1E BZOUT 1 BZOUT 1E MTROUT 1 MTROUT 1 MTORUT 1E CH4 DISPLAY4 NC D 4990 TB4 201 ER lt lt H 269511115
406. t 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the Brilliance Setting menu Adjust the radar display to obtain the best to view video 3 8 6 Adjust Sound Volume Buzzer Volume When an alarm is activated the operation panel issues an alarm audible to inform user of the change of the condition The alarm sound can be adjusted by performing the following procedures 1 Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu operation below Main 7 Sub Menu 5 Buzzer Volume Display Buzzer Volume menu will appear The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alarm Level4 indicates maximum volume and Off indicates minimum volume Key ACK The operation key acknowledgement is set OPE Miss The incorrect operation alarm is set CPA TCPA Alarm The dangerous ship alarm is set New Target Alarm The automatic acquisition target alarm is set Lost Alarm The target lost alarm is set Navigation Alarm he navigation data abnormality alarm is set System Alarm The system abnormality alarm is set Inter Switch he inter switch switching alarm is set 3 8 7 Set User Option Keys OPTION 1 2 Users can freely make settings with OPTION 1 key and OPTION 2 key By using the keys users can open a frequently used menu by only single operation or assign special functions to the user key switches Japan Radio Ltd 3
407. t Manual AUTO LOG 1 PRF setting is Normal 32 nm PRF setting 1s High Power 24 nm Refer to Appendix 3 8 3 2 Japan Radio Ltd 11 6 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION gt 11 5 AIS FUNCTION 11 5 AIS FUNCTION AIS Function Available range scale All range Activation Activation mode Manual AUTO AUTO mode uses Auto activation Zone Manual Cancellation Any one Target Presentation Number of Activated Target 100 Targets Number of Target 300 Targets sleeping target and activated target Past Position True Relative Display Number of Dots 10 points Display Interval Time 0 5 1 2 4 min Display Interval distance 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 NM Message Broadcast Message Addressed Message Display mode TM True Motion RM Relative Motion Azimuth mode North up Head up Course up Vector mode True Relative Display Vector Length Variable 1 to 60 min 1min step Alarm Auto activation Zone 2 Sector Setting Range AZ1 0 5 to 32nm AZ2 0 5 to 32nm 3 8 3 3 PRF setting Normal AZ1 0 5 to 32nm AZ2 0 5 to 32nm 3 8 3 3 PRF setting High Power Alarm Indication Symbol on Display Visible Audible Alarm oafe Limits Setting Condition CPA LIMIT 0 1 to 9 9NM TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99min Alarm Condition Safe Target gt CPALIMT 0 TCPA TCPA gt TCPA LIMIT Danger Target CPA LIMIT S TCPA LIMIT Alarm Indication tatus Symb
408. t of alarms displayed by the system and other display lists Table9 1 Critical Alarm Message Class Description ALR CPA TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target 301 i ALR No Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence 9 1 Japan Radio Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING Table9 2 List of System Error Message Message Class Description ALR Autopilot Data Alarm Autopilot No communication or data error 101 Current Data Alarm Tidal current No communication or data error 119 Date Data Alarm Date data No communication or data error 112 Datum Data Alarm DTM No communication or data error 122 Depth Data Alarm Water depth No communication or data error 115 Fan LCD Alarm LCD monitor Fan error 955 Fan Power Alarm Power Supply Fan error 953 Fan PROC Alarm RADAR Process Unit Interconnection Fan error 951 GPS Status Alarm GPS status error 103 GYRO I F Data Alarm GYRO I F No communication or checksum error 324 GYRO GYRO Alarm GYRO I F GYRO error detected 110 GYRO Log Alarm GYRO I F Log error detected 111 Heading Data Alarm Heading data No communication or data error 113 Keyboard Data Alarm Operation unit Communication error or checksum 325 error Keyboard2 Data Alarm Second operation unit Communication error or 325 checksum e
409. tate Power Amplifier SP1 0 07 u s 4 6 u s 8MHz 1860Hz or 2280Hz 1 0 14 us 9 1 8MHz 1860Hz or 2280Hz MP2 0 29 9 1 8MHz 1860Hz or 2280Hz LP1 0 57 us 9 1 us 8 2 1280Hz LP2 1 14 u s 18 3 u s 8MHz 640Hz 0 125 0 25 0 5NM SP1 0 75NM SP1 MP1 1 5NM SP1 MP1 MP2 3NM SP1 MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 6NM MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 12NM MP2 LP1 LP2 24NM LP1 LP2 48NM 96NM LP2 Duplexer Circulator Diode Limiter Front End Module Built in Intermediate Frequency 63MHz Band Width 30MHz Gain more than 50dB Amplifying Characteristics Linear Amplifier Overall Noise Figure within 4 0dB Typical 1 PRF setting is Normal Japan Radio Co Ltd 1860Hz PRF setting is High Power 2280Hz Refer to Appendix 3 8 3 2 11 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 11 SPECIFICATION 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 11 3 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 DISPLAY UNIT NCD 9170 Dimension Width 700 x Depth 850 x Height 1100 mm Structure Self Standing Drip Proof Mass Approx 130kg screen 23 1inch Color LCD Effective Diameter more than 320mm Viewing Distance 1m from the center of Display Range Scale 0 125 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 5 3 6 12 24 48 96NM Range Marker 0 025 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 25 0 5 1 2 4 8 16NM Range Accuracyr Less than 1 of the Range Scale in use or 30m whichever is larger Variable Range Marker 2
410. ted by more than one operator the operators can register operation status as suitable for them and call the status Operation status for up to five operations can be registered and a name can be assigned to each status Up to 10 alphanumeric characters Data saved by the user setting Display Color Setting Buzzer Volume Option Key Setting Date Display Style EBL VRM Control CURS Cursor Length 3 10 1 Save Operating State Save User Setting The system s current operating state can be saved in the system by performing the operation below Procedures 1 Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main gt 7 Sub Menu 3 User Setting 2 Save User Setting The Save User Setting menu will appear 2 Left click the button for the file to be saved The file name input screen will appear 3 Enter a file name to be saved The Input File Name menu will appear On the numeric value input screen enter a file name After the file name has been entered the operating conditions will be saved Japan Radio Ltd 3 120 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 10 USE USER SETTING 3 10 2 Load Operating State Load User Setting The operating state saved in the system can be loaded by performing the operation below When the operating state is loaded the previous operating state data 1s discarded Therefore if you do not want to discard the operating state d
411. the direct echo return from the target and the other 1s the secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands 1n the same direction as shown in Fig 6 7 Direct microwave Actual target Radar scanner Secondary reflection Funnel of microwave False echo from funnel Fig 6 7 False echo by secondary reflection d False Echo by Multiple Reflection When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig 6 8 multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display These echoes appear in the same intervals of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target Fig 6 8 False echo by multiple reflection e Second Time Echoes The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a target as described in the Section 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON Ifa so called duct occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition however the radar beam may propagate to a abnormally long distance at which a target may be detected by the radar Japan Radio Ltd 6 10 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 4 FALSE ECHOES For instance assuming that the pulse length 1s MP2 on the repetition frequency of 2280 Hz the first pulse 15 reflected from a target at about 35 5 NM or more and received during the next pulse repetition time In this case a false echo second time echo appe
412. the upper right of the display and left click The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left clicking Tm Cursor bearing is displayed in true bearing mode R Cursor bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode 4 2 2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker EBL VRM Japan Radio Ltd 4 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND Procedures 1 Press the EBL 1 key EBL1 numeric value indication e EBL1 at the upper true relative switching 1 adjustment right of the display will be TENET RA highlighted and EBL1 will be 300929 5521796 m shown with a dotted line on the O 742 EBL1 8 186 3 display m ae R 1997 2 Move the EBL 1 to the 2 VRM2 252 _ target by turning the EBL T dial VRM1 adjustment EBL1 starting point mode switching The EBL1 bearing will be shown in the EBL1 bearing located at the upper right of the display The EBL1 bearing is the bearing of the target 3 Press the VRM1 key e VRM1 located at the upper right of the display will be highlighted and VRMI will be shown with a dotted line on the PPI display 4 Move the to the target by turning the VRM dial The range of VRMI from the own ship s position will be shown in the VRMI range located at the upper right of the display
413. the user map Shift If the display position on the user map is different from an actual position it can be changed to the correct position in manual mode 1 Open the Shift menu by performing the menu operation below U Map 3 Shift is displayed for the Cursor mode indicating that the user map shift mode is selected 2 Putthe pointer on a mark or end of a line coastline or depth contour line and left click 3 Move the cross cursor mark to the location to be corrected and left click Positions of all marks and lines currently displayed will be corrected At this time Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction lower right of the display indicating that the position is being corrected Map Shift Heading correction is conducted Heading correction is not conducted 3 61 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3 6 4 2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state Shift Clear Procedures 1 Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 4 Shift Clear Only the most recently corrected data for a single input will be cleared and the data will be displayed at its original position At this time Map Shift is not displayed in the map position correction lower right of the display Map Shift Heading correction is conducted Heading correction is not conduct
414. this button is clicked the Inter Switch Menu is closed If only 2 display units are installed but the interswitch is set for 3 or more display units the Inter Switch Menu for 3 or more display units will appear Inter Switch Menu with 3 or More Display Units Inter Switch a Connected No 2 No 3 4 o5 f 1 6 25 scanner unit None x b Display unit Nota 71x2 53X2 o connected as OASIS master c Display unit connected as slave f Set d Name 2 File Operations to Close This Menu Click Exit Button or 0 Key e File g Exit Operations a Connected scanner unit In mode for naming a display unit or antenna unit clicking on a unit opens the name input window A 5 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt A NQE 3141 Interswitch Unit gt A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION b Display unit connected as master c Display unit connected as slave If this button is clicked select cancel the display unit If this button is clicked in the naming a display unit or scanner unit mode the name input window is opened d Name If this button is clicked set to the display or scanner unit rename mode e File Operations If this button is clicked the File Operations menu is opened f Set If this button is clicked the change of connection is determined g Exit If this button is clicked the Inter Switch Menu is closed A 2 3 Chang
415. tically activated when they go into the automatic activation zone The automatic activation zone is identical to the automatic acquisition zone AZ used for target tracking For the zone setting refer to Section 5 2 1 Acquiring Target ACQ The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition activation zone If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum they are deactivated in the low priority See the Section 5 1 2 Definitions of Symbols If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed refer to Section 5 3 6 Displaying Target ID No Target Number Display 5 3 4 Deactivate AIS Targets Deactivate AIS Deactivate an AIS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line Procedures 1 2 Put the cursor on the AIS target to be deactivated and right click The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed Left click 5 DEACT AIS The selected AIS target will be deactivated O This operation is available only for an activated AIS target Japan Radio Co Ltd 5 28 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 3 AIS OPERATION 5 3 5 Displaying AIS Information TGT DATA 5 3 5 1 Types of information displayed There are two modes simple and detail to display AIS target information The display items are determined by the selected mode Display Item Detail mode oimple mode NAME ship name
416. tion Copy Procedures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 While the File Manager window is open left click the device 1 selection button Selected items for Devicel will be displayed Left click the button corresponding to the device from which data is to be copied The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed Left click the device 2 selection button Selected items for Device2 will be displayed Left click button corresponding to the device to which data is to be copied The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed Put the cursor on the data to be copied and Left click button Left click button one more time will cancel the selection Left click the button The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear If there is a file having the same name the file selection window will appear When deleting saved data and copying new data left click 1 Overwite to select Overwrite When adding data to a destination file left click 2 Add to select Add Even in the Add mode WPT data and Route data are overwritten When selection has been made Confirmation Window will appear Enter the file name to be saved Up to 10 characters can be entered For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character After the data has been entered Confirmation Window will appear Left click the 1 Yes button Th
417. tion into straight ISW Time Out INFO Failed in switching Master Standby INFO The master display unit does not transmit any signals Pattern CHG Failed INFO Connection change failed TXRX Standby INFO The scanner unit is in the standby mode Update ISW INFO Tried to enter new TXRX function when interswitch Software software used old version i ALR No Unique alarm number ALR sentence and ACK sentence Note Interswitch is un available for evaluation model 9 5 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER SALES SERVICE gt 9 1 FAULT FINDING 9 1 2 Operation Checking When the system 15 operating the operation status located at the upper right of the screen is changing pictures If picture freeze occurred turn off the system and restart the system Own ShP Information Operation Status HDG cvs 315 0 SPD 2axc 15 6 kn COG 305 9 500 15 8 kn UTC 2008 07 01 1234 55 14 3501 6584 11 55 234 9 1 3 Fuse Checking Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause When a fuse 1 replaced it is necessary to check the related circuits even if there 1 no trouble In checking note that there is some dispersion in the fusing characteristics Table 9 8 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment Table9 9 Fuse List Location Parts Current Protection Type Rating Circuit AC DC Converter F501 10A Motor ST6 10AN1 GYRO Interface 1 4 0 5A GYRO MFGONR
418. tion Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY USER 3 9 1 3 3 9 2 Changing Function Setting memory contents change To change the memory contents of functions 1 to 4 use the function setting menu For how to operate the function setting menu see Section 3 9 3 Overview of Function Operations User Function Setting page 1 1 Mode 2 IR 3 Process 4 Target Enhance 5 AUTO Sea Rain 6 Save Present State page 2 Pulse Length 0 75 Pulse Length 1 5NM Pulse Length 3 4NM Pulse Length 6 8NM Pulse Length 12NM Pulse Length 16NM Oar 1 Video Latitude 2 Video Noise Rejection 3 AUTO Dynamic Range 4 Process Switch 5 2nd Process Mode 6 Process Switch Range 7 Fast Target Detection page 4 1 Trails Interval 2 Trails Mode 3 Trails Reference Level 4 Trails Reduction 6 Trails Process T Max Interval page 5 Gain Offset PRF Small Buoy Detection Fishnet Detection Antenna Height Set Mode Default Initialize 00 Japan Radio Co Ltd Function Setting Menu Items The function setting menu has the items below Option Name of the mode to be used Coast Deepsea Radar interference rejection Off Low Middle High Video process PROC Off 3Scan CORREL Target expansion Off Level1 Level2 Level3 Automatic clutter suppression Off AUTO Sea AUTO Sea Rain Saving the present state Option Standard pulse lengt
419. tion Pattern with or More Display Units A 7 A 2 5 Operating Connection Pattern Files File Operations A 8 A 2 6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units A 9 A 3 REFERENCE TT A 10 A 3 1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern A 10 A 3 2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern A 10 A 3 3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit A 10 A 3 4 Setting at Installation cessere sees A 11 Appendix B DRAWINGS B 1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit B 1 BLI oco edid epa tees B 2 B 12 0170 2 eame radeon B 3 Ed 4 4 NWZ TITO RT iei aa ee eee 5 BLS 2 6 16 5322 7 B 2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit B 8 B 3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit B 9 Japan Radio Co Ltd B 4 Primary Power System Diagram B 10 B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit B 11 Xo ME
420. to Decide Targets as Identical Association 5 38 5 4 2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical Association Setting 5 38 5 4 3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set 5 39 5 5 ALARM DISPLAY out 5 40 5 5 1 CPAJTTGCPA Alarm 5 41 5 5 2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone New ANG CU MER 5 42 5 9 3 Lost Target Alarm Lost 5 42 5 5 4 Gyro Set Alarmi a Ere 5 43 5 6 TRACK FUNCTION rosa 5 44 5 6 1 Past Position Past POSN 5 44 5 6 2 Target Ship s Tracks Target Track 5 45 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 5 54 5 7 1 Trial Maneuvering the True Vector Mode 5 55 5 7 2 Trial Maneuvering the Relative Vector Mode 5 56 5 7 3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function 5 57 SECTION 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY 6 1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON 6 1 6 2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET 6 3 Japan Radio Co Ltd 6
421. touch the radiator Even if the power is turned off the radiator may be rotated by the wind After the work turn ON the scanner unit safety switch a Precautions in Mounting the Cover When the cover 1s removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted after such work the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following precautions 1 2 3 The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts M8 is 1176 to 1470 N cm 120 to 150kgf cm which makes the inside water tight and protects the packings against permanent compressive strain The packings start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N cm 150kgf cm Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value Otherwise the screws may be broken Use an offset wrench of 11 mm X 13 mm or a double ended wrench of 13 mm X 17 mm not longer than 200 mm Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing then fasten them evenly in order not to cause one sided fastening Fasten the bolts with 25 of the required torque at the first step Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order Japan Radio Co Ltd 8 2 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE gt 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8 M8 stainless steel bolt Tightening torque 120 to 150 kgf cm Bolt Tightening Procedure of NKE 1532 Cover b Radiator Attention e If the radiator front face radiation plane is
422. ts are to be re acquired from the beginning all the current vectors can also be canceled 5 2 2 1 Canceling targets one by one ACQ CANCEL Procedures 1 Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling target and press the ACQ CANCEL key The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear and only the radar video remain 5 2 2 2 Canceling all targets collectively ACQ CANCEL Procedures 1 Press the ACQ CANCEL key for 5 seconds The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear and only the radar videos remain When all the targets have been canceled the system stops NOTE tracking them Thus you need to re acquire targets in manual or automatic acquisition mode Do not cancel all the targets unless otherwise required 5 17 Japan Radio Co did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5 2 3 Tracked Target Data Display TGT DATA Attention When a target or own ship changes its course or when a new target is acquired its vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or more has passed after such course change or target acquisition Even if 3 minutes or more has passed the vector may include an error depending upon the tracking conditions 5 2 3 1 Type of Data Display Target Information Target Data Target identification TT ID 10 number of the target True bea
423. tude will be determined Then enter the value of longitude 5 Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of longitude XX xxx xxx 6 To make changes between east longitude and west longitude use the buttons East longitude Left click the button West longitude Left click the button 7 Left click the ENT button The manually entered longitude will be determined NOTE he own ships position manually entered by using the function above is valid only in the navigation data setting menu After exiting from the menu the manually entered position data is invalidated 3 6 3 2 Moving a mark or line Move With regard to the created user map a mark or line is moved individually 1 Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu operation U Map 2 Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear 2 Left click the 3 Move button Japan Radio Ltd 3 54 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP The user map move mode is selected is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display 3 Putthe cursor on a mark or line and left click When a mark or line to be moved is selected the 47 cursor mark will appear 4 Move the 47 cursor mark to the destination and left click The selected mark or line 1s moved to the destination To move another mark or line repeat procedures 3 and 4
424. tween Slotl and Slot2 4 Left click 6 Card T TRK Display The Card T TRK Display menu will appear Currently saved target ship s track data on the card will be listed 5 Left click the button corresponding to the file to be displayed The Confirmation Window will appear 6 Left click 1 Yes to display the T TRK line The selected file will be highlighted and the currently saved target track data will be displayed 1 Open the Card T TRK Display window The displayed file is highlighted 2 Left click the button corresponding to the displayed file The file will be deselected and returned to normal display 5 53 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver 8 TRIAL MANEUVERING Trial Maneuver Attention Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ship s course and speed in the conditions that the course and speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are As the situation is different from any actual ship maneuvering set values with large margins to CPA Limit and TCPA Limit The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ship s course and speed for collision avoidance when a dangerous target appears When the own ship s course and speed are entered in manual mode the trial maneuvering function checks 1f pre acquired or pre activated targets are dangerous
425. tween Waypoints that is to have its Planned Speed corrected The section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected 15 specified and the new Planned Speed is applied to the section 5 To correct the Planned Speed of another section repeat procedures 3 and 4 6 To finish correcting Planned Speed left click the 4 Correct Planned Speed button The Planned Speed correcting mode will be cancelled Example Planned 10 00kr Quo pow 113T 113T AT eu wg a ms A 1 0kn dl 001 005 Section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected 3 7 2 5 Deleting a Waypoint Delete Waypoint The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system 15 deleted 1 Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below Route 2 WPT Route Setting 3 Set Route Sequence 2 Left click the 5 Delete button The Waypoint deleting mode is selected 3 73 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3 On the radar display put the cursor on a Waypoint to be deleted and left click The specified Waypoint is deleted and the previous and following Waypoints are then connected by a line 4 To delete another Waypoint repeat procedure 3 5 To finish deleting a Waypoint left click the 5 Delete button The Waypoint deleting mode will be cancelled Example Waypoint to be deleted 000 02 004 NS 1
426. two or more staff member work together when replacing the LCD If only one person attempts to replace the LCD he she may drop it and become injured Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut off Failure to comply may result in electrocution Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation Do not make any adjustments during navigation Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment failure Do not make any adjustments during navigation Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary If set at an inappropriate value the target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates and this may lead to accidents xii Japan Radic Co Ltd The Mounting Point of the Warning Label Warning Label c NCD 9170 Display Unit Warning Label Front face Back face NWZ 178 Monitor Unit Japan Radio Ltd xiv Warning Label NDC 1478 Radar Process Unit Desktop Type Japan R
427. umeric Display When the sleeping AIS SART symbol is clicked once the symbol changes into activated AIS SART symbol And then activated AIS SART symbol is clicked once more the symbol changes into numeric displayed AIS SART symbol and their information 1s displayed AIS ID 1 Name AIS SART ACT Call Sign Not Available MMSI 977470000 COG 2 SOG CPA BRG Range HDG ROT POSN 35 02 0000 gt 139 02 0000 Destination Mot Available Status SART 14 Fig 6 11 Example of numeric information display of AIS SART Depending on operation condition NAV Status 15 displayed as follows Normal operation SART ACTIVE 14 Test operation SART TEST 15 Notice AIS SART function is available in the display software ver 01 01 As for method of confirming software version refer to Section 8 3 1 6 System Information 6 13 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY gt 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS SART Japan Radio Ltd 6 14 SECTION 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION L i F I Fi i d 1 i a i i 1 i I i I
428. value sequentially left click the software number keys as shown below EN NEN NNI Make sure that the entered value is correct and left click the ENT button The set value is reflected to the operating state To stop entering a value right click the ENT button Alternatively left click the CLR button The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state 3 3 4 4 Latitude longitude input screen button south latitude Center Position 12 34 567 N 123 45 678 E Entered latitude longitude Numeric button button north latitude east longitude 3 6 9 west longitude CLR ENT CLR button ENT button Japan Radio Ltd 3 20 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3 3 4 5 X Entering latitude longitude 1 On the latitude longitude input screen sequentially click numeric buttons to enter latitude XX XX For example to enter 12 34 567 sequentially click numeric buttons as follows i 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 To make change between north latitude and south latitude use and North latitude Left click the button South latitude Left click the button 3 Left click the ENT button The manually entered latitude value is determined Then enter the longitude value 4 Sequentially click numeric buttons to enter longitude XXX XX
429. wer plug the example on the left is shown in the mark Warning Label There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment Do not try to remove break or modify the label Japan Radio Ltd vi 9 9 9 PRECAUTIONS AN DANGER Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment components Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may result in fire hazard or electrocution For inspection and repair work of equipment components consult with our branch office branch shop sales office or our distributor in your district When conducting maintenance make sure to turn the main power off Failure to comply may result in electrocution Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment Especially when a rectifier is used make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned off Failure to comply may result in equipment failure or death or serious injury due to electric shock When conducting maintenance work on the scanner make sure to turn its main power off Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries vii Japan Radio Co Ltd N DANGER Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch Failure to o comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating scanner N WARNING Never directly touch the internal components of the 4 scanner or indicator
430. wildly Peak Hold Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low 3 8 1 6 Process Switch Range Set the boundary range of a specific area This function is enabled when Range Fix 15 selected in Section 3 8 1 4 Process Switch The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship s position as the center The boundary range can be set in units of 0 1 nm ranging 0 1 to 25 5 nm 3 95 Japan Radio did JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 1 7 Fast Target Detection This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan correlative process mode This function is enabled when 3Scan 4Scan CORREL or 55 CORREL is selected as the video process mode If unwanted waves remain on the radar display suppress them by using the SEA RAIN or GAIN dial or adjusting the interference rejection mode Off Disables the Fast Target Detection function On Enables the Fast Target Detection function Japan Radio Ltd 3 96 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3 8 2 Set Radar Trails RADAR Trails Setting This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails processing Procedures 1 Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu operation below Main 3 RADAR Menu EX
431. will appear For the input method on the character input screen see Section 3 3 4 7 Entering a character After having entered a file name left click the ENT button The entry of the file name will be finished Confirmation Window will appear Left click the 1 Yes button The route data will be saved with the specified file name Loading route data Load Route data is loaded into the radar system from a flash memory card Flash memory card option is necessary Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a NOTE flash memory card the route data that has been saved in the radar system is overwritten and erased Route data that has been erased cannot be resaved Note that important route data should be saved in a flash memory card Japan Radio Ltd 3 90 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 3 BASIC OPERATION gt 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 1 Insert a flash memory card into the card slot 2 Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below Route 4 File Operation 3 Left click the _ 2 Load button Contents of the specified memory card file list will be displayed 4 Left click the button for the desired file name Confirmation Window will appear 5 Left click the 1 Yes button The route data with the specified file name will be loaded 3 7 8 4 Erasing route data Erase An unnecessary route data file saved on a flash memory card is erased F
432. will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed The vector will be displayed within one minute Target manually acquired The initial acquisition symbol is displayed Target that has passed for 1 min The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed To perform operation only in the manual acquisition mode without automatic acquisition activation turn off the automatic acquisition activation function Japan Radio Ltd 5 16 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 5 OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS gt 5 2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 1 Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid and get the other targets automatically acquired If a new target appears exceeding the maximum number of targets the manually acquired target 1s displayed even in the background until it gets out of the display However automatically acquired targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship 5 2 2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets ACQ CANCEL Unwanted tracked targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases e Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors symbols are displayed after being acquired and tracked The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy observation When targe
433. witch Unit Type NQE 3141 4A Option Fig 1 7 Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit Type NQE 3141 8A Option Fig 1 8 Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit Type NQE 3167 Option 1 5 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS CC ONIMVMO 3NITLOO 8 25 POET B ago jou sp amo 2 JUON 186 2444 052 LN 31870 9 nem Ca tszk g az t XO NOMLdG HALY IH HOUMS 3395 ADL NOLEOS NNINE3I C30N3ANO2E 000 200 31040 ONS SIGE gt LEADZ Loe ONO THY E EDP E 9 Fig 1 1 Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit 1532 1 6 Japan Radio Ltd JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION gt 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS LINN AS asid 1 un TINA oon SSVN MOL SA et E me HNI lt E a de d rar Uns SL dd HON P E p 1 adi l f ae HIER Ho T COREE WI H DM eee Fed
434. x Lines Pl Menu Parallel index lines can be displayed 4 1 4 1 Operating Parallel Index Lines 1 Press the VRM dial Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear To change the bearing of parallel index lines turn the EBL dial to change the line interval turn the VRM dial The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu 2 Press the VRM dial again The parallel index lines will be fixed Parallel index lines are operable only while the Menu 15 displayed When the menu is closed the parallel index line display remains but the settings of the bearing and interval cannot be adjusted any more To adjust the bearing and interval after closing the menu press the VRM dial twice to open the PI Menu 1 Press the VRM dial again The parallel index line display will disappear 4 1 4 2 Operation of Parallel Index Lines e Parallel index lines rotate in the same direction as you turn the EBL dial The intervals of parallel index lines narrow when you turn the VRM dial counterclockwise and widen when you turn the dial clockwise When the VRM dial is pressed the PI Menu closes and the parallel index lines are fixed Japan Radio Ltd 4 8 JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS EBL 1 EBL2 VRM 1 9 4 During the operation of parallel index
435. xiliary line and set the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the EBL dial The bearing of the auxiliary line is the final bearing in which the own ship is to move The WOL position varies depending on the bearing of the auxiliary line If the WOL is behind the CCRP the line color of WOL will change 3 Left click The setting will be determined However if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at this point left clicking is reyected and the setting is not determined Auxiliary line Radius WOL Steering point Reach Range from when the rudder is steered to when the ship begins to turn Radius Turning radius Maneuver curve Own ship s position 4 15 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 6 Operating EBL VRM and PI with Cursor When the cursor mode 15 set to located at the upper right of the display EBL VRM and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball 4 1 6 1 Operating Electronic Bearing Line EBL 1 Put the cursor EBL1 or EBL2 and left click When the cursor is moved to it EBLI EBL2 is shown at the upper right of the cursor The EBL becomes operable when left clicking 2 Move the cursor to the bearing to be set The EBL will move as the cursor moves 3 Left click The EBL will be fixed 4 1 6 2 Operating Variable Range Marker Procedures
436. y from the other EBL An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM of the same number Intersection markers shown on EBL EBL1 VRM1 EBL2 VRM2 EBL2 VRM2 EBL VRM1 EBL Bearing Display The bearing value of the current EBL1 EBL2 on the PPI display is shown in the upper right of the display The currently operable EBL2 is highlighted in the upper right of the display Starting Point of EBL The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched from the center of the radar display to any offset position The offset position of the EBL starting point can be fixed on the radar display or at the latitude and longitude The setting of the navigator is necessary for fixing the offset position at the latitude and longitude 4 3 Japan Radio Co Lid JMA 9172 SA Instruction Manual gt 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING gt 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4 1 3 1 Operating EBL EBL Procedures 1 2 Press the EBL1 or EBL2 key The EBL button located at the upper right of the display will be highlighted and the selected EBL becomes operable Turn the EBL dial To turn the EBL dial to the right turn the EBL control clockwise to turn the EBL dial to the left turn the EBL control counterclockwise Press the EBL 1 or EBL2 key again The selected EBL display will disappear 4 1 3 2 Moving the Starting Po

ETA Systems UPS 600VA

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents